Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Oracle® Enterprise Manager Ops CenterConfiguration Reference
12c Release 3 (12.3.2.0.0)
E59970-04
July 2016
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Configuration Reference, 12c Release 3 (12.3.2.0.0)
E59970-04
Copyright © 2007, 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Primary Authors: Krithika Gangadhar, Laura Hartman, Karen Orozco Sanchez
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions onuse and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in yourlicense agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license,transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverseengineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, isprohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. Ifyou find any errors, please report them to us in writing.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it onbehalf of the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software,any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users are"commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of theprograms, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware,and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs.No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications.It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications thatmay create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then youshall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure itssafe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of thissoftware or hardware in dangerous applications.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks oftheir respective owners.
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks areused under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Opteron,the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced MicroDevices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content, products,and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expresslydisclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services unlessotherwise set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its affiliateswill not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-partycontent, products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle.
Contents
Preface .............................................................................................................................................................. xiii
Audience ..................................................................................................................................................... xiii
Related Documents.................................................................................................................................... xiii
Conventions................................................................................................................................................ xiii
1 Get Started With Configuration
Overview of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center in Your Datacenter....................................... 1-1
About the Scope of This Document ....................................................................................................... 1-2
Product Documentation Library ............................................................................................................ 1-2
Viewing User Preferences and Role Preferences.................................................................................. 1-4
About the Current User Interface Preferences ............................................................................. 1-5
About Preferences By Role.............................................................................................................. 1-7
About Preferences for Sign In and Start Page .............................................................................. 1-7
About Preferences for the Membership Graph............................................................................ 1-7
Preferences for Time Intervals........................................................................................................ 1-8
Changing the Size of a Console Window.............................................................................................. 1-8
Related Resources for Getting Started ................................................................................................... 1-9
2 Manage Assets
Introduction to Asset Management ....................................................................................................... 2-1
Roles for Asset Management................................................................................................................... 2-2
Actions Available for Asset Management............................................................................................. 2-2
Location of Asset Information in the User Interface............................................................................ 2-3
About Discovering Assets ....................................................................................................................... 2-3
Before You Begin to Discover Assets ..................................................................................................... 2-4
Actions for Proxy Controllers......................................................................................................... 2-5
Preparing to Use sudo ..................................................................................................................... 2-5
About SNMPv3................................................................................................................................. 2-8
Discovery Profiles ..................................................................................................................................... 2-8
About Discovery Profiles ................................................................................................................ 2-9
Discovering Assets Using a Discovery Profile ............................................................................. 2-9
Creating a Discovery Profile ......................................................................................................... 2-11
iii
Editing a Discovery Profile ........................................................................................................... 2-13
Copying a Discovery Profile......................................................................................................... 2-13
Deleting a Discovery Profile ......................................................................................................... 2-14
Service Tags ............................................................................................................................................. 2-14
About Service Tags......................................................................................................................... 2-14
Enabling Discovery by Service Tags............................................................................................ 2-14
Discovering Assets by Using Service Tags ................................................................................. 2-15
Overview of Declaring Servers ............................................................................................................. 2-16
About Declaring Servers for OS Provisioning ........................................................................... 2-16
Declaring One Server..................................................................................................................... 2-16
Information for Declaring a Server .............................................................................................. 2-16
Declaring Multiple Servers ........................................................................................................... 2-17
About Declaring Servers for Service Processor Configuration................................................ 2-18
Declaring Servers for Service Processor Configuration............................................................ 2-18
Management Credentials....................................................................................................................... 2-19
Upgrading Management Credentials From a Prior Version.................................................... 2-20
Updating Management Credentials ............................................................................................ 2-20
Creating Management Credentials.............................................................................................. 2-21
Editing Management Credentials ................................................................................................ 2-25
Copying Management Credentials.............................................................................................. 2-25
Deleting Management Credentials .............................................................................................. 2-25
About Credentials for Access to the Serial Console or SSH Tunnel ....................................... 2-26
Using Custom SSH Keys for OS Discovery................................................................................ 2-28
Switching Between Agent Controllers or Agent and Agentless ............................................. 2-29
Overview of Installing Agent Controllers Using the Command Line Interface ........................... 2-30
Requirements for Installing an Agent Controller on Oracle Solaris 11 .................................. 2-30
Before You Begin to Install an Agent Controller ....................................................................... 2-31
Installing and Configuring an Agent Controller Manually Using User Credentials ........... 2-31
Installing and Configuring an Agent Controller Manually Using a Token .......................... 2-35
Special Discovery and Management Procedures............................................................................... 2-38
Windows Systems .......................................................................................................................... 2-39
M-Series Servers ............................................................................................................................. 2-40
About the Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance ................................................................................... 2-42
About Oracle Solaris Cluster ........................................................................................................ 2-43
Preparing to Discover ALOM Assets .......................................................................................... 2-44
Managing Assets..................................................................................................................................... 2-44
Editing Asset Attributes ................................................................................................................ 2-45
About the Number of Assets ........................................................................................................ 2-45
Viewing the Number of Assets .................................................................................................... 2-45
Viewing and Removing Access Points........................................................................................ 2-46
Deleting Assets ............................................................................................................................... 2-46
Asset Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 2-47
About Types of Groups ................................................................................................................. 2-48
iv
About Asset Tags............................................................................................................................ 2-49
About Group Data.......................................................................................................................... 2-50
Creating a Group............................................................................................................................ 2-50
Creating a Group for Assets in Maintenance Mode.................................................................. 2-52
Editing a Group .............................................................................................................................. 2-53
Adding Assets to a Group............................................................................................................. 2-54
Removing Assets from a Group................................................................................................... 2-54
Moving Assets to a Group ............................................................................................................ 2-54
Moving a Group ............................................................................................................................. 2-54
Deleting a Group ............................................................................................................................ 2-55
Related Resources for Asset Management.......................................................................................... 2-55
3 Configure Jobs
Introduction to Jobs .................................................................................................................................. 3-1
Roles for Job Management....................................................................................................................... 3-1
Actions Available for Jobs ....................................................................................................................... 3-2
Location of Job Information in the User Interface................................................................................ 3-2
Details of Jobs and Tasks ......................................................................................................................... 3-3
Overview of Viewing Jobs....................................................................................................................... 3-4
Viewing All Jobs and Jobs With Specific Status........................................................................... 3-5
Viewing Job Details.......................................................................................................................... 3-5
Monitoring Jobs for an Asset .......................................................................................................... 3-7
Searching for Jobs ............................................................................................................................. 3-8
Overview of Job Actions.......................................................................................................................... 3-9
Answering Questions for a Job....................................................................................................... 3-9
Stopping a Job ................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Re-running a Completed Job ........................................................................................................ 3-10
Re-running a Job on Failed Targets ............................................................................................. 3-10
Copying a Job.................................................................................................................................. 3-10
Deleting a Job .................................................................................................................................. 3-10
Debugging a Job Using the OCDoctor ........................................................................................ 3-11
Overview of Job Properties ................................................................................................................... 3-11
Job Properties .................................................................................................................................. 3-11
Changing a Job Property ............................................................................................................... 3-12
Events for Jobs......................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Audit Logs ............................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Related Resources for Job Management.............................................................................................. 3-13
4 Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies
Introduction to Monitoring Rules and Policies .................................................................................... 4-1
Roles for Monitoring Rules and Policies ............................................................................................... 4-2
Actions Available for Monitoring Rules and Policies ......................................................................... 4-2
Location of Monitoring Information in the User Interface ................................................................. 4-3
v
Viewing Monitoring Policies and Rules ................................................................................................ 4-3
About Disabling and Enabling Monitoring .......................................................................................... 4-3
About Monitoring Rules .......................................................................................................................... 4-4
About Parameters for User-Defined Rules ................................................................................... 4-5
Overview of Enabled and Active Rules ........................................................................................ 4-5
About Editing Monitoring Rules.................................................................................................... 4-6
Editing a Monitoring Rule .............................................................................................................. 4-7
About Historical Data and Thresholds ......................................................................................... 4-8
About New Monitoring Rules ........................................................................................................ 4-8
Monitoring Policies................................................................................................................................. 4-10
About System and User-Defined Monitoring Policies.............................................................. 4-10
Details of a Monitoring Policy...................................................................................................... 4-12
Copying or Creating a Monitoring Policy .................................................................................. 4-14
About Extracting a Monitoring Policy ........................................................................................ 4-15
Extracting a Monitoring Policy..................................................................................................... 4-15
About Changing the Monitoring Configuration of an Asset Bound to a Monitoring Policy
..................................................................................................................................................... 4-16
About Applying a Monitoring Policy to a Group ..................................................................... 4-17
About Asset Groups with the Same Monitoring Policy ........................................................... 4-17
Modifying a Monitoring Policy.................................................................................................... 4-17
Modifying a Monitoring Rule....................................................................................................... 4-18
Deleting a Monitoring Policy........................................................................................................ 4-18
Related Resources for Monitoring Rules and Policies....................................................................... 4-19
5 Configure Software Libraries
Introduction to Software Libraries and Repositories .......................................................................... 5-1
Roles for Software Libraries .................................................................................................................... 5-2
Actions Available for Software Libraries .............................................................................................. 5-2
Overview of the Knowledge Base and Parent Repository.................................................................. 5-3
About the EC Library....................................................................................................................... 5-3
Changing EC Software Libraries.................................................................................................... 5-3
Publishers and Parent of the Oracle Solaris 11 Repository ........................................................ 5-4
Location of Software Library Information in the User Interface ....................................................... 5-4
About Software Libraries......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Viewing the Contents of a Software Library ........................................................................................ 5-5
About Libraries for Oracle Solaris 11..................................................................................................... 5-5
Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library .................................................................................. 5-6
Summary of Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library ........................................................... 5-7
Content of the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library ........................................................ 5-7
Configuring Parent Repositories to Synchronize ........................................................................ 5-8
About Alternate IPS Repositories .................................................................................................. 5-8
Using an Alternate IPS Repository as the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library ......... 5-9
Adding Content ................................................................................................................................ 5-9
vi
About Using a Custom AI Manifest to Provision an OS .......................................................... 5-10
Deleting Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library ................................................................ 5-12
About Creating a Software Library...................................................................................................... 5-12
Creating a Local Software Library ............................................................................................... 5-12
Creating a NAS Software Library ................................................................................................ 5-13
Overview of the Software Library for Oracle Solaris 10, 9, 8 and Linux........................................ 5-13
Organization of the Linux, Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library .................................................. 5-13
About Images .......................................................................................................................................... 5-14
About OS Images............................................................................................................................ 5-14
About Unified Archives ................................................................................................................ 5-15
Viewing Details of a UAR Image ................................................................................................. 5-16
Creating a UAR Image................................................................................................................... 5-17
About Images for Firmware Updates.......................................................................................... 5-19
About Importing Images............................................................................................................... 5-21
Uploading Firmware Images........................................................................................................ 5-23
About Firmware for Power Distribution Units.......................................................................... 5-23
Adding Local Content for the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library.................................... 5-24
Overview of Local Content for the Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library .... 5-24
About Local Categories ................................................................................................................. 5-25
Creating a Local Category............................................................................................................. 5-25
About Local Actions....................................................................................................................... 5-25
Uploading a Local Action ............................................................................................................. 5-26
About Local Software Packages ................................................................................................... 5-27
Uploading a Local Software Package .......................................................................................... 5-27
About Local Configuration Files .................................................................................................. 5-27
Uploading a Local Configuration File......................................................................................... 5-28
About Uploading Software in Bulk ............................................................................................. 5-28
Using Local Content....................................................................................................................... 5-30
Editing Local Content .................................................................................................................... 5-31
Deleting Local Content .................................................................................................................. 5-31
About Maintaining Images and Local Content .................................................................................. 5-32
Related Resources for Software Libraries ........................................................................................... 5-32
6 Configure Storage
Introduction to Storage ............................................................................................................................ 6-1
Roles for Storage ....................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Actions Available for Storage ................................................................................................................. 6-2
Location of Storage Information in the User Interface ........................................................................ 6-2
Storage Libraries ....................................................................................................................................... 6-3
About Storage Libraries for Virtualization Hosts........................................................................ 6-5
About Storage Libraries for Server Pools...................................................................................... 6-5
Storage Libraries for a Virtual Datacenter .................................................................................... 6-6
Storage Libraries for Oracle Solaris Zones ................................................................................... 6-7
vii
Storage Libraries for Oracle VM Server for SPARC.................................................................... 6-7
About Storage Libraries and Repositories for Oracle VM Server for x86 ................................ 6-7
Types of Storage for Libraries ................................................................................................................. 6-9
About File Systems Libraries ........................................................................................................ 6-10
About Block Storage....................................................................................................................... 6-12
About Oracle VM Storage Connect Plug-ins ...................................................................................... 6-22
Displaying Storage Connect Plugins ........................................................................................... 6-23
Adding a Storage Connect Plugin ............................................................................................... 6-23
Storage Hardware................................................................................................................................... 6-24
RAID Controller ............................................................................................................................. 6-24
About NAS Storage Appliance..................................................................................................... 6-24
File Server ........................................................................................................................................ 6-25
Storage Array .................................................................................................................................. 6-26
Storage Server: Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance .......................................................................... 6-26
Storage Server: Exadata ................................................................................................................. 6-28
About Opaque Storage and Opaque Filesystems .............................................................................. 6-28
Declaring a Logical Domain's Opaque Storage as Shared................................................................ 6-29
Storage Profiles........................................................................................................................................ 6-30
About Multipath Storage for Logical Domains.................................................................................. 6-30
Configuring a Logical Domain for Multipath Storage ...................................................................... 6-31
High Availability for Storage Resources ............................................................................................. 6-31
Related Resources for Storage............................................................................................................... 6-32
7 Configure Networks
Introduction to Networks........................................................................................................................ 7-1
Roles for Networks ................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Actions Available for Networks ............................................................................................................. 7-2
Location of Network Information in the User Interface ..................................................................... 7-2
About Fabrics ............................................................................................................................................ 7-3
About Network Domains ........................................................................................................................ 7-4
About the Default Network Domain............................................................................................. 7-5
About User-Defined Network Domains ....................................................................................... 7-5
Editing Attributes of a User-Defined Network Domain ............................................................ 7-6
About Networks........................................................................................................................................ 7-6
Requirements for a Network .......................................................................................................... 7-7
Limitations of Networks in Previous Versions ........................................................................... 7-8
Disabling Overlapping Networks.................................................................................................. 7-9
Enabling Overlapping Networks................................................................................................... 7-9
Overview of Public Networks and Private Networks .............................................................. 7-10
Assigning Networks to a User-Defined Network Domain...................................................... 7-11
About Bandwidth Management................................................................................................... 7-11
About IPMP Groups ..................................................................................................................... 7-12
Creating an IPMP Group............................................................................................................... 7-13
viii
About Link Aggregations.............................................................................................................. 7-15
Creating a Trunk Link Aggregation ............................................................................................ 7-15
About Datalink Multipathing Aggregation (DLMP) ................................................................ 7-16
Creating a DLMP Link Aggregation ........................................................................................... 7-17
Properties of a Network......................................................................................................................... 7-18
About IPv4 and IPv6 Protocols .................................................................................................... 7-18
About Routing Modes ................................................................................................................... 7-18
Managing Static Routes for the Network.................................................................................... 7-19
Address Allocation Method.......................................................................................................... 7-19
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU).......................................................................................... 7-19
Network Utilization................................................................................................................................ 7-20
About Network Connectivity Information in the User Interface .................................................... 7-20
About Network Hardware .................................................................................................................... 7-21
About PCIe Endpoints................................................................................................................... 7-22
About Single Root I/O Virtualization......................................................................................... 7-22
About the Network Interface Card (NIC)................................................................................... 7-23
Network Switches .......................................................................................................................... 7-23
About Virtual Network Switches................................................................................................. 7-24
Network Profiles ..................................................................................................................................... 7-25
Related Resources for Networks .......................................................................................................... 7-25
8 Create Plans and Profiles
Introduction to Plans and Profiles.......................................................................................................... 8-1
Roles for Plans and Profiles..................................................................................................................... 8-2
Actions Available for Plans and Profiles............................................................................................... 8-2
Location of Plan and Profile Information in the User Interface......................................................... 8-3
About Version Control............................................................................................................................. 8-3
Operational Plans and Profiles ............................................................................................................... 8-4
About Operational Profiles ............................................................................................................. 8-4
Scripts and Variables for an Operational Profile ......................................................................... 8-5
About Operational Plans................................................................................................................. 8-5
Creating an Operational Profile and Plan..................................................................................... 8-5
About Editing an Operational Profile or Plan.............................................................................. 8-6
Copying an Operational Profile ..................................................................................................... 8-6
Copying an Operational Plan ......................................................................................................... 8-7
About Deleting an Operational Profile or Plan............................................................................ 8-7
Profiles and Policies.................................................................................................................................. 8-8
About Profiles ................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Viewing Profile Details and Associated Plans ............................................................................. 8-8
Creating a Profile............................................................................................................................ 8-10
Copying a Profile............................................................................................................................ 8-11
About Editing a Profile.................................................................................................................. 8-11
Editing a Profile .............................................................................................................................. 8-11
ix
About Policies ................................................................................................................................. 8-11
Overview of Deployment Plans............................................................................................................ 8-12
About Simple Deployment Plans................................................................................................. 8-13
Templates for Simple Deployment Plans ................................................................................... 8-13
About Multi-Step Deployment Plans .......................................................................................... 8-14
Templates for Multi-Step Deployment Plans............................................................................. 8-14
About Complex Deployment Plans............................................................................................. 8-14
Templates for Complex Deployment Plans................................................................................ 8-15
Managing Deployment Plans................................................................................................................ 8-15
Copying a Deployment Plan......................................................................................................... 8-15
Editing a Deployment Plan........................................................................................................... 8-16
Deleting a Deployment Plan......................................................................................................... 8-17
Deleting Plans and Profiles Using the Command Line Interface .................................................... 8-17
Deleting a Single Profile or Plan .................................................................................................. 8-17
Deleting Multiple Profiles and Plans........................................................................................... 8-18
Using a Command File to Delete Profiles and Plans ................................................................ 8-19
About Applying a Deployment Plan ................................................................................................... 8-19
Related Resources for Plans and Profiles ............................................................................................ 8-19
A About Asset Attributes
Monitoring Attributes .............................................................................................................................. A-1
Grouping Attributes ................................................................................................................................. A-1
B Expression Query Language
Monitoring Attributes and Classes ........................................................................................................ B-1
Classes................................................................................................................................................ B-1
Attribute Type................................................................................................................................... B-2
Lexical Elements ....................................................................................................................................... B-2
Grammar .................................................................................................................................................... B-3
Semantics ................................................................................................................................................... B-4
Informal Examples.................................................................................................................................... B-6
C About the API for Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Using the SDK Example........................................................................................................................... C-1
List of Public APIs .................................................................................................................................... C-1
Public API Access ..................................................................................................................................... C-5
About JMX......................................................................................................................................... C-5
About Public API Access Through JMX Clients .......................................................................... C-5
Overview of the Virtualization Management Stack ............................................................................ C-6
About the Presentation Tier............................................................................................................ C-6
About the Service Tier ..................................................................................................................... C-6
About the Domain Model ............................................................................................................... C-6
x
D Changing the Patch Install Directory Location for Oracle Solaris OS
Glossary
Index
xi
xii
Preface
The Oracle® Enterprise Manager Ops Center Configuration Reference describes the featuresof the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center software that must be prepared for yoursite.
AudienceThis document is intended for users who require a detailed description of the productconfiguration.
Related DocumentsLists the location of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center documentation.
For more information, see the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center DocumentationLibrary at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/index.htm. For currentdiscussions, see the product blog at https://blogs.oracle.com/opscenter.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides online Help. Click Help at the top-right corner of any page in the user interface to display the online help window.
For the latest releases of Oracle documentation, check the Oracle Technology Networkat: http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/documentation/index.html#em.
ConventionsThe following text conventions are used in this document:
Convention Meaning
italic Italic type indicates book titles, emphasis, or placeholder variables forwhich you supply particular values.
monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph, code inexamples, text that appears on the screen, or text that you enter.
xiii
1Get Started With Configuration
Overview of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center’s role in the data center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center is Oracle's comprehensive solution formanaging the physical and virtual assets in your data center: operating systems,firmware, BIOS configurations, bare metal server and virtual guest provisioning,hardware monitoring, automatic My Oracle Support service request generation, andperformance and energy management.
Topics
• Overview of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center in Your Datacenter
• About the Scope of This Document
• Product Documentation Library
• Viewing User Preferences and Role Preferences
• Changing the Size of a Console Window
• Related Resources for Getting Started
Overview of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center in Your DatacenterOverview of the role and purpose of the product software and its user interface.
Various sites and various users within each site value different aspects of the OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center software:
• As a monitoring tool, this product discovers and identifies all assets in itsenvironment, and displays the status of assets and details of a specific asset. Whenan incident occurs, you can track the progress of the investigation or servicerequest. You can learn details of an asset by selecting each one or each type andviewing the information in the dashboard and its tabs.
• As a provisioning tool, this product deploys new assets in a manner consistent withexisting assets because you define the deployment using profiles to specify theattributes and you then use plans to direct the profiles to one or many targets. Inthe same way, you use update profiles and to upgrade assets.
• As a virtualization manager, this product creates virtual operating systems, virtualservers such as Oracle VM Server for SPARC and Oracle Solaris Zone, and virtualdata centers in the cloud and manages them throughout their lifecycle. Thisproduct can also discover existing virtual assets and manage them. To supportthese virtual assets, the product provides storage and network resources eitherdirectly to the asset or to a pool that specified virtual assets share. Using a serverpool to support virtual assets improves the mobility of the assets and improves the
Get Started With Configuration 1-1
resiliency of the network and storage resources because loads can be balanced andchanged without affecting the virtual assets.
Not every product feature is relevant to your site's activities or for your role. What yousee in the user interface is affected by several factors:
• The role attached to your user account: The actions for your role are available inthe Actions pane. The required roles for using a feature are listed in each chapter ofthis document. When you must accomplish a task and the necessary action is notavailable to you, your administrator can add the role to your user account. Whenyou log in again, the action is available.
• The current connection mode: In Connected mode, actions that rely on OS andfirmware images and packages use the latest images and packages downloadedfrom Oracle and vendor sites. If your site uses the product software inDisconnected mode, the images and packages in your local knowledge base do notchange until your site acquires them. Also in Connected mode, you can createservice request from incidents with full asset information and warranty status. InDisconnected mode, you must contact My Oracle Support and provide thisinformation.
Changing the connection mode can be done easily and temporarily. See OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center Administration for the procedure for changing theconnection mode.
• The scope of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center: The product software isdesigned to manage assets of a data center, from small to large. The productsoftware is also installed in Oracle SuperCluster engineered system, which is acomplete integration of hardware and software that reaches a specific level ofcapability, capacity, and scale. In an engineered system, the product software ismanaging the components of the system and the virtual assets that the systemsupports. Some actions are not relevant to an engineered system and so are notvisible in the user interface.
About the Scope of This DocumentAfter the product software is installed, the software is directed to discover targets: thephysical and virtual assets in the datacenter. After discovery, the target is an asset thatcan be monitored for events and managed throughout its lifecycle. You might beperforming all or some of the tasks needed to discover, to monitor, and to manage oneor many assets. This document describes how you can use the product to discoverassets, to configure the libraries that store OS and firmware images that provisionassets, to configure the networks that support virtual assets, and to monitor eventsand communicate incidents.
Product Documentation LibraryLists the titles of the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center documents and how to getaccess to them.
All documentation for the current release of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Centersoftware is located in the Oracle Help Center at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/index.htm.
You can use this library from any browser or from within the product's user interface.Click the Help option in the title bar to display the Help menu, as shown in Figure 1-1.
About the Scope of This Document
1-2 Configuration Reference
Figure 1-1 Accessing the Document Library
The documentation library contains the documents in Table 1-1. The How Todocuments are short, end-to-end examples of a specific task. In the same location ofthe library, you can display workflows, which are the sequence of How To documentsthat complete a deployment or operation scenario. For deployment tasks, go tohttp://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/deploy.htm and for operatetasks go to http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/operate.htm.
The documentation library also contains short videos that demonstrate someoperations. The same videos are available from within the user interface. When yousee the video icon in a wizard, as show in Figure 1-2, click it to watch a demonstration.
Figure 1-2 Video Icon
Use the Oracle Help Center's Search feature to locate specific information. The site canalso convert the documents to PDF, EPUB, and Mobipocket file formats.
To see current discussions, you can go to the product blog at https://blogs.oracle.com/opscenter.
Table 1-1 Documents for Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Document Content
Concepts An overview of the product software's architecture, its architecture,and its features. This document also explains the product's userinterface.
Readme Links to the installation and upgrade information and a description ofknown issues in the current release.
Release Notes Information about the current version, procedures for installation, andknown issues.
Installation for OracleSolaris OperatingSystems
Information about planning for a new installation of the productsoftware and the procedure for installing the software on an OracleSolaris server.
Installation for LinuxOperating System
Information about planning for a new installation of the productsoftware and the procedure for installing the software on a Linuxserver.
Product Documentation Library
Get Started With Configuration 1-3
Table 1-1 (Cont.) Documents for Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Document Content
Ports and Protocols Lists the ports used by the product software, the protocol for eachport, and its purpose. It also includes the websites that the productsoftware uses.
Upgrade Information about updating an existing installation of the productsoftware to the current version.
Administration Procedures for configuring each component of the product software,for configuring the software for high availability, for managing usersand roles, and for maintaining the product database. This guide alsohas procedures for obtaining operating system updates, enablingAuto Service Requests (ASR), using the OCDoctor script, andupgrading the software.
ConfigurationReference
Procedures for discovering and setting up storage resources, networkresources, hardware assets, for monitoring these resources and assets,managing them through their lifecycle.
Operations Reference Procedures for maintaining the managed assets such as provisioningand updating firmware and operating systems.
VirtualizationReference
Procedures for creating, configuring, and maintaining Oracle SolarisZones, Oracle VM Servers for SPARC, and Oracle VM Servers for x86hosts and guests.
Operations for OracleSuperCluster Reference
A complete description of how the product works in engineeredsystems.
Command LineInterface
Instructions for using the product's command-line interface and manpages for each command.
Security Descriptions and procedures for a secure Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center deployments.
Certified SystemMatrix
Supported hardware, operating systems, virtualization technologies,databases, and browsers.
Cloud InfrastructureAPI and CLI Reference
API and CLI commands to manage programmatically the allocatedvirtual resources for a virtual datacenter account and to create andmanage vServers.
System MonitoringPlug-in for OracleEnterprise ManagerOps Center
Procedure for installing and configuring the plug-in that enablesOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center to connect to EnterpriseManager Cloud Control.
Viewing User Preferences and Role PreferencesProcedure for viewing the default user preferences in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Concepts describes the features of the userinterface. Some of the actions and the abilities can be changed, either by an individualuser or by an administrator for all users with a specific role.
Viewing User Preferences and Role Preferences
1-4 Configuration Reference
To see the current specifications or to change the specifications, click Setup in the titlebar as shown in Figure 1-3 and then click My Preferences to see how your account hasbeen specified.
Figure 1-3 Setting User Preferences
About the Current User Interface PreferencesDescribes the options for customizing the user interface for the logged-in user inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Figure 1-4 shows the User Preferences Summary window, which displays the currentspecifications for your start page, time intervals, and each asset type's default tab inthe center pane.
To change the specifications in the User Preferences Summary window, click UserInterface Preferences. Make changes, then log out and log in again.
The specification for the display of the Membership Graph and the Sign In and StartPage have separate windows.
• About Preferences By Role
• About Preferences for Sign In and Start Page
• About Preferences for the Membership Graph
• Preferences for Time Intervals
Viewing User Preferences and Role Preferences
Get Started With Configuration 1-5
Figure 1-4 User Interface Summary
When you change any of the preferences, this window includes a note to indicate thatthe preferences are not the default specifications.
In the Assigned Roles section, the roles assigned to this user account are listed.
The Start Page Preferences specifies the default view after you log in.
The Display Preferences section provides the following preferences:
• Include each section of the Asset pane. If your responsibilities do not include somesections, clear the option to exclude them from your Asset pane.
• Show or hide the items in the Asset pane: incident badges, tooltips, and theoperating system of a vServer.
• Specify the time zones for the jobs in the Jobs pane.
• Disable simultaneous sessions. The default behavior is to allow a user to log inmultiple times. This convenience can be a security risk.
Viewing User Preferences and Role Preferences
1-6 Configuration Reference
• Change the way assets are expanded or collapsed in the Assets pane. The Defaultoption relies on the number of assets to determine whether the node is expanded orcollapsed. You can chose the Expanded option to always show all assets or theCollapsed option to always show only the Asset Type.
The Time Interval section shows the duration of the Session Timeout, the TableRefresh Frequency, the Console Session Timeout, the Job Status Popup Duration, andthe Connectivity Check Interval.
The Asset Default Tab section lists each type of asset. For each type, you can specifythe tab that is displayed in the center pane when an asset of that type is selected.Although the dashboard gives an overview of an assets, you might prefer to see theIncidents tab by default.
About Preferences By RoleDescribes an administrator’s options for changing the user interface according to theuser’s role in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
As an administrator, you can set preferences for each role. All user accounts that areassigned the role share the same preferences.
Click Setup in the title bar and then click Role Preferences. The menu items are thesame as for My Preferences with the addition of a drop-down list of roles. You selectthe role and then you select the specifications for all user accounts that have that role.
For example, the default behavior for logging in to the software is to allow the sameuser to log in multiple times. This is a convenience when monitoring the progress ofan operation. However, it can be a security risk. To disable this behavior, check theDisable Multiple Sessions option in the User Interface Preferences window. As anadministrator, you can disable this behavior for all users with a certain role byselecting the role and then disabling the option.
About Preferences for Sign In and Start PageDescribes your options for selecting the page that is displayed when you log intoOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can select a section of the Navigation pane as your default view. For example, youcan specify that you see Plan Management when you log in. The Assets andAdministration sections cannot be hidden. When you select Assets for display, youcan choose a default tab to display. Your preferences override the default view foryour role and any previous preferences that you.
About Preferences for the Membership GraphDescribes your options for displaying the membership graph in the center pane.
You can change the default orientation of the Membership Graph to left, right, top, orbottom. You can choose the icon size as small or large and the level of depth for theassets to be displayed. Figure 1-5 shows Membership Graph Preferences window.
Viewing User Preferences and Role Preferences
Get Started With Configuration 1-7
Figure 1-5 Membership Graph Preferences Window
Each time you perform an operation in the Assets pane, the membership graph in thecenter pane is refreshed. In a datacenter with many assets, you might experience anoticeable delay during the refresh operation. If you are not making changes to theassets or to their relationships, you can hide the membership graph, which eliminatesthe refresh operation. Clear the Show Graph option, as shown in Figure 1-5. You seethe effect of the change after you select an asset.
Preferences for Time IntervalsLists the time intervals that can be set in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Select the User Interface Preferences action to set various time intervals to controlwhen the software takes an action or performs an operation.
• Session timeout: Sets the interval to wait for activity before ending your userinterface session. The default value is 30 minutes. You can set the time to wait from5 to 120 minutes.
• Console timeout: Sets the interval to wait for activity from the serial console ofmanaged assets before ending the session. The default value is 120 minutes. Youcan set the time to wait from 5 to 120 minutes.
• Connectivity check interval: Sets the time to wait before the software checks itsaccess to the Internet, Knowledge Base, and My Oracle Support Services. Thedefault value is 15 minutes and the minimum value is 1 minute.
• Table refresh frequency: Sets the time to wait before refreshing the tables in theuser interface. The default value is 30 seconds and the minimum value is 10seconds.
• Job status popup duration: Sets the time to wait after a job completes to display astatus message window. The default value is 5 seconds.
Changing the Size of a Console WindowProcedure for resizing a logical domain’s Terminal window or a server’s Consolewindow in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can change the size of a console window to display log files or other information.
1. Select the asset in the Navigation pane.
2. For a logical domain, click the Terminal tab in center pane. For a server, click theConsole tab.
3. Click the down arrow next to the Select Terminal Window Buffer icon or theSelect Console Terminal Window Buffer icon.
Changing the Size of a Console Window
1-8 Configuration Reference
4. From the drop-down list, select the number of lines: 24, 48, or Customize.
If you select 24 or 48, the window changes its length. If you select Customize, theSet Terminal Buffer window is displayed.
5. Enter the number of lines for the window. The maximum number is 1000.
6. Click Save.
The window changes its size.
Related Resources for Getting StartedList of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center documents with additional information.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides online Help that links to thedocumentation library. Click Help at the top-right corner of any page in the userinterface to display the online help window.
The Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Documentation Library is located in theOracle Help Center at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/index.htm.
For current discussions, see the product blog at https://blogs.oracle.com/opscenter.
For end-to-end examples, see the workflows and how to documentation in the library.For deployment tasks, go to http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/deploy.htm and for operate tasks go to http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/operate.htm
Related Resources for Getting Started
Get Started With Configuration 1-9
Related Resources for Getting Started
1-10 Configuration Reference
2Manage Assets
Overview of actions included in managing assets in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Asset management is the process through which you discover your assets andorganize them using groups and tags.
Topics
• Introduction to Asset Management
• Roles for Asset Management
• Actions Available for Asset Management
• Location of Asset Information in the User Interface
• About Discovering Assets
• Before You Begin to Discover Assets
• Discovery Profiles
• Service Tags
• Overview of Declaring Servers
• Management Credentials
• Overview of Installing Agent Controllers Using the Command Line Interface
• Special Discovery and Management Procedures
• Managing Assets
• Asset Groups
• Related Resources for Asset Management
Introduction to Asset ManagementDefinition of asset management in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Asset management is the process through which Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter discovers your datacenter's assets and begins to manage and monitor them.Assets include server hardware, chassis, racks, network equipment, operatingsystems, virtualization software, and clustering software. Discovering assets is aprerequisite for almost every action in the software.
Manage Assets 2-1
Roles for Asset ManagementList of required roles for asset management tasks in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Table 2–1 lists the tasks and the role required to complete the task. Contact youradministrator if you do not have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. SeeOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration for information about the differentroles and the permissions they grant.
Table 2-1 Asset Management Tasks and Roles
Task Role
View Assets Read
Add Assets Asset Admin
Find Assets Asset Admin
Create Discovery Profile Asset Admin
Update Management Credentials Security Admin
Edit Asset Attributes Asset Admin
Edit Access Points Security Admin
Delete Assets Asset Admin
Edit Tags Asset Management
Create Group Asset Admin
SuperCluster Systems Admin
Edit Group Asset Admin
SuperCluster Systems Admin
Move Group Asset Admin
SuperCluster Systems Admin
Add or Remove Assets From a Group Asset Admin
SuperCluster Systems Admin
Delete Group Asset Admin
SuperCluster Systems Admin
Actions Available for Asset ManagementList of available operations in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can perform a variety of asset management actions, depending on the needs ofyour environment:
• Add Assets by Declaring Servers for OS Provisioning
• Add Assets by Declaring Servers for Service Processor Configuration
• Add Assets Using a Discovery Profile
Roles for Asset Management
2-2 Configuration Reference
• Find Assets
• Create a Discovery Profile
• Edit a Discovery Profile
• Copy a Discovery Profile
• Delete a Discovery Profile
• Install Agent Controllers From the Command Line
• Update Management Credentials
• Edit Asset Attributes
• Delete Assets
• Use Access Points
Location of Asset Information in the User InterfaceLists the location of information about assets in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Asset Management actions and information are located in several sections of the userinterface.
Table 2-2 Location of Asset Management Information in the BUI
To Display: Select:
Asset Discovery and Management actions Expand Assets in the Navigation pane.
Discovery Profiles Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane, thenselect Discovery in the Profiles and Policies section.
Number of assets’ access points Select Administration, then the Enterprise Controller. Clickthe Asset Counter tab in the center pane.
About Discovering AssetsOverview of discovery of assets in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
To manage an asset, you must first discover it. The discovery process locates the asset,logs into it, identifies its attributes and status, and populates the All Assets section ofthe Navigation pane. To discover an asset, you direct Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter to search for assets that comply with one of the following: a discovery profile,service tags, or specific server information.
• Discovery Profiles
• Service Tags
• Overview of Declaring Servers
After assets have been discovered, they are managed assets, giving Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center access to monitor them and make them available as targets forjobs that update and provision them.
Location of Asset Information in the User Interface
Manage Assets 2-3
Before You Begin to Discover AssetsDescribes requirements for discovering various types of assets in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center requires at least one Proxy Controller that isaccessible on a network before discovering and managing an asset on that network.
To discover and manage hardware assets, you must provide a set of credentials: a useraccount and password.
To discover and manage operating systems, you have the option of using an agent orusing SSH transactions to manage the asset:
• The default discovery installs an Agent Controller, software that can only respondto queries and commands from the Proxy Controller. The OS becomes an agent-managed asset and Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center can manage the assetcompletely. It takes several minutes for the Agent Controller to register in theEnterprise Controller and Oracle SE Java Runtime Environment is required. Non-Oracle versions work initially but might exhibit performance and memory issues.
• You can choose to manage the asset through an SSH connection. For this agentless-managed asset, the Proxy Controller uses SSH credentials to probe and to performactions on the OS. This mode is suitable for sites where installing the AgentController on an asset is not permitted or where full management capabilities, suchas updating the OS, are not needed.
• You can change the mode after discovery, by either re-discovering the agent orusing the Switch Management Access action. The current mode and the type ofAgent Controller is displayed on the operating system's Dashboard. When you arechanging the mode from agentless to agent-managed asset using the SwitchManagement Access action, you must provide the SNMPV3 credentials. See Switching Between Agent Controllers or Agent and Agentless for more details onselecting or adding the SNMPV3 credentials.
In addition to the Agent Controller, virtual assets use a Virtualization Controller toenable full monitoring and management capability.
• Oracle VM Server for SPARC Virtualization Controller Agent: Manages the logicaldomains that run in the Control Domain. The agent monitors the configuration andreflects any changes on the configuration in its copy of the metadata.
• Zones Virtualization Controller Agent: Manages the zones that run on the logicaldomains. The global zone is an asset and its non-global zones are assets.
If full management capabilities are not needed or not allowed, you have the option tomanage these assets agentlessly. In the same way as the operating system’s AgentController, an agentless-managed virtual asset is monitored through an SSHconnection between the logical domains and the Proxy Controller.
See “Functionality With and Without Agent Controllers” in the Oracle EnterpriseManager Operation Reference for a comparison of agent-managed assets and agentless-managed assets.
When using the SSH protocol to discover and manage assets, you have the option toenable the escalation of privileges on the target asset when the asset is discovered ormanaged. You must prepare the asset to allow escalation and then create credentialsthat use escalation. The privileges for the login account are escalated when SSH
Before You Begin to Discover Assets
2-4 Configuration Reference
credentials are used with the sudo command or an Ops Center role is associated withthe account.
You request this escalation when you create the credentials. To prepare the SSHcredentials to use sudo, see “Preparing to Use sudo”. For instructions in creatingcredentials with escalated privileges, see “Creating Management Credentials.”
Some systems have unique discovery procedures. See “Special Discovery andManagement Procedures.”
Actions for Proxy ControllersLists the actions available for managing a Proxy Controller in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Before you can discover an asset, create at least one Proxy Controller and associate itwith at least one network. Proxy Controllers in maintenance mode and unreachableProxy Controllers do not participate in discovery operations.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration includes information to view andmanage proxy controllers:
• To associate, enable, and disable a network in a proxy controller see ManagingProxy Controller Networks.
• To migrate an asset to a different proxy controller see Migrating AssetsBetween Proxy Controllers.
• To view the status of a proxy controller see Viewing Proxy Controllers.
• To check the status, start, stop, and set the maintenance mode of a proxy controllersee Viewing and Changing the EC, PC, and AC Status.
Preparing to Use sudoProcedure to enable escalation of SSH credentials on discovered assets in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
1. Log into the asset as root.
2. Enter the visudo command to edit the asset’s sudoers file safely.
3. Edit the sudoers file to conform with the example. Add the command aliases fordiscovery and provisioning in the following way according to the operating systemof the asset and whether it :
• For agentless Oracle Solaris assets, add the SOLARIS_DISCOVERY section ofthe file.
• For agent-managed Oracle Solaris assets, add the SOLARIS_DISCOVERY andSOLARIS_PROVISIONING
• For agentless Oracle Linux assets, add the LINUX_DISCOVERY section of thefile.
• For agent-managed Oracle Linux assets, add the LINUX_DISCOVERY andLINUX_PROVISIONING
4. In the ## User privilege specification section, add the name of the newSSH credential that you created or will create using the procedure in “Creating
Before You Begin to Discover Assets
Manage Assets 2-5
Management Credentials.” Because a password is mandatory, do not add theNOPASSWD parameter.
5. Save and close the file.
6. Repeat this procedure on each asset.
Example 2-1 Format of sudoers File for Ops Center
## sudoers file.#### This file MUST be edited with the 'visudo' command as root.## Failure to use 'visudo' may result in syntax or file permission errors## that prevent sudo from running.#### See the sudoers man page for the details on how to write a sudoers file.##
#### Host alias specification#### Groups of machines. These may include host names (optionally with wildcards),## IP addresses, network numbers or netgroups.# Host_Alias WEBSERVERS = www1, www2, www3
#### User alias specification#### Groups of users. These may consist of user names, uids, Unix groups,## or netgroups. User_Alias OPSCENTER = <username> #### Cmnd alias specification#### Groups of commands. Often used to group related commands together. Cmnd_Alias SOLARIS_DISCOVERY = /sbin/ifconfig -a, \ /usr/sbin/virtinfo -ap, \ /usr/sbin/dladm, \ /opt/SUNWldm/bin/ldm Cmnd_Alias SOLARIS_PROVISIONING = /usr/bin/sc-console, \ /var/scn/install/uninstall, \ /usr/sbin/zlogin, \ /bin/cat */opt/SUNWxvm/xvm_zone_id, \ /var/tmp/OpsCenterAgent/install, \ /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/agentadm, \ /usr/lib/cacao/bin/cacaoadm, \ /usr/bin/unzip -q -o -d /var/tmp/ /var/tmp/OpsCenterAgent* Cmnd_Alias LINUX_DISCOVERY = /sbin/ifconfig -a, \ /usr/sbin/virtinfo -ap Cmnd_Alias LINUX_PROVISIONING = /usr/bin/sc-console, \ /var/scn/install/uninstall, \ /tmp/OpsCenterAgent/install, \ /opt/sun/xvmoc/bin/agentadm, \ /opt/sun/cacao2/bin/cacaoadm, \ /usr/bin/unzip -q -o -d /tmp/ /tmp/OpsCenterAgent*
Before You Begin to Discover Assets
2-6 Configuration Reference
#### Defaults specification#### You may wish to keep some of the following environment variables## when running commands via sudo.#### Locale settings# Defaults env_keep += "LANG LANGUAGE LINGUAS LC_* _XKB_CHARSET"#### Run X applications through sudo; HOME is used to find the## .Xauthority file. Note that other programs use HOME to find## configuration files and this may lead to privilege escalation!# Defaults env_keep += "HOME"#### X11 resource path settings# Defaults env_keep += "XAPPLRESDIR XFILESEARCHPATH XUSERFILESEARCHPATH"#### Desktop path settings# Defaults env_keep += "QTDIR KDEDIR"#### Allow sudo-run commands to inherit the callers' ConsoleKit session# Defaults env_keep += "XDG_SESSION_COOKIE"#### Uncomment to enable special input methods. Care should be taken as## this may allow users to subvert the command being run via sudo.# Defaults env_keep += "XMODIFIERS GTK_IM_MODULE QT_IM_MODULE QT_IM_SWITCHER"#### Uncomment to enable logging of a command's output, except for## sudoreplay and reboot. Use sudoreplay to play back logged sessions.# Defaults log_output# Defaults!/usr/bin/sudoreplay !log_output# Defaults!/usr/local/bin/sudoreplay !log_output# Defaults!/sbin/reboot !log_output Defaults logfile=/var/log/sudo.log
#### Runas alias specification##
#### User privilege specification## root ALL=(ALL) ALL
## The password of OPSCENTER must be mandatory. OPSCENTER ALL=(root) SOLARIS_DISCOVERY,SOLARIS_PROVISIONING
## Uncomment to allow members of group wheel to execute any command# %wheel ALL=(ALL) ALL
## Same thing without a password# %wheel ALL=(ALL) NOPASSWD: ALL
## Uncomment to allow members of group sudo to execute any command# %sudo ALL=(ALL) ALL
## Uncomment to allow any user to run sudo if they know the password## of the user they are running the command as (root by default).# Defaults targetpw # Ask for the password of the target user# ALL ALL=(ALL) ALL # WARNING: only use this together with 'Defaults targetpw'
Before You Begin to Discover Assets
Manage Assets 2-7
## Read drop-in files from /etc/sudoers.d## (the '#' here does not indicate a comment)#includedir /etc/sudoers.d
Note: The ALL Configuration is not supported in etc/sudoers.
About SNMPv3SNMP is the Simple Network Management Protocol and is part of TransmissionControl Protocol⁄Internet Protocol (TCP⁄IP) protocol.
The protocol has existed for many years and has three versions: Version 1, 2 withsubversions, and 3. Starting with 12.3.2, Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center usesSNMPv3 to discover assets and for new or updated credentials. Existing assetscontinue to use SNMPv1. For releases prior to 12.3.2, only SNMPv1 is supported.
Note: If your site updated from a previous release of Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center to Release 12.3.2, your site had the option to upgrade allassets that use SNMPv1 to SNMPv3.
The difference between Version 3 and previous versions is Version 3 uses credentialsinstead of a public community string in its communication exchanges. The credentialsincludes username, a password for an authorization protocol, and a password for aprivacy protocol.
The authorization protocol uses your password to create a one-way hash to verify thatthe transferred information is intact, acting as a digital signature. The availablealgorithms are MD5 and SHA. MD5 is a legacy algorithm that is not as strong as SHA(Standard Hash Algorithm), which is a 128-bit algorithm used as the US FederalInformation Processing Standard.
The privacy protocol uses your password as the private key to encrypt the transferredinformation. The available protocols are DES and AES. DES (Data EncryptionStandard) is not as strong as AES (Advanced Encryption Standard).
If you prefer to stop using SNMPv1 for existing assets and change to SNMPv3, youcan migrate to SNMPv3 by using the Update Management Credentials action or usethe Create Credentials profile and plan. Other actions, such Edit Credentials, alsooffer the ability to create SNMPv3 credentials.
Discovery ProfilesOverview of discovery profiles in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Topics
• About Discovery Profiles
• Discovering Assets Using a Discovery Profile
• Creating a Discovery Profile
• Editing a Discovery Profile
• Copying a Discovery Profile
• Deleting a Discovery Profile
Discovery Profiles
2-8 Configuration Reference
About Discovery ProfilesDescribes the role of discovery profiles.
One of the ways of discovering assets is to select a discovery profile and then directhow the profile is used.
A discovery profile contains the attributes of assets. Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter uses the discovery profile to identify matching targets. You can make discoveryprofiles as specific or as generic as your site needs. Later, when you use the discoveryprofile, you can modify attributes in the profile.
All of the discovery profiles are available in the Plan Management section of theAssets pane, in the Profiles and Policies section. Expand Discovery to see the list ofprofiles.
Discovering Assets Using a Discovery ProfileProcedure for using a profile to discover assets in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
The procedure uses a previously-created profile and directs Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center to apply it in a specified way.
1. In the Navigation pane, select All Assets.
2. In the Actions pane, click Add Assets.
Note:
Another way to launch the Add Assets wizard is using theAddAssetsUsingProfile icon. Expand the Plan Management section of theNavigation pane and, in the Profiles and Polices section, click Discovery. Thecenter pane lists all profiles and a set of icons, including theAddAssetsUsingProfile icon.
3. Select Add and Manage Various Types of Assets via Discovery Probes, thenselect a discovery profile.
4. Select a discovery profile.
5. If the profile does not include IP addresses and host names or to increase the scopeof the search, enter one or more IP addresses or hostnames, as shown in Figure 2-1.
Discovery Profiles
Manage Assets 2-9
Figure 2-1 Specifying Networks in Discovery by Profile
Note:
Host names must be resolvable from the Enterprise Controller.
6. By default, the discovery operation searches for targets on all networks associatedwith all of the available Proxy Controllers. This is the Use the selected networkoption with the Automatic attribute. This type of discovery is thorough and resultsin a complete inventory of matching targets. To narrow the scope of the search, useone of the following options:
• The smallest scope is to search on one network. Select the alternative option inthe drop-down list, Manual. This action opens the Select Network window,which lists all of the networks associated with all of the available ProxyControllers. Select the network you want the discovery operation to use andclick Close.
• Limit the search to a specific Proxy Controller's associated networks. Choose theUse the selected proxy option and then either accept the default Automaticattribute to search the Proxy Controller or select Manual from the drop-downlist to open the Proxy Controllers wizard, which lists all Proxy Controllers thatare not in maintenance mode. Select the Proxy Controller.
Note: To prevent the selection of an unreachable Proxy Controller, place anyunreachable Proxy Controllers in maintenance mode.
When you click Close, you return to the Add Assets wizard.
7. Scroll down to show the Credential section. If the discovery profile includescredentials for logging into the target, click Select to use in this discoveryoperation. You can also click Clear and then New to replace them. If the discoveryprofile does not include credentials, click New to provide them.
8. Click Add Now.
Discovery Profiles
2-10 Configuration Reference
Creating a Discovery ProfileYou can create a profile and use it to discover assets that comply with the profile.
1. In the Navigation pane, click Plan Management.
2. Under Profiles and Policies, click Discovery.
3. In the Actions pane, click Create Profile.
Figure 2-2 Create Discovery Profile
4. Enter a name for the discovery profile and a description.
5. Expand the list of asset types and select one of the asset types. Click Next.
6. (Optional.) Click the Add icon to add one or more tags to discovered assets, thenclick Next.
7. (Optional.) You can specify the IP ranges used to probe for assets that conform tothis discovery within this profile or you can direct the probe at the time when youuse the profile. However, to direct the discovery operation to a specific host, youmust specify the host name at the time you use the profile. To specify the IP rangesin the profile, click the Add icon. For each IP range:
a. Enter a name for the range.
b. Enter a description of the IP range.
c. In the Networks field, identify the network associated with the IP range todirect discovery to the correct Proxy Controller. Choose one of the options fromthe drop-down list:
• Select Automatic to direct the discovery operation to the default ProxyController. The IP address of a target must resolve to only one network.
Discovery Profiles
Manage Assets 2-11
• Select the Manual to open the Select Networks window, which lists all thenetworks associated with all the available Proxy Controllers. Select thenetwork you want the discovery operation to use and click Close.
• Select Networks to open the Networks and Proxy Controllers wizard:
i. Select the Proxy Controller.
ii. From the list of associated networks, adjust the list of networks to usefor discovery.
8. Click New to add new discovery credentials for each protocol or click Select toselect an existing set of credentials.
Note:
The Agent Controller requires SNMPv3 credentials for the Oracle Solarisagent to monitor any defect in the system. Click Select to select an existingSNMPv3 credentials, or click New to create new SNMPv3 credentials.SNMPv3 credentials are required for Oracle Solaris systems only. When youuse SNMPv3 credentials to discover an ILOM processor, choose the correctSNMPv3 credential parameters since some ILOM service processors do notsupport AES encryption.
9. If this discovery profile is for discovering an ILOM, select the Use system’s defaultcredentials check box and set the following:
• Enter the default SNMPV3 user name as opscenter.
• Enter the default SNMPV3 authentication password used for authenticationprotocol as authV3pw.
• Enter the default SNMPV3 privacy password used for privacy protocol asprivV3pw.
10. If this discovery profile is for discovering an operating system, you might have theoption to manage the operating system without an Agent Controller. Select one ofthe following options:
Discovery Profiles
2-12 Configuration Reference
• Deploy Agent Controller to install the Agent Controller on the operatingsystem. This is a requirement if the operating system runs on an virtual asset oryou expect to update the operating system. To discover and manage operatingsystems in Oracle Solaris 10 Zones or in Oracle VM Server for SPARC guests,select these options.
• Manage Without Agent Controller does not install an Agent Controller.Instead, the Proxy Controller that manages the operating system sends an SSHrequest to the asset periodically.
11. If the service tag parameters have been modified for the target assets, enter theService Tag parameters:
• Service tag passphrase: Required when a service tag has been configured to beencrypted.
• Service tag port: Required when a service tag has been configured to use a portother than the default of Port 6481.
• Service tag timeout: Accept the default value of 20 seconds or specify a numberof seconds.
12. Click Next to complete the discovery credentials.
13. Review the summary and click Finish to create the discovery profile.
Editing a Discovery ProfileProcedure for changing a discovery profile in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
To edit a discovery profile, perform the following steps:
1. In the Navigation pane, click Plan Management.
2. Under Profiles and Policies, click Discovery.
3. Select the profile and click the Edit Profile icon.
4. Edit any of the information in the discovery profile, then click Finish to save yourchanges.
Copying a Discovery ProfileProcedure for making a copy of an existing discovery profile in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center
To copy a discovery profile, perform the following steps:
1. In the Navigation pane, click Plan Management.
Discovery Profiles
Manage Assets 2-13
2. Under Profiles and Policies, click Discovery.
3. Select the profile and click the Copy Profile icon.
4. Edit any of the information in the discovery profile, then click Finish to save thenew discovery profile.
Deleting a Discovery ProfileProcedure for removing a discovery profile from Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
To delete a discovery profile, perform the following steps:
1. In the Navigation pane, click Plan Management.
2. Under Profiles and Policies, click Discovery.
3. Select the profile and click the Delete Profile icon. The discovery profile is deleted.
Service TagsOverview of service tags in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center..
Topics
• About Service Tags
• Enabling Discovery by Service Tags
• Discovering Assets by Using Service Tags
About Service TagsDescribes the use of service tags with the Find Assets Wizard in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Service tags are small XML files containing product information. Many Oracle systemscome equipped with service tags. If you have hardware assets equipped with servicetags, you can discover them using the Find Assets Wizard. This method lets youdiscover large numbers of assets quickly. The Find Assets Wizard searches knownnetworks for service tags, then uses credentials that you specify to manage thediscovered assets.
Starting with Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center 12c Release 2 (12.2.2.0.0), theFind Assets action is disabled by default.
Products without service tags cannot be discovered using this method. For example,ALOM systems do not have service tags.
Enabling Discovery by Service TagsProcedure for using service tags to discover assets in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Starting with Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center 12c Release 2 (12.2.2.0.0), theFind Assets action is disabled because, in datacenters with many assets, discoverymight expire before it can complete. If you prefer to discover assets using service tags,enable this feature:
Service Tags
2-14 Configuration Reference
1. In the Navigation pane, click Administration, then click Enterprise Controller.
2. In the center pane, select the Configuration tab.
3. In the Configuration Management section, select Discovery from the Subsystemdrop-down list.
4. Set the value of the service-tags-discovery-enabled property to true.
Discovering Assets by Using Service TagsProcedure for using service tags to discover assets in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
To find assets, perform the following steps:
1. In the Navigation pane, select All Assets.
2. In the Actions pane, click Find Assets.
3. Select Run Discovery Now.
Service Tags
Manage Assets 2-15
4. When the initial discovery is complete, select the assets in each category (hardware,operating systems, and engineered systems) that you want to manage and providecredentials for them, then click Finish.
Overview of Declaring ServersOverview of discovering servers by declaring them in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
A bare metal server is one that has no operating system or no service processorconfiguration or neither.
Topics
• About Declaring Servers for OS Provisioning
• Declaring One Server
• Information for Declaring a Server
• Declaring Multiple Servers
• About Declaring Servers for Service Processor Configuration
• Declaring Servers for Service Processor Configuration
About Declaring Servers for OS ProvisioningDescribes methods for bare metal provisioning of operating system.
Use the Declare Server option to prepare one or more bare metal systems for OSprovisioning, even if the systems have no service processor.
To declare one server, use the Add Assets Wizards to specify information about theserver. To declare multiple servers, create a discovery file as shown in Example 2-2.
Declaring One ServerProcedure for discovering a server in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
1. Select All Assets in the Navigation pane,
2. Click Add Assets in the Actions pane.
3. Select the Manually Declare a Server to be a Target of OS provisioning option inthe wizard.
4. Select the Declare a single server option.
5. Enter the server information, as show in “Information for Declaring a Server.”
Information for Declaring a ServerLists the attributes required for discovering a server by declaring it.
• Server Name: name of the server appearing on the UI.
• IP Address: specify an IP address to route the discovery to the correct ProxyController. You do not need to use a server's actual IP address. You can use an IPaddress that is on the same subnet as that of the server to be discovered.
Overview of Declaring Servers
2-16 Configuration Reference
• Model Categories: select the category in which the asset model appears.
• Model: the model of the asset.
• MAC Address and Port combination: used to connect to the server once it isavailable on the network. Click the Add or Edit icons to add or edit a MACAddress/Port combination, then select the combination.
Enter a logical port name for each network interface. One of these logical portnames must be GB_0. Available logical port names are GB_0 through GB_11. Youcan also use mgmt as a management port. These logical port names will be mappedto network interfaces after the asset has been provisioned, according to the MACaddresses that you specify. If the server has only one network interface, use GB_0.
Enter the MAC addresses of the network interfaces in the server that you want todeclare.
Declaring Multiple ServersProcedure for discovering servers using a discovery file in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
To declare multiple servers for OS Provisioning, perform the following steps:
1. Create a discovery file using the format in Example 2-2 and the following variables:
The following variables can be used:
• server name: the name that the server has in the UI
• model: must be a model supported by Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
• guid: a unique identifier for the server
• proxyHostname: the Proxy Controller to be used to connect to the server
• ipAddress: the IP address for the server
• netmask: (optional) the netmask for the server
• gateway: (optional) the gateway for the server
• unconfigured: (optional) specifies that the server is unconfigured when set totrue
• ethernetPort: used to connect to the server once it is available on the network.You can specify multiple Ethernet ports. Includes:
– Ethernet port name: the name of the Ethernet port
– Ethernet Port mac: the MAC address for the Ethernet port
2. Select All Assets in the Navigation pane,
3. Click Add Assets in the Actions pane.
4. Select the Manually Declare a Server to be a Target of OS provisioning option inthe wizard.
5. Select Declare All Servers.
Overview of Declaring Servers
Manage Assets 2-17
6. Enter the location of the discovery file.
7. Click Declare Asset
Example 2-2 Example Discovery Profile
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><servers><server name="T5440" model="Sun SPARC Enterprise T5440 Server" guid="12345678" proxyHostname="server" ipAddress="10.0.0.0" ><ethernetPort name="GB_0" mac="01:23:45:67:89:AB"/></server></servers>
About Declaring Servers for Service Processor ConfigurationDescribes the method for configuring a server’s service processor even if the server isnot yet discovered.
Use the Declare Servers for Service Processor Configuration option to nominate oneor more bare metal systems for service processor configuration.
The assets being declared do not need to be physically connected to the network at thetime of the discovery, because the assets produced by an asset declaration are skeletalrepresentations of the real assets. These assets can then be targeted with serviceprocessor configuration jobs. After the actual assets are connected to the network,provisioned and discovered, they are correlated with the declared version intocomplete assets.
Declaring Servers for Service Processor ConfigurationProcedure for discovering a server with no service processor from Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
To declare unconfigured assets for service processor configuration, perform thefollowing steps:
1. Select All Assets in the Navigation pane,
2. Click Add Assets in the Actions pane.
3. Select Declare an Unconfigured Hardware Asset.
Overview of Declaring Servers
2-18 Configuration Reference
Figure 2-3 Declare Unconfigured Hardware Assets
4. Enter data for the servers to be declared:
• Number of Servers: the total number of servers to be discovered
• Model Categories: the model category of the servers
• Model: the specific model of the servers
• Server Names: the names of the servers, including:
– Prefix: a prefix that appears before each server name. This field is required.
– Starting Number: the number of the first server. The number is increased byone for each additional server. This field is required.
– Suffix: a suffix that appears after each server name
• Network: the network on which the server or servers is added
• IP addresses: the IP addresses to be used for the servers
• MAC Addresses: the MAC Addresses of the servers
5. Click Declare Asset.
Management CredentialsOverview of management credentials.
Management Credentials
Manage Assets 2-19
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center stores the credentials that manage each asset.You can update, edit, and delete these credentials.
Topics
• Upgrading Management Credentials From a Prior Version
• Updating Management Credentials
• Creating Management Credentials
• Editing Management Credentials
• Copying Management Credentials
• Deleting Management Credentials
• About Credentials for Access to the Serial Console or SSH Tunnel
• Using Custom SSH Keys for OS Discovery
• Switching Between Agent Controllers or Agent and Agentless
Upgrading Management Credentials From a Prior VersionProcedure for assigning new credentials to assets in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Assets that were discovered and managed in prior versions of Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center might not have management credentials associated with them.You can associate new or existing sets of credentials with these assets.
If a discovered asset is blacklisted, the same can be removed by updating themanagement credentials.
To upgrade management credentials, perform the following steps:
1. On the Navigation pane, select All Assets.
2. In the Actions pane, click Upgrade Management Credentials.
3. Select an asset category: operating systems; servers; or chassis, m-series, andswitches.
4. Select one or more assets of that category.
• To assign an existing set of credentials, select Assign existing set and then selectan existing set of credentials.
• To assign a new set of credentials, select Create and assign new set and thenenter a protocol, name, and credential information.
Updating Management CredentialsProcedure for changing the credentials used to get access to an asset in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can change the set of management credentials used by an asset or group of assets.
To update management credentials, perform the following steps:
Management Credentials
2-20 Configuration Reference
1. On the Navigation pane, select an asset or group.
2. In the Actions pane, click Update Management Credentials.
Figure 2-4 Wizard for Update Management Credentials
3. Select the credentials that you want to change. You can select more than one type ofcredentials.
4. Click Modify the current credential values.
5. Edit the username or password or both.
Note:
If you are modifying the SNMPv3 credential values, then you can edit theusername, authentication protocol, authentication password, privacy protocol,or privacy password.
6. Click Finish to submit the change.
Creating Management CredentialsProcedure for creating credentials for accessing assets in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
Create a set of management credentials to discover and manage new assets or tomanage existing assets.
To create management credentials, perform the following steps:
1. On the Navigation pane, under Administration, select Credentials.
2. In the Actions pane, click Create Credentials.
3. Click on the drop-down list to see the list of available protocols. Accept the defaultSSH protocol or select a different protocol. Depending on the type of protocol youselect, the remaining fields change to collect the required information for thecredentials. For specific examples, see Creating SSH Credentials or CreatingSNMPV3 Credentials.
4. Specify a name and description, such as the purpose of the credentials.
Management Credentials
Manage Assets 2-21
5. Select or specify the required information for the type of credential, such as theusername and password.
6. Click Create to create the management credentials.
The new credentials are now available to be used in discovery profiles.
Creating SSH CredentialsCreate a set of SSH credentials to discover and manage new assets or to manageexisting assets.
The default protocol for managing assets is SSH. To create SSH credentials, performthe following steps:
1. On the Navigation pane, under Administration, select Credentials.
2. In the Actions pane, click Create Credentials.
3. Specify a name and description, such as their purpose for the credentials.
4. Specify the username and password.
5. Accept the default authentication type or choose one of the alternatives. Each typehas different requirements for authentication.
• Password: This is the default type of authentication and requires a loginusername and password.
• Custom SSH Key: Creates a public SSH key by specifying the Login User name,a Private Key file name, and a passphrase. In the Private Key File on ProxyController(s) field, accept the default file or change it to refer to other keys. TheProxy Controller installs the SSH public key on the asset's privileged user'sauthorized SSH key.
Management Credentials
2-22 Configuration Reference
• Ops Center Key: Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center generates a new SSHkey pair, based on the username you provide, and installs the public key in theasset’s login account during discovery. This method requires a set of credentialsto begin the discovery. After discovery, the SSH key pair is used. This methoddoes not provide a way to escalate privileges.
6. You can allow the new account to use escalated privileges. The default method is tonot allow a change in privileges. The alternatives are to specify a role for theaccount or to add sudo to the account.
• If you choose the Role method, the Privileged Role field is displayed. Enter thename of an Ops Center role and specify a password. The new account has thislevel of access.
• If you choose the Sudo method, the Privileged Role field is displayed. Enter thename of an Ops Center account and specify a password. This account must beincluded in the asset’s /etc/sudoers file. The privileges defined in the /etc/sudoers file will be used by the new account. See “Preparing to Use sudo” forinstructions in creating this file. You can edit this file after you complete thisprocedure, but the Ops Center account must be in the file before the newcredentials are effective.
7. Accept the default port for SSH of 22, unless your site has a different requirement.
8. Click Create to create the management credentials.
Creating SNMPV3 CredentialsProcedure for creating credentials for accessing assets in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
Create a set of management credentials to discover and manage new assets or tomanage existing assets.
To create credentials that use the SNMPv3 protocol, perform the following steps:
1. On the Navigation pane, under Administration, select Credentials.
2. In the Actions pane, click Create Credentials.
3. Click on the drop-down list to see the list of available protocols. Click SNMPV3.
Management Credentials
Manage Assets 2-23
4. Specify a name and description, such as their purpose for the credentials.
5. Specify the user name with the prefix OC for the credential.
Note:
The user name for SNMPV3 protocol must be prefixed with OC.
Note: The password must contain 8 characters. Do not use space character foruser name and password.
6. Accept the default authentication protocol, MD5, or choose SHA, which is astronger authentication protocol.
7. Enter a password for authentication.
8. Accept the default privacy protocol, DES, or choose AES, which is a strongerencryption protocol.
9. Enter a password for encryption.
10. Click Create to create the management credentials.
Management Credentials
2-24 Configuration Reference
Editing Management CredentialsYou can change an existing set of management credentials that you use to discoverassets.
To edit management credentials, perform the following steps:
1. On the Navigation pane, under Administration, then select Credentials.
2. In the center pane, select a set of credentials.
3. Click the Edit Credentials icon.
4. You can change the description of the credentials and any characteristic of theexisting credentials.
5. Click Update to save the changes.
Copying Management CredentialsProcedure for making a copy of existing management credentials in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can copy an existing set of management credentials to create a set.
To copy management credentials, perform the following steps:
1. On the Navigation pane, under Administration, select Credentials.
2. In the center pane, select a set of credentials and click the Copy Credentials icon.
3. Edit the name, description, and the information required by the protocol, then clickCopy to save the new set of credentials.
Deleting Management CredentialsProcedure for removing the credentials used to access an asset in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can delete an existing set of management credentials if they are not in use by anasset. You can delete credentials that are used in discovery profiles but the discoveryprofiles must be edited to use new credentials. Agentless assets that are managedusing the credentials must be given a new set.
To delete management credentials, perform the following steps:
1. On the Navigation pane, under Administration, select Credentials.
2. In the center pane, select one or more sets of credentials and click the DeleteCredentials icon.
A window reports how the credentials are used.
3. If the credentials are not in use, click Delete All . If the at least one set ofcredentials is in use by a discovery profile, you have the option to preserve thosecredentials by clicking Safe Delete. If you do want to delete the credentials used bya discovery profile, click Force Delete.
Management Credentials
Manage Assets 2-25
About Credentials for Access to the Serial Console or SSH TunnelDescribes how Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center connects to a service processorand uses SSH.
To enable a connection to a service processor or virtual machine, define the useraccount that Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses to open an SSH tunnel on theEnterprise Controller or to create a serial connection.
Note:
If you do not specify this account, Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Centercreates an account each time it accesses a serial console and deletes theaccount when the connection is no longer needed. This activity might notconform to your site's security policy.
The following types of assets use SSH to connect to a serial console. Create an accountfor each type and define the same password for each account.
• Proxy Controllers
• Global zones that use agents and require access to the consoles of non-global zones
• Control domains that use agents and require access to the consoles of logicaldomains
To create the account, define the ConsoleSSHCredname system property using theprocedure in Defining the system property for console access and then define a useraccount for that property using either the procedure in Creating the account usingOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center or the procedure in Creating the account usingthe useradd command.
Defining the System Property for Console AccessProcedure for configuring the serial console in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
1. Select the Administration section in the Navigation pane.
2. Select the Configuration tab in the center pane.
3. In the Subsystem list, select Console Access Configuration. TheConsoleSSH.Credname system property is displayed.
4. Click in the Values column.
5. Enter the name of the new user account. For example, SERIALCONSOLE_CRED1.
Figure 2-5 Configuring Console Access
Management Credentials
2-26 Configuration Reference
6. Click Save.
When the job is completed, define the account using the following procedure.
Creating the Account Using Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops CenterProcedure for creating a SSH account for the serial console in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You must have the Security Admin role to perform this procedure.
After you define the user account, the account is created automatically in /etc/passwd the first time a job for console access is run. However, if your site's securitypolicy requires that the operating system account must be created outside of OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center's control or if you prefer to create the accountmanually, use the procedure described in Creating the account using the useraddcommand.
1. Select the Administration in the Navigation pane.
2. Select Credentials in the Navigation pane.
3. Click Create Credentials in the Actions pane.
4. Select the SERIAL_CONSOLE_SSH protocol and enter the following details:
• Name of the credential: Enter the value of the ConsoleSSH.Credname systemproperty. In this example, SERIALCONSOLE_CRED1.
• Login User: Enter a convenient or descriptive name for the user account, forexample, ConsoleAccess.
• Password for the user account and its confirmation. Password length isminimum of 8 and maximum of 32.
Figure 2-6 User Account for Console Access
5. Click Create to submit the job.
Creating the Account Using the useradd CommandProcedure for creating a SSH account for the serial console in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Management Credentials
Manage Assets 2-27
1. Create the home directory for the account. In the following example, the account isnamed consolex:
mkdir /var/tmp/consolex
2. Add the user account with its shell, /opt/sun/n1gc/bin/serial_console:
useradd -s "/opt/sun/n1gc/bin/serial_console" -d /var/tmp/consolex -u uid -P "profile" -A "solaris.zone.manage" consolex
where uid is an available user ID on the Enterprise Controller's system and profile iseither LDoms Review for a control domain or Zone Management for a globalzone. The -A option is a feature of Oracle Solaris 11's useradd(1m) command thatincludes an authorization defined in auth_attr(4).
3. Change the ownership of the home directory:
/bin/chown consolex /var/tmp/consolex/bin/chmod 700 /var/tmp/consolex
4. Set and confirm the password for the account:
passwd consolex
Using Custom SSH Keys for OS DiscoveryProcedure for creating SSH credentials for discovering an operating system asset inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can use SSH keys as an option when performing the OS discovery.
You must create SSH keys on each Proxy Controller that might access the target assetand also add the SSH public key to the ~/.ssh/authorized_keys location on theremote OS or use the hardware's web interface to upload the public keys.
1. On the Navigation pane, under Administration, click Credentials.
2. In the Actions pane, click Create Credentials. The SSH protocol is the default.
Management Credentials
2-28 Configuration Reference
Figure 2-7 Create Credentials
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the credential.
4. In the Description field, enter a description for the credential.
5. In the SSH section, select Custom SSH as Authentication Type.
6. In the Login User field, enter the login credential.
7. In the Private Key File on Proxy Controller(s) field, accept the default file orchange it to refer to other keys.
8. In the Passphrase field, enter the passphrase if one was specified when the key wascreated.
9. In the Confirm Passphrase field, enter the passphrase again.
10. In the SSH Port field, accept the default Port 22 or change it.
11. Click Create.
For a nonprivileged user, enter the Privileged User role credentials in the PrivilegedRole and Role Password fields respectively.
Switching Between Agent Controllers or Agent and AgentlessProcedure for switching management mode from agentless to agent-managed assetand from agent-managed to agentless asset in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Management Credentials
Manage Assets 2-29
To discover and manage operating systems, you have the option of using SNMPV3credentials to manage the asset. For more information on switching the managementmodes, see Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Operations Reference
To switch management mode:
Note:
When switching from agentless to agent-managed asset, providing SSH andSNMPV3 credentials is mandatory.
1. Click All Assets in the Assets section of the Navigation pane.
2. Select the operating system.
The current management status appears in the operating system’s dashboard.
3. In the Actions pane, click Switch Management Access.
4. Add or select the SNMPV3 credentials for the system.
• To create a new set of credentials, click New and complete the CreateCredentials Wizard, then click OK. See Creating SNMPV3 Credentials for stepsto create new SNMPV3 credentials.
• To select from a list of existing credentials, click Select, highlight the credentialsfrom the list of available credentials and then click OK.
5. Click Finish.
Overview of Installing Agent Controllers Using the Command LineInterface
Overview of installing an Agent Controller using the Command Line Interface inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Use these procedures to install an Agent Controller and to register the target system.See Using Agent Management for Operating Systems for more informationabout Agent Controllers and Virtualization Agent Controllers.
Topics
• Requirements for Installing an Agent Controller on Oracle Solaris 11
• Before You Begin to Install an Agent Controller
• Installing an Configuring an Agent Controller Manuall Using User Credentials
• Installing and Configuring an Agent Controller Manually Using a Token
Requirements for Installing an Agent Controller on Oracle Solaris 11List of requirements for installing an agent on an asset running Oracle Solaris 11 inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
• The Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repository must be configured and its initialsynchronization completed.
Overview of Installing Agent Controllers Using the Command Line Interface
2-30 Configuration Reference
• The version of Oracle Solaris 11 installed on the target system must be available inthe Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repository.
• The Agent Controller packages must already be in the Oracle Solaris 11 PackageRepository.
Before You Begin to Install an Agent ControllerRequirements for installing an Agent Controller on an asset in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
To use the agentadm command, you need the following information:
• To configure your Agent Controller software using an administrative user accounton the Enterprise Controller you need:
– User name: the user account provides authentication that supports AgentController registration. Use the user name of this account as the argument forthe -u option of the agentadm command.
– Password: use this password to populate the /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd file.Then use this file name as the argument for the -p option of the agentadmcommand.
• The auto-reg-token registration token from the /var/opt/sun/xvm/persistence/scn-proxy/connection.properties file on the appropriateProxy Controller – If you decide not to use user credentials to configure your AgentController software, use this token to populate the /var/tmp/OC/mytoken file.Then use this file name as the argument for the agentadm -t option.
• IP address or host name of the Proxy Controller with which you will associate theAgent Controller – Use this IP address or host name as the argument for theagentadm -x option. Typically, you would associate the Agent Controller withthe Proxy Controller that is connected to the same subnet as the target system.
• The IP address of the network interface that the Agent Controller will use forregistration – Use this IP address as the argument for the agentadm -a option.
Some example agentadm commands in this procedure use the alternativeadministrative user name droot. In these examples, the droot user exists on theEnterprise Controller.
When you install an Agent Controller on a global zone, the installation installs, orupgrades to, Oracle Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.6.0_91. If a later version of JREis installed, the installation does not downgrade.
Installing and Configuring an Agent Controller Manually Using User CredentialsProcedure that uses credentials to install an Agent Controller in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
This procedure creates a file that holds the password of the administrative user foryour Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center installation.
1. On the Enterprise Controller, change to the /var/opt/sun/xvm/images/agent/ directory, and list the files that it contains. This directory contains theAgent Controller installation archives. For example:
# cd /var/opt/sun/xvm/images/agent/# ls
Overview of Installing Agent Controllers Using the Command Line Interface
Manage Assets 2-31
OpsCenterAgent.Linux.i686.12.2.0.2503.zipOpsCenterAgent.Linux.i686.12.2.0.2503.zip.sigOpsCenterAgent.Solaris.i386.12.2.0.2503.zipOpsCenterAgent.Solaris.i386.12.2.0.2503.zip.sigOpsCenterAgent.Solaris.sparc.12.2.0.2503.zipOpsCenterAgent.Solaris.sparc.12.2.0.2503.zip.sigOpsCenterAgent.SolarisIPS.all.12.2.0.2503.zipOpsCenterAgent.SolarisIPS.all.12.2.0.2503.zip.sig#
2. Identify the Agent Controller archive that is appropriate for the system where youintend to install the Agent Controller. See Table 2–4 for a description of theavailable packages.
Table 2-3 Agent Controller Packages and their related Target Operating Systemand Architecture
File prefix Operating System / Architecture
OpsCenterAgent.Linux.i686 Oracle Linux/x86
OpsCenterAgent.Solaris.i386 Oracle Solaris 10/x86
OpsCenterAgent.Solaris.sparc Oracle Solaris 10 / Oracle SPARC
OpsCenterAgent.SolarisIPS.all Oracle Solaris 11 / x86 and Oracle SPARC
3. On the system where you want to install the Agent Controller (the target system),create a directory named /var/tmp/OC.
# mkdir /var/tmp/OC
4. Use scp or ftp to transfer the correct Agent Controller archive from the EnterpriseController to the /var/tmp/OC directory on the target system. Respond to anyauthentication or confirmation prompts that are displayed. For example:
# scp OpsCenterAgent.Solaris.sparc.12.2.0.2503.zip [email protected]:/var/tmp/OCPassword:OpsCenterAgent.S 100% |*********************************************************************| 187078 KB 00:32#
5. On the target system, change to the /var/tmp/OC directory.
# cd /var/tmp/OC#
6. Use the unzip command to uncompress the Agent Controller archive. Forexample:
# unzip OpsCenterAgent.Solaris.sparc.12.2.0.2503.zip(output omitted)
7. Run the install -a script in the OpsCenterAgent directory. For example:
# OpsCenterAgent/install -aInstalling Ops Center Agent Controller.No need to install 120900-04.No need to install 121133-02.No need to install 119254-63.
Overview of Installing Agent Controllers Using the Command Line Interface
2-32 Configuration Reference
No need to install 119042-09.No need to install 121901-02.No need to install 137321-01.Installed SUNWjdmk-runtime.Installed SUNWjdmk-runtime-jmx.(output omitted)6 patches skipped.19 packages installed.Installation complete.Detailed installation log is at /var/scn/install/log.Uninstall using /var/scn/install/uninstall.#
If you are installing the Agent Controller on Oracle Solaris 11, run the installcommand with the -p option and include the IP address; the local IPS pubs areconfigured for Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repository access using the IP address.For example:
# OpsCenterAgent/install -p 10.0.0.1#
If you are installing an Oracle VM Server Virtualization Controller Agent use the -l (or --ldom) option.
8. Create an empty file named /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd, and set its permissionmode to 400. For example:
# touch /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd# chmod 400 /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd
9. Edit the /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd file so that it contains the password for theadministrative user that exists on the Enterprise Controller to which the ProxyController is connected. The following echo command appends the password tothe /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd file. Replace password with the correct password.For example:
# echo 'password' > /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd
10. Use the agentadm command to associate the Agent Controller with the ProxyController.
• Oracle Solaris OS: use the /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/agentadm command
• Linux OS: use the /opt/sun/xvmoc/bin/agentadm command. The examplecommands below use the following options:
• configure: causes an Agent Controller configuration operation to take place.
• -u: specifies the administrative user that exists on the Enterprise Controller towhich the Proxy Controller is connected. Be certain that the password that youspecified in the /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd file is correct for the user that youspecify for this option.
Note:
The example below uses droot as the administrative user.
• -p: specifies the absolute path name of the file that contains the password for theuser that you specified with the -u option.
Overview of Installing Agent Controllers Using the Command Line Interface
Manage Assets 2-33
• -x: specifies the IP address or host name of the Proxy Controller to which thisAgent Controller will connect.
• -a: specifies the IP address to use during Agent Controller registration. Thisselects the network interface that the Agent Controller will use for registration.Accept the server's certificate when prompted. For example:
# /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/agentadm configure -u droot -p /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd -x 10.0.0.0agentadm: Version 1.0.3 launched with args: configure -u droot -p /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd -x 10.0.0.1workaround configuration done.Certificate:Serial Number: 947973225Version: 3Issuer: CN=flyfishing_scn-proxy_caSubject: CN=flyfishing_scn-proxy_Agent ControllerNot valid before: Thu Jun 19 15:36:59 MDT 1969Not valid after: Thu Apr 19 15:36:59 MDT 2029Certificate:Serial Number: 1176469424Version: 3Issuer: CN=flyfishing_scn-proxy_caSubject: CN=flyfishing_scn-proxy_caNot valid before: Thu Jun 19 15:36:56 MDT 1969Not valid after: Thu Apr 19 15:36:56 MDT 2029Accept server's certificate? (y|n)yConnection registered successfully.scn-Agent Controller configuration done.Checking if UCE Agent Controller process is still running, it may take a couple of minutes ...Process is no longer runningUCE Agent Controller is stopped.UCE Agent Controller is in [online] state.Checking if UCE Agent Controller process is up and running ...The process is up and running.UCE Agent Controller is started.Added the zone configuration automation successfully.Added the service tags recreate script successfully.#
Error messages similar to Connection cannot be registered in the followingexample typically indicate problems with the user credentials that you specifiedin the agentadm command. In this example, the user droot was notauthenticated on the Enterprise Controller. If you see this error, check that theuser name that you supplied for the agentadm -u option, and the password inthe file that you specified for the agentadm -p option, match an existingadministrative user on the Enterprise Controller.
Accept server's certificate? (y|n)yError with connection to CRS: com.sun.scn.connmgt.SCNRegClientException: droot, Code: 4, Code: 4ERROR : Connection cannot be registered.Code--2sc-console registration failed on [2].sc-console : User authentication error.Error executing step : sc_console
Overview of Installing Agent Controllers Using the Command Line Interface
2-34 Configuration Reference
If the system where you are installing the Agent Controller has multiple activenetwork interfaces, you can use the -a option to specify the IP address of theinterface that you want to use for Agent Controller registration. For example:
# /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/agentadm configure -u droot -p /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd -x 10.0.0.0 -a 10.0.0.1(output omitted)
11. If you encountered a Connection cannot be registered error message from theagentadm command, use agentadm to unconfigure the Agent Controller. Forexample:
# /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/agentadm unconfigureagentadm: Version 1.0.3 launched with args: unconfigureverified sc_console command is OKEnd of validation{output omitted}End of configuration.
After the Agent Controller has been unconfigured, correct the problem that wasindicated by the error message, and re-run the agentadm configure command.
12. Use the sc-console command to list the Agent Controller connection. Forexample:
# sc-console list-connectionsscn-Agent Controller https://10.0.0.0:21165 urn:scn:clregid:abcdef12-6899-4bcc-9ac7-a6ebaf71c1f5:20090420171121805#
Installing and Configuring an Agent Controller Manually Using a TokenProcedure that uses a token to configure an Agent Controller in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
This procedure uses a token to configure your Agent Controller software.
1. On the Enterprise Controller, change to the /var/opt/sun/xvm/images/agent/ directory, and list the files that it contains. This directory contains theAgent Controller installation archives. For example:
# cd /var/opt/sun/xvm/images/agent/# lsOpsCenterAgent.Linux.i686.12.1.0.zipOpsCenterAgent.Linux.i686.12.1.0.zip.sigOpsCenterAgent.SunOS.i386.12.1.0.zipOpsCenterAgent.SunOS.i386.12.1.0.zip.sigOpsCenterAgent.SunOS.sparc.12.1.0.zipOpsCenterAgent.SunOS.sparc.12.1.0.zip.sig#
2. Identify the Agent Controller archive that is appropriate for the system where youintend to install the Agent Controller. See Table 2–4 for a description of theavailable packages.
3. On the system where you want to install the Agent Controller (the target system),create a directory named /var/tmp/OC.
# mkdir /var/tmp/OC
Overview of Installing Agent Controllers Using the Command Line Interface
Manage Assets 2-35
4. Use scp or ftp to transfer the correct Agent Controller archive from the EnterpriseController to the /var/tmp/OC directory on the target system. Respond to anyauthentication or confirmation prompts that are displayed. For example:
# scp OpsCenterAgent.SunOS.sparc.12.1.0.zip [email protected]:/var/tmp/OCPassword:OpsCenterAgent.S 100% |*********************************************************************| 34695 KB 00:32#
5. On the target system, change to the /var/tmp/OC directory.
# cd /var/tmp/OC#
6. Use the unzip command to uncompress the Agent Controller archive. Forexample:
# unzip OpsCenterAgent.SunOS.sparc.12.1.0.zip(output omitted)
7. Run the install -a script in the OpsCenterAgent directory. For example:
# OpsCenterAgent/install -aInstalling Ops Center Agent Controller.No need to install 120900-04.No need to install 121133-02.No need to install 119254-63.No need to install 119042-09.No need to install 121901-02.No need to install 137321-01.Installed SUNWjdmk-runtime.Installed SUNWjdmk-runtime-jmx.(output omitted)6 patches skipped.19 packages installed.Installation complete.Detailed installation log is at /var/scn/install/log.Uninstall using /var/scn/install/uninstall.#
If you are installing the Agent Controller on Oracle Solaris 11, run the installcommand with the -p option and include the IP address; the local IPS pubs areconfigured for Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repository access using the IP address.For example:
# OpsCenterAgent/install -p 10.0.0.1#
8. On the Proxy Controller that will communicate with this Agent Controller instance,examine the /var/opt/sun/xvm/persistence/scn-proxy/connection.properties file. The last line in this file contains the auto-reg-token that is required for Agent Controller registration. For example:
# cat /var/opt/sun/xvm/persistence/scn-proxy/connection.properties#Generated by a program. Do not edit. All manual changes subject to deletion.
(output omitted)
trust-store=/var/opt/sun/xvm/security/jsse/scn-proxy/truststore
Overview of Installing Agent Controllers Using the Command Line Interface
2-36 Configuration Reference
auto-reg-token=abcdef12-1700-450d-b038-ece0f9482474\:1271743200000\:T#
9. On the system where you have installed the Agent Controller software, create anempty file named /var/tmp/OC/mytoken, and set its permission mode to 400.For example:
# touch /var/tmp/OC/mytoken# chmod 400 /var/tmp/OC/mytoken
10. Edit the /var/tmp/OC/mytoken file so that it contains the auto-reg-token stringfrom Proxy Controller with the following changes:
• Remove the auto-reg-token=.
• Remove any backslash characters from the token string. For example:
abcdef12-1700-450d-b038-ece0f9482474:1271743200000:T
11. Use the agentadm command to associate the Agent Controller with a ProxyController.
• Oracle Solaris OS: use the /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/agentadm command
• Linux OS: use the /opt/sun/xvmoc/bin/agentadm command. The examplecommands below use the following options:
• configure: causes an Agent Controller configuration operation to take place.
• -t: specifies the absolute path name of the file that contains the registrationtoken.
• -x: specifies the IP address or host name of the Proxy Controller to which thisAgent Controller will connect.
• -a: specifies the IP address to use during Agent Controller registration. Thisselects the network interface that the Agent Controller will use for registration.Accept the server's certificate when prompted. For example:
# /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/agentadm configure -t /var/tmp/OC/mytoken -x 10.0.0.0agentadm: Version 1.0.3 launched with args: configure -t /var/tmp/OC/mytoken -x 10.0.0.0workaround configuration done.
Certificate:Serial Number: 947973225Version: 3Issuer: CN=flyfishing_scn-proxy_caSubject: CN=flyfishing_scn-proxy_Agent ControllerNot valid before: Thu Jun 19 15:36:59 MDT 1969Not valid after: Thu Apr 19 15:36:59 MDT 2029
Certificate:Serial Number: 1176469424Version: 3Issuer: CN=flyfishing_scn-proxy_caSubject: CN=flyfishing_scn-proxy_caNot valid before: Thu Jun 19 15:36:56 MDT 1969Not valid after: Thu Apr 19 15:36:56 MDT 2029
Accept server's certificate? (y|n)
Overview of Installing Agent Controllers Using the Command Line Interface
Manage Assets 2-37
yConnection registered successfully.scn-Agent Controller configuration done.Checking if UCE Agent Controller process is still running, it may take a couple of minutes ...Process is no longer runningUCE Agent Controller is stopped.UCE Agent Controller is in [online] state.Checking if UCE Agent Controller process is up and running ...The process is up and running.UCE Agent Controller is started.Added the zone configuration automation successfully.Added the service tags recreate script successfully.#
If the system where you are installing the Agent Controller has multiple activenetwork interfaces, you can use the -a option to specify the IP address of theinterface that you want to use for Agent Controller registration. For example:
# /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/agentadm configure -t /var/tmp/OC/mytoken -x 10.0.0.0 -a 10.0.0.1(output omitted)
12. If you encountered a Connection cannot be registered error message fromthe agentadm command, use agentadm to unconfigure the Agent Controller. Forexample:
# /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/agentadm unconfigureagentadm: Version 1.0.3 launched with args: unconfigureverified sc_console command is OKEnd of validation
{output omitted}End of configuration.
After the Agent Controller has been unconfigured, correct the problem that wasindicated by the error message, and re-run the agentadm configure command.
13. Use the sc-console command to list the Agent Controller connection. Forexample:
# sc-console list-connectionsscn-Agent Controller https://10.0.0.0:21165 urn:scn:clregid:abcdef12-6899-4bcc-9ac7-a6ebaf71c1f5:20090420171121805
Special Discovery and Management ProceduresDescribes specific requirements for discovery of certain types of assets.
Most assets can be discovered and managed using standard procedures. However,some types of assets must be discovered or managed using special procedures:
Topics
• Oracle Engineered Systems: Discovery requires a custom configuration file that isprepared by Oracle service. See Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Operations forOracle SuperCluster Reference for more information.
Special Discovery and Management Procedures
2-38 Configuration Reference
• Oracle Solaris 11: Discovery requires that the Enterprise Controller and ProxyController are installed on Oracle Solaris 11 and the Oracle Solaris 11 UpdateLibrary is configured.
• Windows Systems: You must enable Windows Management Instrumentation(WMI) on Microsoft Windows systems before discovering them.
• M-Series Servers: You must ensure that user privileges and the status of eachdynamic system domain are correct before discovering a Sun SPARC Enterprise M-Series server.
• SPARC M5–32, M6–32, M7 Series Servers: These servers have ILOM serverprocessors. You must get access the server using an account with Ops CenterAdmin and Ops Center Security Admin roles.
Note:
SPARC M5–32, M6–32, M7 series servers are supported, but some featureshave limitations. For more information see the Target Servers section ofthe Certified Systems Matrix document.
• Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance: You can discover both the storage appliance and itsservice processor using the appropriate discovery profile.
• Oracle Solaris Cluster: You must discover and manage Oracle Solaris Clusters in aspecific order so that Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center can manage the entirecluster.
Windows SystemsDescribes requirements for discovery of Windows systems and WMI in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
Microsoft Windows systems can be discovered and managed using normal discoveryand management procedures. However, before the system can be discovered, theWindows Management Instrumentation (WMI) utility must be configured and haveaccess through the Windows Firewall or Internet Connection Firewall.
Enabling WMIProcedure for configuring Windows Management Interface (WMI) in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
This procedure allows the Enterprise Controller or a Proxy Controller to connect to thetarget Windows system.
1. Log in to the WMI on the target host.
2. Click Administrative Tools, then click Computer Management.
3. Expand Services and Applications.
4. On WMI Control, right click Properties.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click the Security button.
Special Discovery and Management Procedures
Manage Assets 2-39
7. Select the Administrators group.
8. Select the option to allow Remote Enable.
Allowing WMI Through the Windows FirewallProcedure for allowing WMI through firewall for Microsoft Windows systems..
This procedure allows WMI to send data through the target system's firewall.
1. Go to the command prompt on the target system.
2. Use the netsh command to allow WMI to send data through the firewall.
• On Windows Server 2008 R2, use the following command:
netsh advfirewall firewall set rule group="remote administration" new enable=yes
• On other Windows systems, use the following command:
netsh firewall set service RemoteAdmin enable
M-Series ServersOverview of requirements for discovering an M-Series servers in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
M-Series servers must be configured before they can be discovered and managed.
Topics
• About Discovering a SPARC Enterprise M-Series Server
• Discovering a SPARC M-Series Server
• Discovering an Oracle SPARC M5, M6, or M7 Server
About Discovering a SPARC Enterprise M-Series ServerDescribes discovery of the M3000, M4000, M5000, M8000, M9000, or Fujitsu M10servers and their XSCF firmware.
To discover, manage, provision, and update a Sun SPARC Enterprise® M3000, M4000,M5000, M8000, M9000, or Fujitsu M10 server (SPARC Enterprise M-series servers),you monitor its XSCF service processor and its dynamic system domains.
The SPARC Enterprise M-series servers have a dedicated processor for system controlthat is independent of the system processor. A SPARC Enterprise M3000, M4000, andM5000 server has one service processor. The SPARC Enterprise M8000 and M9000servers, each have two service processors; however, only one service processor isactive at a time. The eXtended System Control Facility (XSCF) firmware runs on thededicated service processor. The firmware manages hardware configuration, monitorscooling system (fan units), domain status, and error status, and can power on andpower off peripheral devices.
The XSCF firmware can also create dynamic system domains. Each domain is a logicalunit that can function as a system. An Oracle Solaris OS can operate in each domain.
Note:
Special Discovery and Management Procedures
2-40 Configuration Reference
Fujitsu M10 servers require XSCF Control Package (XCP) firmware version2050 (XCP2050) to use the Automatic Service Requests (ASR) functions and touse service tags to enable server discovery with the Find Assets function.
Discovering a SPARC Enterprise M-Series ServerProcedure for discovering an M-Series Server in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
To discover a Sun SPARC Enterprise® M3000, M4000, M5000, M7000, M8000, M9000,or Fujitsu M10 server, run an Add Assets Using Discovery Profile job for the XSCFservice processor. The discovery job discovers the XSCF service processor and itsdynamic system domains.
Perform the following tasks to discover this type of asset:
1. In the XSCF service processor, create a user account with platadm privilege if onedoes not exist.
2. Ensure that user privileges and the status of each dynamic system domain arecorrect.
3. Check the status of each dynamic system domain, using the showdomainstatus-a command. Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center can only discover domainsthat do not have a “-" status.
4. Log in to the XSCF shell from an XSCF-LAN port or from the serial port.
5. Discover the system using the Add Assets Using a Discovery Profile procedure.
A Discovery job is launched. Dynamic system domains and the XSCF serviceprocessor are discovered at the same time.
When the job is complete, the XSCF service processor and the dynamic systemdomains appear in the Managed Assets tab. Additionally, the service processor andthe domains appear under the M-Series Servers group in the Assets tree.
See Related Resources for Asset Management for more information.
Discovering an Oracle SPARC M5, M6, or M7 ServerProcedure for discovering an M-Series Server in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Because these servers have ILOM service processors, use the Add Assets action withthe ILOM service processor discovery profile to discover the ILOM service processorand its dynamic system domains. To discover an M7 server, you must use the currentversion of the product software.
1. Create a Discovery Profile choosing an ILOM Service Processor for the Asset Type.
2. Select existing or create new SSH and IPMI credentials.
3. Run an Add and manage various types of assets via discovery probes job.
4. Choose the Discovery Profile for the server and include the correct Hostnames orIP addresses.
5. After the discovery job completes successfully find the server in the Navigationpane under the M-Series Server tree.
Special Discovery and Management Procedures
Manage Assets 2-41
Note:
An M-Series system is significantly larger than a typical server so discoveryand refreshes of data can exceed the default expiration of 30 minutes. If thediscovery job fails, increase the number of seconds for operations on the ILOMservice processor by editing the /var/opt/sun/xvm/hal.properties filefor the following property:
ilom.sdm.maximum.command.execution.time=1800
See Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Discovering and Managing Oracle SPARC M5,M6, and M7 Servers Guide for a complete example.
About the Oracle ZFS Storage ApplianceDescription of the Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance and methods for discovering it.
The Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance family of products provides rich and efficient dataservices for file and block storage formats. Each appliance has the Analytics feature forobserving the condition and behavior of the appliance in real time and the ZFS HybridStorage Pool feature, which uses Flash-memory devices, high-capacity disks, andDRAM memory within a data hierarchy to provide solid-state response time withspinning disk capacity.
Note:
Starting in Release 12.3.1.0, Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center supportsan active-active configuration. Previous releases support an active-passiveconfiguration. In both cases, if a head fails, the other head takes control of allresources and provides the services associated with those resources.
The Oracle ZFS storage appliances are available in a cluster configuration, in whichtwo storage controllers, or heads, use storage and network resources to provideservices. In an active-active cluster, both heads are active. In an active-passive cluster,one head is active.
When working with an active-active configuration, Oracle recommends a singlestorage pool on each active head. Although multiple pools on one head is supported,the result is poor performance, suboptimal allocation of resources, artificialpartitioning of storage, and additional administrative complexity. Configuringmultiple pools on the same host is only recommended when drastically differentredundancy or performance characteristics are desired, for example, a mirrored pooland a RAID-Z pool. See the documentation for the Oracle ZFS storage appliance formore information.
Before you discover the storage appliance, configure the iSCSI targets on the storageappliance. In an active-passive cluster, one iSCSI target group is sufficient, althoughmultiple target groups are supported. In an active-active configuration, you mustconfigure at least two iSCSI target groups: one target group for the storage servedfrom the first head and one target group for the storage served by the second head.
To discover a storage appliance In an active-passive cluster, discover the active headand its iSCSI and/or NFS storage, and then discover the passive head, which has nostorage associated with it because it will take over the existing storage. The procedureis described in Discover an Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance and Configure Storage Libraries.
Special Discovery and Management Procedures
2-42 Configuration Reference
To discover a storage appliance in an active-active cluster, discover one head with itsiSCSI and/or NFS storage, and then run a second job to discover the second head withits corresponding iSCSI and/or NFS storage. This will create dynamic storage librariesbacked by each storage pool.
Because the storage appliance contains a service processor, it is possible to discoverthe appliance but not the service processor or to discover both. It is sufficient todiscover only the storage appliance by using the Add Assets action with a discoveryprofile for storage appliances as described in Discover an Oracle ZFS Storage Applianceand Configure Storage Libraries. You also have the following alternatives.
• Use Add Assets and a discovery profile to discover the storage appliance first andthen use a service processor discovery profile to discover its service processor.When you discover the storage appliance, Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Centerdisplays the device in the Storage section of the Assets tree. When you discover theservice processor, its information is mapped to the discovered appliance.
• Use Find Assets. Each storage appliance is discovered as two assets: a serviceprocessor and a storage appliance. Select both the appliance and its serviceprocessor and enter the user credentials. Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Centerdisplays the asset in the Storage section.
Note:
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center can use either the Storage Connectdriver or the RESTful/SSH Ops Center driver to communicate with thestorage appliance. Starting from Release 12.3.1.0, the RESTful/SSH OpsCenter driver is the recommended option to communicate with the storageappliance. The procedure to specify a driver provided in the product softwareis described in Discover an Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance and Configure StorageLibraries. To change drivers after discovery, use the Switch Driver action.
About Oracle Solaris ClusterDescription of requirements for discovering Oracle Solaris Clusters.
Discovering and managing an Oracle Solaris Cluster has some specific requirements.The discovery and management must be performed in the correct order.
Note:
Do not configure a new zone cluster or add a new global node during thediscovery and management process.
Discovering an Oracle Solaris ClusterProcedure for discovering an M-Series Server in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
1. Verify that all global nodes in the cluster are in cluster mode.
2. Discover all of the cluster's global nodes using a discovery profile. You mustprovide both ssh credentials and create JMX credentials for each global node. Thecredentials authenticate the Oracle Solaris Cluster's agent.
Special Discovery and Management Procedures
Manage Assets 2-43
Figure 2-8 Discovery Profile for Oracle Solaris Cluster
3. Discover the cluster using the discovery profile.
Launching Oracle Solaris Cluster 4.2Procedure for starting Oracle Solaris Cluster in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Starting in this version, you can launch the Oracle Solaris Cluster Manager:
1. In the Navigation pane, select Solaris Cluster and then select a cluster.
2. In the Actions pane, click Launch Web Console.
3. Log into the Oracle Solaris Cluster Manager.
Preparing to Discover ALOM AssetsProcedure to enable discovery of ALOM service processors in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Starting in Release 12.3.1, the discovery of assets with the ALOM service processor isdisabled by default. If your site has an asset with this type of service processor, enablediscovery using this procedure:
1. In the Navigation pane, select Administration.
2. Select the Enterprise Controller.
3. Click the Configuration tab.
4. In the Subsystem drop-down list, click Discovery.
5. Change the value of ssh.alom.timeout from 0 to the number of seconds toallow for discovery.
Managing AssetsOverview of actions for assets that have been discovered in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
Managing Assets
2-44 Configuration Reference
After discovery, the assets are now managed assets. Through their life cycle, youmight need to make changes to their configuration or position. When an asset ismoved, migrated, or deleted, the Asset tree might still display the original position ofthe asset for several minutes. To refresh the display of the Asset hierarchy manually,press the Ctrl key while clicking the Refresh button
Topics
• Editing Asset Attributes
• Viewing and Removing Access Points
• Deleting Assets
Editing Asset AttributesProcedure for changing the attributes of a specific asset in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
All assets have a description that can be edited.
The description field can be used for descriptive information about a system.
To edit asset attributes, perform the following steps:
1. On the Navigation pane, under Assets, select an asset.
2. In the Actions pane, click Edit Asset.
3. Edit the name, description, and tags, then click Save.
About the Number of AssetsDescription of how assets are counted in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The number of assets managed by the Enterprise Controller and by each of its ProxyControllers is reported on the Asset Counter tab. The reported numbers are not aphysical inventory of assets datacenter. These numbers represent the number of accesspoints in the assets.
The Enterprise Controller can manage 3000 assets and each Proxy Controller canmanage 500 assets. More assets can be managed but performance is affected. At 90% ofcapacity (2700 access points), a Warning alert is issued as an incident on the operatingsystem of the Enterprise Controller. For a Proxy Controller, the warning incident is setat 450 access points. At 100% of capacity, a Critical alert is issued.
Viewing the Number of AssetsProcedure for displaying the number of each type of asset in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
1. Select the Administration section in the Navigation pane.
2. Select the Enterprise Controller.
3. Click the Asset Counter tab in the center pane.
The Asset Counter tab contains a table for the Enterprise Controller with the totalnumber of each type of asset and a table that shows the number of assets managedby each Proxy Controller .
Managing Assets
Manage Assets 2-45
Figure 2-9 Asset Counter Tab
4. (Optional) If you are interested in the number of asset of a specific ProxyController, select the Proxy Controller from the Administration section in theNavigation pane and then click the Asset Counter tab.
The number represents the number of access points reported by each Proxy Controller.
You can refresh the display by selecting Run Asset Counter Job in the Action pane.
Viewing and Removing Access PointsProcedure for displaying how an asset is included in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
An asset's access points show how Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center connects tothe asset.
The following are possible access points:
• The discovery credentials used to discover the asset.
• The discovery credentials used to discover a related asset. For example, an accesspoint for a service processor is the discovery credentials of its operating system.
• Agent Controller installed on the asset.
• A virtual asset's virtualization host.
To view access points, select an asset and click the Configuration tab.
To delete an access point, perform the following steps:
1. On the Navigation pane, under Assets, select an asset and click the Configurationtab.
2. Select one or more access points, then click Delete Access Point.
Deleting AssetsProcedure for removing assets from Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The Delete Asset option uninstalls Agent Controller software if it is present, removingthe asset from Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center. All data for the asset isremoved. You delete assets to stop managing them with Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
The operating systems that support the Enterprise Controller and Proxy Controllerscannot be deleted or removed.
Managing Assets
2-46 Configuration Reference
Note:
Deleting a global zone also deletes its non-global zones. However, if a globalzone is managed with an Agent Controller, its non-global zones continue to bemanaged agentlessly even if their Agent Controllers are removed.
1. Click All Assets in the Assets section of the Navigation pane.
2. Select the asset or assets that you want to delete from the Managed Assets orUnprocessed Assets tabs.
3. Click Delete Asset.
4. If the assets do not have Agent Controllers, a confirmation window is displayed.Click Delete. A job is launched to delete the assets.
5. If the assets have Agent Controllers, the Management Credentials page isdisplayed. Provide management credentials using one of the following methods:
• Click New to create a set of credentials. Enter a name and the credentialinformation, then click OK.
• Click Select to select from a list of existing set of credentials. Click OK.
6. Click Next.
The Summary page is displayed.
7. Review the summary, then click Finish.
Asset GroupsOverview of asset groups in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Assets are automatically placed into system groups based on asset type. You can alsocreate your own groups and add assets to them, either by manually adding assets orby creating rules that add assets automatically based on asset characteristics.
Topics
• About Types of Groups
• About Asset Tags
• About Group Data
• Creating a Group
• Editing a Group
• Adding Assets to a Group
• Removing Assets from a Group
• Moving Assets to a Group
• Moving a Group
• Deleting a Group
Asset Groups
Manage Assets 2-47
About Types of GroupsDescribes the default asset groups and custom asset groups in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Assets are members of two types of groups: System groups and User-defined groups.System groups are automatically generated for each category of asset. User-definedgroups can contain any assets. You can configure rules to add any asset to the user-defined groups that meets the rule criteria.
Within system groups, a subgroup is created for each type of asset that OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center manages. You can use System Groups to locate andview assets of a specific type. You can also act on System Groups, such as changingmonitoring thresholds and updating management credentials. You can view systemgroups by selecting them from the drop-down list at the top of the Assets section inthe Navigation pane.
User-defined groups can contain any type of asset and can be organized by anycriteria. You can configure rules for user-defined groups that automatically add assetswith specific characteristics to the group.
You can take any action on a group that is applicable to the assets in the group. Forexample, you can update Automated Service Request (ASR) contacts for all assets in agroup, or target a group containing operating systems with an OS update job.
System GroupsList of default asset groups in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center creates these system groups:
• All Assets: contains all discovered and managed assets. This is the default view ofthe assets section.
• Engineered Systems: contains all Oracle Engineered Systems.
• Operating Systems: contains all operating systems with subgroups for each type ofoperating system such as Oracle Solaris OS, Oracle Linux, and SUSE Linux. Thesubgroups are further organized by version, such as Oracle Solaris 9 and OracleSolaris 10 software.
• Servers: contains all hardware that can receive OS provisioning.
• Chassis: contains all hardware that can receive firmware updates but not OSprovisioning.
• Network Switches: contains all network switches.
• Racks: contains all racks.
• Server Pools: contains all server pools.
• Storage: contains all storage systems.
• Solaris Clusters: contains all Oracle Solaris Clusters.
User-Defined GroupsList of properties for a custom asset group in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can specify the following characteristics for a user-defined group:
Asset Groups
2-48 Configuration Reference
• Group Name
• Description
• Group Location
• Group Rules: group rules add any assets to the group that match the attributes andrules.
• Subgroups: groups can be organized hierarchically.
About Asset TagsDescription of using labels to identify or sort assets.
A tag is a set of information attached to an asset. Each tag consists of a tag name,which is drawn from a list of values appropriate for each asset, and a tag value, whichcan be any text string. For example, an asset could have a tag with a tag name oforacle.cloud.resource.creation.time and a value of 12 June.
You can use tags to categorize assets and to simplify later searches. You can use tags toassociate information with assets, and to create groups of assets based on their tags ortag values. To add assets to a group using tags, either discover them using a profilethat includes the tag or, after discovery, create a new group or edit an existing groupto require membership based on a rule that uses the tag.
Adding TagsProcedure for adding tags to an asset in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can create tags to assets during or after discovery. To add tags to one or moreassets after discovery, perform the following steps:
1. On the Navigation pane, select an asset or group.
2. In the Actions pane, click Edit Tags.
Figure 2-10 Add Tags
3. Click the Add icon and select a tag name from the drop-down list. Enter a tagvalue, then click Save.
Viewing TagsProcedure displaying an asset’s tags in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Tags are displayed in the Dashboard tab for managed assets. Select an asset, then usethe mouse to hover on the Tags icon in the center pane to display the tags.
Deleting TagsProcedure for deleting asset tags in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
To delete tags, perform the following steps:
Asset Groups
Manage Assets 2-49
1. On the Navigation pane, select an asset or group.
2. In the Actions pane, click Edit Tags.
3. Select a tag, then click the Delete icon.
4. Click Save. The tag is deleted.
About Group DataProcedure for displaying information about a group of assets in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Each group can list all the assets in the group and can display data about their assets.Chassis and hardware groups display power usage information, and operating systemgroups display CPU, network, memory, and system load information.
You can select a group to see a dashboard page with information about the group,including:
• A group summary that shows the group's name, description, tags, location, andnumber of members.
• A membership graph showing the group's assets, any child groups, and any parentgroups.
• A status summary showing the problems of the assets within the group.
• An asset summary showing basic data about the assets within the group.
Creating a GroupProcedure for creating an asset group in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can organize your assets into groups to aid in management and inventory. For arule-based group, membership is determined by whether an asset conforms to therule. For example, if you select Name as an Attribute, Contains as a condition, andPod3 as a value, any asset with Pod3 in its name is added to the group.
1. In the Navigation pane, in the Assets section, select User Defined Groups fromthe drop-down list.
2. Click Create Group in the Actions pane.
3. In Group Name, specify the name to be displayed in the User-Defined Groups ofthe Navigation pane.
Asset Groups
2-50 Configuration Reference
4. In Description:, describe the purpose of the group. This description is displayedin the group's dashboard.
5. In Group Location, specify whether the position of this group in the Asset tree.You can create a group at the top level (root), the default, or as a child of anexisting user-defined group.
6. The Configure group rules option creates a rules-based group, that is, themembership of the group is determined by how an asset conforms to the rule.When you select this option, you will create one or more rules for the group. Thisselection also enables the Preview group before creation option.
7. The
Configure subgroups option allows you to specify an existing user-defined groupas a child of this group.
8. Keep the Preview Group Before Creation option if you are configuring grouprules or subgroups to test your rules or selections.
9. You have the option to add tags to the new group. Click Next.
10. If you are creating a rules-based group, the next step defines one or more rules.The first rule, Rule 1, is required and specifies whether an asset must match all ofthe rules or at least one of the rules to be included in the group.
11. To specify the second rule, select the Asset Type from the drop-down list.
12. Depending on the type of asset, the attributes that can control membershipchange. Select an attribute from the drop-down list. See About Asset Attributesfor a list of the asset attributes that can be used in group rules.
13. In the Condition dropdown list, select how the attribute is used in the rule. Theoptions are:
• Contains
• Does not contain
• Ends with
• Equal
• Matches
• Not equal
• Starts with
Asset Groups
Manage Assets 2-51
14. In the remaining field, enter the value that completes rule. For example, if theattribute is Name, the value is a string.
15. To add a third rule, click the Add icon and repeat the procedure. When you arefinished adding rules, click Next.
16. If you are adding subgroups, drag and drop one or more groups from theavailable groups list to the selected groups list. When you are finished, click Next.
17. If you chose to preview the group, view the assets and subgroups that will beadded to the group. If necessary, go back and change the group rules or the list ofsubgroups.
Creating a Group for Assets in Maintenance ModeProcedure for creating a user-defined group containing assets in maintenance mode inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can organize assets in Maintenance Mode into one rule-based group.
1. In the Navigation pane, in the Assets selection, select User Defined Groups fromthe drop-down list.
2. In the Actions pane, click Create Group.
3. For Group Name, enter a name for this custom group. This name is displayed inthe User-Defined Groups of the Navigation pane
4. In the Description field, describe the purpose of the group, in this case,Maintenance. This description is displayed on the group’s Dashboard.
5. In the Location field, select Top Level (root).
6. In Advanced Options, select Configure group rules, then click Next.
7. Create the rule that constrains membership of the group to assets that are inMaintenance mode.
a. For Rule 1, click All .
b. For Asset Type, select Any.
c. For the Attribute, Maintenance Mode.
d. For the condition, select Equal.
e. For the value, enter MAINTENANCE . Uppercase is required.
8. Click Next to skip adding subgroups.
9. In the preview, verify that the assets are listed as you intend.
Asset Groups
2-52 Configuration Reference
10. Click Finish to create the group.
Editing a GroupProcedure for editing the characteristics of an asset group in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can change the attributes of an existing group, including its name, description,rules, subgroups, and parent group. If you change or remove the rules of an existinggroup, assets added by those rules are removed if they do not match the new rules.However, assets that were added manually can only be removed manually.
To edit a group, perform the following steps:
1. On the Navigation pane, select All User Defined Groups from the Assets drop-down list.
Figure 2-11 All User Defined Groups
2. In the Actions pane, click Edit Group.
Note:
You can edit any of the group's characteristics. If you edit a group's rules,assets that were added by group rules will be removed if they do not meet thenew rules, but assets that were manually added will not be affected.
See Expression Query Language for a list of the asset attributes that can be used ingroup rules.
Asset Groups
Manage Assets 2-53
Adding Assets to a GroupProcedure for adding assets to a user-defined group in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
You can place assets into user-defined groups to organize them. When an asset isadded to a group, it continues to be displayed in the All Assets section. Assets can beadded to any number of groups.
1. In either the Managed Assets tab of the center pane or the Assets section of theNavigation pane, select the assets you want to add.
2. Click Add Asset to Group.
3. Select the destination group.
4. Click Add Assets to Group.
Removing Assets from a GroupProcedure for removing an asset from a group in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
When you remove an asset from a user-defined group, the asset remains in any othergroup of which it is a member.
If an asset was added to a group by the group's rules, it cannot be removed.
1. On the Navigation pane, under Assets, select All User Defined Groups.
2. Select the group that contains the assets.
3. Select one or more assets.
4. Click Remove Asset from Group
Moving Assets to a GroupProcedure for moving an asset from one group to another group in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
When you move assets to a new user-defined group, the assets are removed from thecurrent group and added to the new group.
If the current group has rules that match the asset you want to move, the asset remainsin the original group and the new group.
To move assets to a new group, perform the following steps:
1. On the Navigation pane, under Assets, select All User Defined Groups.
2. Select the group that currently contains the assets.
3. Select one or more assets and click Move Asset to Group.
4. Select the destination group and click Move Assets to Group/Subgroup.
Moving a GroupProcedure for moving a group of assets in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Asset Groups
2-54 Configuration Reference
You can move a user-defined group within the hierarchy of groups, making it a childof a different user-defined group or placing it at the top level.
1. On the Navigation pane, under Assets, select All User Defined Groups.
2. Select the group you want to move.
3. Click Move Group.
4. Select the new parent group.
5. Click Move Group.
Deleting a GroupProcedure for removing an asset group from Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Deleting a user-defined group removes the group and all of its subgroups from theuser-defined group hierarchy without removing any of the assets.
To delete a group, select a group and click Delete Group in the Actions pane.
Related Resources for Asset ManagementList of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center documents with additional information.
• To enable the Find Assets action, see Enabling Discovery by Service Tags.
• See Management Credentials for information about credentials for discoveringhardware assets.
• See Oracle Enterprise Manager Operations Reference for a comparison of agent-managed assets and agentless-managed assets.
• See Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies for information about how OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center generates alerts and incidents.
• See Operations for Oracle SuperCluster Reference for more information aboutdiscovering the Oracle SuperCluster T4-4, T5-8, and M6-32 systems.
• SPARC M5–32, M6–32, M7 series servers are supported, but some features havelimitations. For more information see the Target Servers section of the CertifiedSystems Matrix document.
See Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Discovering and Managing Oracle SPARCM5, M6, and M7 Servers Guide for a complete example of discovery.
• For end-to-end examples of discovering assets, see the workflows in the DeployHow To library at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/deploy.htm. In particular, see Discover an Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance andConfigure Storage Libraries for an example of discovery. The workflows identify thehow to documents for discovering and managing assets.
• For information about SPARC servers, see SPARC Systems at http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/documentation/oracle-sparc-ent-servers-189996.html.
• See Systems Management and Diagnostics at http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/documentation/sys-mgmt-networking-190072.html forinformation about ILOM configurations.
Related Resources for Asset Management
Manage Assets 2-55
Related Resources for Asset Management
2-56 Configuration Reference
3Configure Jobs
Overview of jobs in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
This chapter describes in detail about jobs, the different roles for managing jobs,viewing jobs, and the different actions that can be performed on jobs.
Topics
• Introduction to Jobs
• Roles for Job Management
• Actions Available for Jobs
• Location of Job Information in the User Interface
• Details of Jobs and Tasks
• Overview of Viewing Jobs
• Overview of Job Actions
• Overview of Job Properties
• Events for Jobs
• Audit Logs
• Related Resources for Job Management
Introduction to JobsDefinition of jobs in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
When you select an action, Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center creates a job. Thisjob is runs on either the Enterprise Controller system or a Proxy Controller. Eachconsists of one or more tasks and has one or more targets. The progress of the job isrecorded in a log file and displayed in the user interface.
Roles for Job ManagementList of required roles for job tasks in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
If a job has multiple targets, you can see only the targets for which you have thecorrect role. If you do not have the role for any of the targets, the job is not displayed.
A cloud user can only view or act on jobs that were created by the user. The cloud usercannot view jobs that were created by another user.
The following table lists the tasks that are discussed in this section and the rolerequired to complete the task. An administrator with the appropriate role can restrict
Configure Jobs 3-1
privileges to specific targets or groups of targets. Contact your administrator if you donot have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. See the Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center Administration for information about the different roles and thepermissions they grant.
Table 3-1 Job Management Tasks and Roles
Task Role
Viewing Job Status The same as the role required to launch the job.
Viewing Job Details The same as the role required to launch the job.
Monitoring Jobs for anAsset
The same as the role required to launch the job.
Answering Questions The same as the role required to launch the job.
Stopping a Job The same as the role required to launch the job.
Re-running a Job The same as the role required to launch the job.
Copying a Job The same as the role required to launch the job.
Deleting a Job The same as the role required to launch the job or JobManagement.
Changing the MaximumTime for a Job
Root access on Enterprise Controller system.
Actions Available for JobsList of available operations in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can perform the following actions on jobs:
• View details about the job, including the status of all tasks.
• Respond to prompts during a job.
• Interrupt or stop a running job. You can re-run the job later.
• Remove a job from the history.
• Re-run a job that had partial success, failed, or was stopped.
• Create a new job with a new Job ID based on a previous job; for example, to repeata successful complex multi-step job on another target.
Location of Job Information in the User InterfaceLists the navigation instructions to locate jobs in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
The Jobs pane is located at the bottom of the user interface and is not displayed bydefault. Open the Jobs pane to view a list of all jobs. You can monitor the progress ofcurrent jobs and can also review completed jobs. You can view the status of all jobs,view detailed information about specific jobs, and take actions on jobs.
Actions Available for Jobs
3-2 Configuration Reference
Table 3-2 Location of Job Information in the UI
Object Location
View a list of all jobs. Click the Jobs pane to display the Job Summary table.
View a list of tasks in a job. Click the Jobs pane to display the Job Summary table, then double-click a job todisplay the Jobs Detail view.
View a job for a specific asset Select an asset from the Asset view of the Navigation pane then click the Jobstab Select the job.
Details of Jobs and TasksLists the details that can be viewed for jobs in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The Job Details view displays the targets of the job, and also the followinginformation:
• Job status:
– Running – The job is in progress.
– Waiting for User Input – The job has started, but needs information from a userbefore it can be completed.
– Failed – The job was not successful.
– Partially Successful – Some tasks were completed successfully. This could be ajob with multiple tasks, in which some tasks completed but others failed, or ajob with multiple targets, in which the job was successful for only some targets.
– Stopped – The job was stopped by the user.
– Scheduled – The job has been scheduled to run at a specific time. It might be aone-time job or a recurring job.
– Successful – The job has completed. All of its tasks were completed successfully.
• Job ID – A unique identification number for the job.
• Type of job – For example, the discovery custom type identifies a job as a result of acustom discovery action.
• Name of job – A name for the job.
• Run ID – If a job has been run multiple times, each run of the job has a separate runID.
• Mode of job – Simulated or Actual Run. Some jobs can be simulated. Simulated jobsverify that the necessary permissions, images, space, and other job requirementsare satisfied. To perform an actual run of a simulated job, you must create a newjob.
• Owner of job – The user who launched the job.
• Start / Scheduled Date – The date and time when the job was started or isscheduled to start.
Details of Jobs and Tasks
Configure Jobs 3-3
• Elapsed time – The amount of time the job has been running, if the job is running.The amount of time it took for the job to complete, if the job has completed.
• Description – Description of the job.
• Failure policy – The failure policy of the job, can be one of the following:
– Continue on Failure – if a task fails, continue to run other tasks.
– Abort on Failure – if a task fails, all remaining tasks are aborted.
– Rollback on Failure – if a task fails, abort all remaining tasks, and run therollback method on the failed task and all previous successful tasks.
• Next Scheduled Time (For recurring scheduled jobs) – This option is available onlyin the job summary table. It displays the time when the job started. If it isscheduled to run in the future, then it displays the next run time.
• Next Scheduled Date – The next date that the job will be run, or null if the job willnot run again.
• Start Date – The date/time that the run of this job started.
• Creation Date – The date/time that the job was first created.
• Task Execution Order:
– Sequential – the tasks are run one after another.
– Parallel – all the tasks run at the same time.
– Sequential_on_task – this applies to tasks that target more than one target. Thetask must complete on all targets before the next task begins.
• List of tasks – This option is available on the job target details view. It displays thefollowing:
– Asset that is the target of the task
– Last log entry for the task or the result of the task if the task is completed.
– Elapsed time – the amount of time that this task has been running.
• Task execution order – The execution order of the task.
• Task progress/results – Progress or result of the task.
• Event logs – Event logs are generated by tasks as they progress.
Overview of Viewing JobsOverview of displaying job information in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The Jobs pane displays all current and past jobs that have not been deleted.
Topics
• Viewing All Jobs and Jobs With Special Status
• Viewing Job Details
Overview of Viewing Jobs
3-4 Configuration Reference
• Monitoring Jobs for an Asset
• Searching for Jobs
Viewing All Jobs and Jobs With Specific StatusProcedure for displaying a list of jobs in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
To view all jobs, perform the following steps:
1. Click and expand the Jobs pane at the bottom of the UI.
The Jobs pane is displayed as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-1 Jobs pane
2. In the Jobs pane, click the All Jobs icon, highlighted in Figure 3-1.
All the jobs are displayed.
3. To view jobs with a specific status (such as jobs in progress, jobs waiting for userinput, failed jobs, partially successful jobs, stopped jobs, scheduled jobs, andsuccessful jobs), click the respective job status icon. The jobs with the selectedstatus are displayed.
Viewing Job DetailsProcedure for displaying information about a specific job in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can view detailed information about a job, including the status of the tasks thatmake up the job.
To view job details, perform the following steps:
1. Select a job in the Jobs pane.
Figure 3-2 View Job Details
2. Click the View Job Details icon, highlighted in Figure 3-2 or double-click the job.The Job Details window is displayed.
Overview of Viewing Jobs
Configure Jobs 3-5
Figure 3-3 Job Details Window
The overall status of the target is displayed on the left. On the right, a table lists allthe targets.
3. Select a target and click Display Selected Target Details icon, highlighted in Figure 3-3. You can also double-click the target to display the target details.
The Job Target Details window is displayed.
Figure 3-4 Job Target Details Window
4. Select a target and click Display Selected Task Details icon. You can also double-click a task.
The Task Logs window is displayed with the Event Logs tab active, as show in Figure 3-5.
Overview of Viewing Jobs
3-6 Configuration Reference
Figure 3-5 Task Logs Window
You can click the Task Properties tab to see additional information about the task,such as the Task ID and the permissions used to complete the task.
5. Click Export Logs on either tab to save the event log as a text file. The View TargetLogs window is displayed with two options:
• Selected Task Target Log exports the current task.
• Full Job Log exports all tasks.
6. Click Save to export the event log to a file and location of your choice.
You can also view and export the event log for a task or job by selecting the ViewTarget Logs icon on the Jobs Target Details window, as show in Figure 3-4.
Monitoring Jobs for an AssetProcedure for viewing jobs for a specific asset in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
You can view jobs for a particular asset, both running jobs and jobs that have beencompleted.
To view only those jobs for a particular asset, perform the following steps:
1. In the Navigation pane, under Assets, select an asset.
2. In the center pane, click the Jobs tab.
Overview of Viewing Jobs
Configure Jobs 3-7
Figure 3-6 Jobs pane in Assets View
Figure 3-6 shows the Jobs pane for a selected asset. The Current and Historicaltables show the jobs for the asset.
3. Select a job and double-click to view the details of the job.
Searching for JobsProcedure for find a specific job in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can search for specific jobs in any state. To search for a particular job, perform thefollowing steps:
1. Click Search in the upper right corner of the Jobs pane.
Figure 3-7 Jobs Search
2. Select one or more job characteristics to search, then enter a search term and clickthe Search icon.
Jobs for which the selected characteristics match or include the search term aredisplayed.
Overview of Viewing Jobs
3-8 Configuration Reference
Overview of Job ActionsDescription of the relationship between a job’s status and the actions that you can takein Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can take actions on jobs that have been launched. These actions vary dependingon the current status of the job.
Topics
• Answering Questions for a Job
• Stopping a Job
• Re-running a Completed Job
• Re-running a job on Failed Targets
• Copying a Job
• Deleting a Job
• Debugging a Job Using the OCDoctor
Answering Questions for a JobProcedure for responding to queries during a job in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Some jobs require user input to complete. A job that requires a response has the statusof Waiting for User Input. To provide input, perform the following steps:
1. Select a job with the Waiting for User Input status.
2. Click the Answer Questions icon.
3. Select Yes or No for each question, or click Yes to All or No to All.
4. When you have answered each question, click Submit to resubmit the job using thesame Job ID and Run ID.
Stopping a JobProcedure for interrupting a job in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can stop a job that is running. All tasks in progress are interrupted and tasks thathave not yet started are aborted. The completion status of the job depends on thenumber of tasks that have completed, have been interrupted, and have not started.
Note: You cannot stop a migration job or an auto-recovery job. For thesetypes of jobs, the taskStopForbidden job property is set to true by default.Although it is not recommended, it is possible to allow the stopping of thesejobs by changing the value to false. Navigate to the Enterprise Controller’sConfiguration tab and select Job Manager properties.
To stop a job, perform the following steps:
Overview of Job Actions
Configure Jobs 3-9
1. Select a job that is running.
2. Click Stop Selected Jobs.
3. Click Stop Job to confirm.
Re-running a Completed JobProcedure for repeating a job in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
If a job is completed, you can repeat the job with a new Run ID. The re-run option isdisabled for some jobs.
To re-run a job, perform the following steps:
1. Click and expand the Jobs pane.
2. Select a job.
3. Click Re-Run Selected Jobs.
4. Click Run Job.
The job is re-run with a new Run ID.
Re-running a Job on Failed TargetsProcedure for repeating an incomplete job in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
If a job is partially completed, failed, or stopped, you can repeat the job on failed orincomplete targets. To re-run a job on failed targets, perform the following steps:
1. Select the job and view the job details.
2. Select one or more failed targets from the list of targets and click Re-Run SelectedFailed Targets, then click OK.
The job is re-run with the same Run ID on the failed targets.
Copying a JobProcedure for making a copy of an existing job in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
You can copy an OS or firmware update job, using a completed job as a template for anew job. To copy a job, perform the following steps:
1. Select the job that you want to copy and click Copy Job.
A new job wizard is displayed, using the information from the existing job.
2. Modify the job information, select a schedule, and click Submit Job.
The new job is submitted with a new Job ID.
Deleting a JobProcedure for removing a job from Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Deleting a job removes it from the queue entirely. It cannot be re-run or resumed, andits job details are not available.
Overview of Job Actions
3-10 Configuration Reference
Note:
You cannot delete jobs that are running. You must first stop the job and thendelete it.
To delete a job, perform the following steps:
1. Select the job that you want to delete.
2. Click Delete Selected Jobs.
3. Click Delete Jobs to confirm.
Debugging a Job Using the OCDoctorProcedure for diagnosing problems with a failed job using OCDoctor in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can debug a job that has been run on a managed asset. This action runs a self-diagnosis using the OCDoctor's --troubleshoot option on the asset.
To debug a job, perform the following steps:
1. Select the job and click the Debug Job Using OCDoctor icon.
2. Select either Run New Self Diagnosis to run a new diagnosis or Work on PreviousSelf Diagnosis to view the results of a prior diagnosis. If you select Work onPrevious Self Diagnosis, the results of the prior self-diagnosis are displayed, andyou can re-run the self diagnosis.
3. Attempt to fix issues by selecting Attempt to Fix Issues, or select Collect Logs tocollect log files from the target.
4. Review the summary information and click Finish to launch the self-diagnosis job.
5. Review the job details or rerun the wizard and select Work on Previous SelfDiagnosis to view the data gathered by the self diagnosis.
Overview of Job PropertiesOverview of job management in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The Enterprise Controller uses several properties to manage its jobs.
Topics
• Job Properties
• Changing a Job Property
Job PropertiesLists the properties that can be viewed or configured for jobs in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can manage the following properties of jobs and tasks:
Overview of Job Properties
Configure Jobs 3-11
• jobTypeWeight.FirmwareProvisioningJob – This value sets the relative weight offirmware provisioning jobs. Do not modify this value unless directed by OracleSupport.
• taskTimeOut – Sets the number of minutes before a task expires and fails.
• tierTimeOut – Sets the number of minutes before a job that has not been handledby a Proxy Controller fails.
• taskStopForbidden – The value of true prevents the Stop Job action. This the thedefault value for auto-recovery and migration jobs. Although it is notrecommended, you allow these jobs to be stopped by setting the property tofalse.
• totalAllowedWeight – Do not modify this value unless directed by My OracleSupport.
• totalDispatchWeight – This value sets the total weight of jobs that can beperformed in parallel. Increase this value if your Enterprise Controller system canhandle additional jobs.
Changing a Job PropertyProcedure for changing the configuration of jobs in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
You can modify the values to improve performance. The changes you make affect allactivities. For example, when you increase the taskTimeOut value, all tasks of alljobs use the new value.
To modify a property perform the following steps:
1. In the Navigation pane, select Administration, then select the Enterprise Controllerand click the Configuration tab.
2. In the drop-down menu, select Job Manager properties.
3. Edit the values, then click Save.
Events for JobsLists the location of the audit log in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
To follow the progress of a job, view Job Details. If a job does not completesuccessfully, you can examine the audit log file in the following location:
On Oracle Solaris system: /var/cacao/instances/oem-ec/audits
On Linux System: /var/opt/sun/cacao2/instances/oem-oc/audits
Audit LogsLists the type of event and the type of information about the event that is logged
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center logs events to create a record of the followingoperations:
• Adding and deleting a user account
• Changing the roles for a user account
Events for Jobs
3-12 Configuration Reference
• Connecting to the Enterprise Controller
• Starting and ending jobs
The audit log contains information about:
• Date and time of event
• User ID executing a job
• Type of event
• End of the job
• Details of the login connection: type of connection, port, and IP address
Note:
You must have a root access to view the log files.
Logs cannot be edited or modified by any user.
Related Resources for Job ManagementList of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center documents with additional information.
For instructions on performing actions or to learn more about the role of this feature,refer to the following:
• Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration
• See Logs and Directories in Oracle Enterprise Manager Operation Reference formore information on audit log files.
For end-to-end examples, see the workflows and how to documentation in the library.For deployment tasks, go to http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/deploy.htm and for operate tasks go to http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/operate.htm
Related Resources for Job Management
Configure Jobs 3-13
Related Resources for Job Management
3-14 Configuration Reference
4Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies
Overview of monitoring rules in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
This chapter discusses the types of monitoring rules and how the software usesmonitoring rules and policies to generate alerts and incidents in the user interface.
Topics
• Introduction to Monitoring Rules and Policies
• Roles for Monitoring Rules and Policies
• Actions Available for Monitoring Rules and Policies
• Location of Monitoring Information in the User Interface
• About Monitoring Rules
• Monitoring Policies
• About Disabling and Enabling Monitoring
• Related Resources for Monitoring Rules and Policies
Introduction to Monitoring Rules and PoliciesOverview of asset monitoring in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Monitoring detects components or attributes of a managed resource that are notoperating within parameters. Resource is a broad term for an asset (such as hardwareor operating system), a group, a network, or a library that is managed by OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center. When you apply monitoring policy to all the assets,you enforce consistency in reporting status for the assets.
Monitoring rules and policies are the components of a complete monitoringconfiguration:
• Monitoring Rules: Define alerting conditions. You apply one or more rules to anasset to raise an alert when the asset is operating outside the defined parameter.
• Monitoring Policies: A set of monitoring rules targeted to a specific asset type.System-defined monitoring policies contain a set of rules that are applied toresources by default. You can also create your own policies, define the rules for thepolicy, and make those policies the default policies for new assets.
When you activate a monitoring rule on an asset, a monitor is activated on the asset'smanagement access point (usually the Agent Controller or the Proxy Controller). Themonitor gathers information about the condition of a resource. When an operatingsystem is an agentless managed system, the software monitors the operating systemremotely.
Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies 4-1
Roles for Monitoring Rules and PoliciesList of required roles for monitoring tasks in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Table 3 lists the roles required to complete monitoring tasks. You can restrictprivileges to specific targets or groups of targets. Contact your administrator if you donot have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. See the Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center Administration for information about the different roles and thepermissions they grant.
Table 4-1 Monitoring Tasks and Roles
Task Role
View a monitoring rule Read
Plan/Profile Admin
View a monitoring policy Read
Plan/Profile Admin
View the association of an asset and a monitoring policy Read
Asset Admin
Plan/Profile Admin
View the historical data of a threshold rule Read
Asset Admin
Create, edit, or delete a monitoring rule Fault Admin
Create, copy, extract, edit, and apply a monitoring policy Plan/Profile Admin
Modify the monitoring configuration of an asset Fault Admin
Delete a monitoring policy Plan/Profile Admin
Group assets by a monitoring policy Asset Admin
Apply a monitoring policy to an asset Fault Admin
Apply a monitoring policy to a group Asset Admin and Fault Admin
Actions Available for Monitoring Rules and PoliciesList of available operations in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can perform the following actions, depending on the type of rules, therequirements, and your roles:
• Create, edit or delete a monitoring rule.
• Create, copy, extract, edit, apply, or delete a monitoring policy.
• Modify the monitoring configuration for an asset.
• Group assets by a monitoring policy.
• Apply a monitoring policy to an asset or a group.
Roles for Monitoring Rules and Policies
4-2 Configuration Reference
Location of Monitoring Information in the User InterfaceLists the navigation instructions to locate monitoring information in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Table 4-2 Location of Monitoring Rules and Policies in the UI
Object Location
Monitoring policies Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane, then click MonitoringPolicies.
Monitoring rules Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane, then click MonitoringPolicies. Double-click a policy to see the rules.
Asset-specific monitoringrules
Select an asset from the Asset view, then click the Monitoring tab.
Viewing Monitoring Policies and RulesProcedure for displaying an asset’s monitoring policy and to view a policy’s rules inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can view rules for a specific asset or a specific policy from different places in theUI, as follows:
To view the rules for a specific asset, use Asset View:
1. In the Navigation pane, expand Assets, then click the asset.
2. In the center pane, navigate to the Monitoring tab and click it.
The name of the monitoring policy applied to the asset is displayed at the top ofthe monitoring rule grid, next to the number of rules.
To view the rules for a specific policy, use Policy View:
1. In the Navigation pane, expand Plan Management, then scroll to the OperationalPlans section.
2. Click Monitoring Policies.
3. Click the policy to display details in the center pane. From this view, you can dothe following:
• Click View Associated Assets to view all assets that are monitored with thispolicy.
• Click the Set as Default Policy icon to make this policy the default monitoringpolicy.
• Double-click the policy in the center pane to add or remove rules or to changemonitoring parameters of a rule.
About Disabling and Enabling MonitoringDescribes the effect of disabling monitoring for an asset.
Note:
Location of Monitoring Information in the User Interface
Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies 4-3
Disabling monitoring policies stops the evaluation of monitoring ruleconditions against collected data and prevents the deployment of newmonitors across your data center. It does not disable the collection of data onmanaged assets.
To disable monitoring, disable all monitoring policies for your data center so thatincidents and alerts are not generated. When you reenable monitoring, the softwareapplies the monitoring rules that are defined by the default monitoring policies to allof the assets.
You must use the command line interface to disable or reenable monitoring policies.See Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Command Line Interface for more information.
To temporarily disable incidents from a single asset, or a group of assets, place theasset or group in Maintenance Mode. This mode is useful to prevent incidentsgenerated during system maintenance.
About Monitoring RulesDescribes the types of severity for default rules and custom rules used in monitoringpolicies for Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Monitoring rules state the values and boundaries for an asset's activity. A monitoringpolicy is a set of rules. Each monitoring policy contains rules for threshold levels.Default policies for monitoring hardware, operating systems, and Oracle SolarisClusters are included in the software. You can use the default policies, but you cannotedit them. To edit or add monitoring rules to a monitoring policy, you must make acopy and then set that policy to be the default.
Monitoring rules define the alerting conditions. Rules are associated with, anddetermined by, the type of managed resource. You can apply a generic monitoringrule to many different attributes, but other monitoring rules are attribute-specific,hard-coded into drivers and cannot be relocated or reconfigured.
When you set a threshold, the UI displays the existing historical data for an attribute.The software might propose some default threshold values based on the analysis ofhistorical data, and display existing thresholds as a bar on that historical data. You canenter any threshold value.
Each managed resource has a Monitoring tab. You can add, edit, enable, disable, andremove resource monitoring rules. You can tune the rules for a specific managedresource.
Note:
Tuning rules for a specific managed resource detaches the resource from themonitoring policy, keeping only a copy of the rules. When you modify rules inthe policy, the change is not made to the rules that are associated with theresource.
Rules have Info, Warning, and Critical severity levels. Default values and severitylevels are provided at installation, but you can edit the rules for your organization. Foruser-defined rules, you can define the time between when the alerting conditionoccurs and when the software generates an alert or incident. You can configure thesoftware to send an e-mail or pager message when it identifies a Warning or Criticalincident.
About Monitoring Rules
4-4 Configuration Reference
The following categories of monitoring rules are available:
• System-defined rules: These are attribute-specific and are hard-coded into drivers.You can disable a system-defined rule, but you cannot edit, relocate, or reconfigurethese types of rules.
• User-defined rules: These are associated with, and determined by, the type ofmanaged resource. You can apply a user-defined rule to many different attributes.
About Parameters for User-Defined RulesDescription of rule types and their severity levels in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
The following types of editable user-defined rule parameters, also known as ruletypes, are available:
• Threshold: Sets an upper or lower monitoring threshold for the monitoredattribute.
• Boolean Control: Sets a logical operator of true or false for the monitored attribute.
• Enumerated Control: A series of values that defines a subset of specific valuesamong the possible values of the monitored attribute. An alert occurs when theattribute matches one of those specific values.
• Expression: Defines the variables, literals, and operators for an attribute. Anexpression is an instruction to execute something that returns a value.
You cannot modify all rules, but most rules include some parameters that you cantune, or edit, to meet your organization's requirements.
The following are some examples of editable parameters:
• Severity level of the alert: You can define the parameters for informational,warning, and critical alerts.
• Raising and clearing values: These are threshold settings that determine when analert is raised and cleared. These two values are always the same. For example, youcan configure the software to raise an alert when a value reaches 90% and clear thealert when the value falls below 90%.
• Monitor for alert limits at specific time: Defines when you want monitoring tooccur, or to not occur. You might use this parameter when a daily maintenanceprocedure causes an attribute to operate outside of the normal monitoringthreshold, but you do not want to raise an alert. You can define a period of timewhen the monitors are disabled and you can perform maintenance.
• Generate alert after: Defines how long an issue occurs before an alert is generated.The number defines the time between when a threshold is exceeded and when analert is generated. The alert is not triggered immediately. An alert is generatedwhen the monitored attribute value is outside the threshold after the specifieddelay. You might use this parameter to limit false positive alerts due to atemporary condition.
Overview of Enabled and Active RulesDescribes the states of monitoring rules in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Monitoring rules have two types of states:
About Monitoring Rules
Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies 4-5
• Enabled or Disabled: Disabling a rule removes that attribute from monitoring. Youcan disable and enable rules on a per asset or group basis.
• Active or Inactive: Reflects the system's state and indicates whether the software ismonitoring the asset or group. When a rule is not enabled, monitoring is not active.
By default, all monitoring rules are enabled. The status appears on the AlertMonitoring Rules page, which you can access from the Monitoring tab. When Yes is inthe Enabled and Active fields, the rule is enabled and active. When No appears in thecorresponding field, a rule is disabled or inactive. Figure 4-1 shows the Service AlertMonitor status as enabled, but inactive.
Figure 4-1 Enabled and Active Monitoring Rules
An Enabled field appears in the list of monitoring rules for an asset. You can disableone or more rules for a specific asset. When No appears in the Enabled column, therule is disabled.
When a rule is enabled, the active state reflects the system's actual state and indicateswhether the software is using the rule. The following are some reasons that an enabledrule might be inactive:
• When a specific attribute is not hard-coded into the driver, monitoring is notpossible for that attribute.
• The software cannot reach the resource or the attribute cannot be refreshed.
• Some type of misconfiguration, such as a missing mandatory parameter or anillegal value for a parameter.
• An internal error specific to the monitor, particularly for driver-specific monitors.
You can view the rules for a specific asset or you can view the rules for a policy that isassociated with one or more assets.
About Editing Monitoring RulesDescribes the effect of changing a monitoring rule.
Monitoring rules have pre-defined parameters. You can change the parameters,including the threshold values and the monitoring level, to meet your data centerguidelines. You can define the parameters for an individual asset or for a group ofassets.
About Monitoring Rules
4-6 Configuration Reference
You can create separate monitoring groups to consistently and efficiently define theparameters for all systems in each group. For example, you can create a group for a setof high priority systems. You edit one set of specific threshold values for all membersof that group and apply a monitoring policy to the group. All members of the groupare now monitored in the same way for the same values.
You can edit a monitoring rule for a specific asset or the monitoring rule for amonitoring policy. Editing the monitoring rule parameters for an individual systemmight be useful when a particular system is on a critical path. For example, you mightconsider the systems that you have the Enterprise Controller and Proxy Controllers oncritical path systems, you can monitor the system continuously and create morestringent monitoring thresholds for those systems.
Note:
When you update a monitoring rule in a policy, the monitoring configurationof all assets that are associated with the policy are updated to reflect therevised rule.
You can perform the following tasks:
• Change the values for the Warning and Critical thresholds
• Change file system thresholds
• Change the thresholds by system or by group
• Set specific threshold values for different operating systems
For example, you can create a threshold on the Enterprise Controller system that sendsa warning when the file system use exceeds 90%. This alerts you when the EnterpriseController file system is almost full.
For a threshold alert, you can change how often and for how long the softwaremonitors the resource. You can change the threshold values.
• Alert window: Enables you to specify a period of the day when the monitoringrule is enabled. For example, when a daily maintenance operation causes amonitored attribute to exceed a threshold, you can exclude monitoring for that timeto disable monitoring for that maintenance window.
• Generate alert after: Enables you to configure monitoring to ignore a monitoredattribute that is outside the defined monitoring parameters for a short period oftime. Specifying a delay means that the software generates an alert only when thevalue remains above the specified limit for a given duration. The software does notgenerate an alert when the value goes above the limit once and then immediatelygoes back to normal.
Editing a Monitoring RuleProcedure for changing a monitoring rule in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
1. Determine whether to edit a rule for a policy or for an individual asset:
• For a policy: From the Plan Management section of the Navigation pane, clickMonitoring Policies, then click a policy. Make a copy of the system-definedpolicy to create a user-defined policy.
About Monitoring Rules
Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies 4-7
• For an asset: From the Assets section of the Navigation pane, select an asset,then click the Monitoring tab.
2. Click the Edit Alert Monitoring Rule Parameters icon to open the wizard.
3. Click the rule you want to change.
4. For the parameter you want to change, click the entry in the Value column andtype the new value. For a threshold alert, you can change how often and for howlong the value is monitored, and you can change the threshold values.
For example to change a Reachability rule’s parameter from Warning to Critical,click unreachable.duration.minutes.CRITICAL
5. You can also change the duration to wait before an alert is generated. The defaulttime is 3 minutes.
6. Click Apply to submit the changes.
See About Asset Attributes for more about the attributes that you can use inmonitoring rules.
About Historical Data and ThresholdsDescribes ways to use the asset data that Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Centerstores.
The software maintains a history of each monitored asset's performance against itsassigned threshold rules. When you add a new threshold-type monitoring rule ormodify a threshold configuration for a specific asset, it does not impact the asset'sattribute history.
The asset's attribute history, which is maintained by the software, is not specificallytied to the threshold rules. Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center only recordsstatistical values of the asset attributes over time. However, the threshold wizard canleverage the history to suggest meaningful threshold values. When there is historicaldata for the monitored attribute, a graphical representation of the historical dataappears along with a proposed default threshold value based on the analysis of thedata.
When modifying a threshold configuration for a specific asset, you can choose the timeframe from a list of options, from one day up to six months, to display a graphicalrepresentation of the historical data. You can use this information to tune thethreshold rules.
Note:
When you edit the threshold limit for a specific asset, the softwaredisassociates the asset from the default monitoring policy and creates a newmonitoring policy for the asset.
About New Monitoring RulesDescribes custom monitoring rules in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Each monitoring policy contains a default set of rules. The rule set and defaultparameters depend on the managed asset subtype.
About Monitoring Rules
4-8 Configuration Reference
When specifying an Expression monitoring rule, you use the Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center query language to write a logical expression that defines thealerting condition for one or more resource attributes. The logical expression includesattribute names, operators, and literal values. You can use a dotted notation toreference attribute subfields.
When adding a Threshold, Enumerated, or Boolean monitoring rule, you must definethe monitored attribute. When adding an Expression rule type, specify an expressionthat references one or more attributes to monitor. The following are some examples ofmonitored attributes:
• CpuUsage.usagePercentage
• ProcessUsage.topMemoryProcesses.pid=*.physicalMemoryUsage
• DiskUsageSet.name=*.busyPercentage.
Monitored attributes are available in the Javadoc that is in the Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center Software Developer's Kit (SDK). Go to the dvd/platform/Product/components/packages directory and install the SUNWxvmoc-sdk.pkgpackage.
Browse the available attributes and names for the monitoring framework. Attributesalways start with an upper case letter, such as SystemUpTime, and fields always startwith a lower-case letter.
For example, when you want to list the valid monitored attributes for an operatingsystem, go to the com.sun.hss.type.os.OperatingSystem Javadoc page. Thispage displays all of the attributes of an OperatingSystem.
Each of these attributes is either a simple type, a structure or struct-like type, or acollection type. The following are examples of the different types of attributes:
• Simple: You can use the name, such as SystemUpTime
• Struct-like: You can drill-down into a field of the structure type. The fields alwaysstart with a lower-case letter, such as SystemLoad.average1Minute
• Collection: You can drill-down into a member of the collection. For Maps you dothis by specifying the appropriate 'key'. When you set the key, specify the value forthe 'name' field, to get the value of a single member. For example, use the followingto check the 'enabled' value of the interface named eth0:InterfaceInfos.name=eth0.enabled
Note:
Structures are sometimes nested. For example, a struct-like attribute cancontain another struct-like field, or a collection. Collections typically containstruct-like values. To drill down, continue to append the appropriate fieldnames.
You can perform a query which scans across all members of a collection by specifyingthe '*' wildcard value for the key or name. When you perform a query, you must useone of the following operators: max, min, or like. For the query syntax, see theDomainQuery Java class Javadoc. See for details on the Javadocs.
See the appendix for Expression Query Language for more information on theexpression query language, grammar, lexical elements, and method details.
About Monitoring Rules
Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies 4-9
Monitoring PoliciesOverview of monitoring policies in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Monitoring policies contain the configuration used to monitor an asset, includingdefined thresholds for alerts. You can revise many of the threshold and monitorsettings, or use one of several methods to create new policies.
Topics
• About System and User-Defined Monitoring Policies
• Details of a Monitoring Policy
• Copying or Creating a Monitoring Policy
• About Extracting a Monitoring Policy
• About Changing the Monitoring Configuration of an Asset Bound to a MonitoringPolicy
• About Applying a Monitoring Policy to a Group
• About Asset Groups with the Same Monitoring Policy
• Deleting a Monitoring Policy
About System and User-Defined Monitoring PoliciesDescribes default monitoring policies and custom monitoring policies in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
A monitoring policy is a collection of rules that are associated with each type ofmonitored asset. The policy defines the resources monitored and the rules for thatasset type. You can add and edit policies and select the default policy for a specificasset type.
A set of default monitoring policies is included with the software. The policies arebased on the type of resource being monitored, such as operating systems, servers,power distribution units, and SAN server arrays, and Oracle VM Server. Each policycontains a default set of rules. The rule set and parameters depend on the managedasset subtype. Alert monitors watch the state of managed resources and theirattributes and raise an alert when the state is outside the pre-defined thresholds.
You can use the default rules and policies or you can use the following methods tocreate a new policy:
• Copy an existing policy and then edit it, as needed, to modify the rules.
• Extract an existing policy from an asset and modify it.
• Create a new policy, then edit the policy to add rules.
When you discover and add an asset, the software applies the default monitoringpolicy for the asset's type immediately. Some monitoring policies install monitors oragents on managed resources, while other policies are designed to invoke arbitraryactions or scripts against the managed resource.
Go to the Plan Management section of the UI for a list of available monitoring policies.Click Monitoring Policies to display a list of all policies, the default status of the
Monitoring Policies
4-10 Configuration Reference
policy, and the intended asset or target type. The following types of monitoringpolicies are available:
• System-Defined Policies: Typically use asset specific rules. The monitored detailsare determined by what is implemented on the specific asset. An example of asystem-defined policy is the MSeriesChassis policy that monitors the Xsb Mode ofa SPARC M-series chassis. A system-defined policy is read-only, you cannotdisable or modify the rules defined in the policy. You can turn the rule off and on.
• User-Defined Policies: Typically use generic rules and contain monitoringthresholds. An Operating System policy is an example of a user-defined policy thatmonitors the following generic operating system parameters: CPU usage, disk I/Oqueue length and utilization percentage, file system usage, memory usage, networkbandwidth utilization, and swap usage, and system load.
The Navigation pane and center pane both display user-defined policies followed bysystem-defined policies. The icons and naming convention help to identify the type ofpolicy in the Navigation pane. The names of all system-defined policy use the prefixOC and have a green check mark in the lower. For example, in Figure 4-2 OC - Chassisis a system-defined policy and Copy of OC - Chassis and OS Profile - Dev are user-defined policy.
Figure 4-2 List of Monitoring Policies
User-defined policies have a silhouette of a person in the lower left corner. A greencheck mark in the icon indicates that this is a default monitoring policy. In Figure 4-2,OC - Chassis is a system defined policy that is the default policy. In Figure 4-3 Copy ofOC - Chassis is a user defined policy and is also the default policy.
Figure 4-3 Default and User-Defined Policies
To view a detailed list of user-defined and system-defined policies, click MonitoringPolicies in the Navigation pane, as shown in Figure 4-4.
Monitoring Policies
Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies 4-11
Figure 4-4 List of Policies, by Type
You can create your own user-defined policies by creating, copying, or extracting amonitoring policy. You perform the Copy Policy action from the policy view and theExtract Policy action from the asset view. By extracting a policy from the asset view,you ensure that the subtypes are valid for that asset type. You can change the targetsubtype to a more specific or a more generic eligible target type. To be eligible, thepolicy must be a member of a more general policy for the specified target.
For example, you can highlight an Oracle Solaris operating system and extract amonitoring policy for an operating system. You can specify one of the following as theOS subtype for the new policy:
• Oracle Solaris 10: Any supported Oracle Solaris 10 operating system.
• Oracle Solaris 10 Operating System: Any supported Oracle Solaris operatingsystem, beginning with Oracle Solaris10 8/07 (update 4). You might use thissubtype when you use the Oracle Solaris Zones policy.
• Oracle Solaris: Any supported Oracle Solaris operating system release.
• Operating System: Any supported Oracle Solaris, Linux, or Windows operatingsystem.
Details of a Monitoring PolicyLists the default monitoring polices in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Monitoring policy details vary, depending on the asset and associated resources beingmonitored. Figure 4-5 is an example of a system-defined monitoring policy for anoperating system, including the Policy Details. The Details section of the page containsinformation about the policy, including the name, description, and the type of policy.The policy details also describes the applicable types of assets or targets, whether thepolicy is a sub-type of another policy, when the policy was last modified, and whetherthe policy is the default policy for the target types.
Monitoring Policies
4-12 Configuration Reference
Figure 4-5 System-Defined Operating System Monitoring Policy
The following system-defined and generic monitoring policies are available:
• OC – Chassis: Monitors the chassis fan and power supply
• OC – CiscoSwitch: Monitors an Ethernet switch's power status, switch port status,and switch status.
• OC – Dynamic System Domain: Monitors the state and status of the dynamicsystem domains on eligible servers. Server reachability is monitored. Informationalalerts are available for the power state, either on or off, and the operating systemstate, either running or not. The Server Port Status generates a Warning alert whenthe server port is disabled or down.
• OC – File Server: Monitors the file server reachability, backing devices usagepercentage, storage allocation percentage, and storage usage percentage of genericfile servers.
• OC – Global Zone: Monitors the DHCP status, appliance health, CPU usage, diskI/O, file system usage, memory usage, network bandwidth, Swap usage, andsystem load of a global zone.
• OC – ISCSI Storage Array: Monitors the iSCSI storage array reachability, storageallocation percentage, storage usage percentage, volume group allocated spacepercentage, and volume group used space percentage.
• OC – Local Library: Monitors the storage library usage percentage for a localstorage library.
• OC – Logical Domain: Monitors Oracle VM Server for SPARC guest status,including the migration status, running or not, and whether the guest is poweredon.
• OC – M-Series: Monitors the Xsb Mode of a SPARC M-series chassis
• OC – NAS Library: Monitors the storage library status and storage library usagepercentage of network attached storage (NAS) libraries.
• OC – Non-global Zone: Monitors CPU usage, disk I/O queue length and utilizationpercentage, memory usage, network bandwidth utilization, and swap usage fornon-global zones.
Monitoring Policies
Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies 4-13
• OC – Operating System: Monitors the following generic operating systemparameters: CPU usage, disk I/O queue length and utilization percentage, filesystem usage, memory usage, network bandwidth utilization, and swap usage, andsystem load.
• OC – Oracle VM Server for SPARC: Monitors Oracle VM Server for SPARC status,including the DHCP client, appliance health, and free virtual CPU (VCPU) usage.
• OC – Oracle VM Server for x86: Monitors Oracle VM Server for x86 status,including the DHCP client, appliance health, and free virtual CPU (VCPU) usage.
• OC - Power Distribution Unit: Monitors Ampere levels of rack Power DistributionUnits.
• OC – Remote Oracle Engineered System: monitors remote Oracle engineeredsystems.
• OC – SAN Library: Monitors the status of the storage area network (SAN) libraries.
• OC – SAN Storage Array: Monitors the SAN storage array reachability and usage.The usage includes the storage allocation percentage, storage usage percentage,volume group allocated percentage, and volume group used space percentage.
• OC – Server: Monitors the following parameters on a generic server: Power status,server port status, CPU, NIC, fan, fan tray, memory, and power supply.
• OC – Server Pool: Monitors the total CPU allocation percentage, total cryptographicunits allocation percentage, and the total memory usage percentage.
• OC – Solaris Cluster: Monitors the Oracle Solaris cluster install mode, reachability,and monitor.
• OC – Solaris Cluster Node: Monitors the online status, scalert.node reachability,and scalert.node alert monitor.
• OC – Solaris Cluster Zone Cluster Group: Monitors the scalert.zone cluster alertmonitor.
• OC – Solaris Cluster Zone Cluster Node: Monitors the scalert.zone Cluster NodeAlert Monitor
• OC – Storage: Monitors the following parameters for a generic storage device:operating system status, power status, server port status, and storage alert.
• OC – Switch: Monitors an Ethernet switch's power status, switch port status, andswitch status.
• OC – Virtual Machine: Monitors the reachability of the virtual machine, if theoperating system is running, and the migration status of a virtual machine.
Copying or Creating a Monitoring PolicyProcedure for creating a new monitoring policy or copying an existing monitoringpolicy in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center as well as a list of other actions formonitoring policies.
Use the policy view to add a new monitoring policy or copy an existing monitoringpolicy.
Monitoring Policies
4-14 Configuration Reference
1. Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane, then click Monitoring Policies.
2. Click Copy Policy or Create Policy in the Action pane.
3. Enter a name and description for the new policy, then select the subtype and targettype.
4. Click Next to review, then click Finish to add the policy to the list of availablepolicies.
To see the new policy, expand Plan Management and click Monitoring Policies. Clickthe policy to display details.
• To add or remove rules or change monitoring parameters, double-click the policyin the center pane.
• To view all assets that are monitored with this policy, click View AssociatedAssets.
• To make this policy the default monitoring policy, click the Set as Default Policyicon.
About Extracting a Monitoring PolicyDescribes the effect of extracting a monitoring policy from the asset view.
Extracting a monitoring policy is similar to copying a policy. Copying a policy isperformed from the policy view, as shown in Figure 4-4; extracting a policy isperformed from the asset view, as shown in Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-6 Extract a Monitoring Policy Action
By extracting a policy from the asset view, you filter the possible subtypes to onlythose that are valid. You can change the target subtype to a more specific or a moregeneric eligible target type. To be eligible, the policy must be a member of a moregeneral policy for the specified target.
Extracting a Monitoring PolicyProcedure for creating a new monitoring policy from an existing policy.
1. Expand Assets in the Navigation pane, then click an asset type, such as operatingsystem.
2. Click the Monitoring tab, then click Extract Monitoring Policy in the Action pane.
3. Enter a name and description for the new policy.
Monitoring Policies
Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies 4-15
Figure 4-7 Extract Monitoring Policy
4. Select a subtype and a target. If a list of valid target types does not display, thetarget type cannot be changed. For an OS subtype, you can further specify thesubtype:
• Oracle Solaris 10: Any Oracle Solaris 10 operating system.
• Oracle Solaris 10 Operating System: Any Oracle Solaris 10 8/07 (update 4) orhigher operating system. You might use this subtype to use the policy for zones.
• Oracle Solaris: Any supported Oracle Solaris operating system release.
• Operating System: Any supported Oracle Solaris, Linux, or Windows operatingsystem.
5. Click Finish to add the policy to the list of available policies.
To see the new policy, expand Plan Management and click Monitoring Policies. Clickthe policy to display details.
• To add or remove rules or change monitoring parameters, double-click the policyin the center pane.
• To view all assets that are monitored with this policy, click View AssociatedAssets.
• To make this policy the default monitoring policy, click the Set as Default Policyicon.
About Changing the Monitoring Configuration of an Asset Bound to a Monitoring PolicyDescribes the roles of an asset’s monitoring configuration, monitoring policy, and anyunique monitoring rules.
Monitoring configurations contain monitoring policies and are associated with anasset type, such as an operating system. You can edit specific rules and parameters,but you cannot edit general monitoring policy properties, such as name anddescription after you create the policy. Editing a policy changes the monitoringconfiguration for all associated assets.
You can modify the monitoring configuration of an individual asset. When you createa monitoring configuration, the asset is no longer associated with the monitoringconfiguration and policies for that asset type. Instead, it has its own independentmonitoring configuration.
Monitoring Policies
4-16 Configuration Reference
When you modify a monitoring configuration for an asset, you create a policy and theasset is associated with the new created policy.
About Applying a Monitoring Policy to a GroupDescribes how groups of assets are monitored in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
When you apply a monitoring policy to a user-defined group, all applicable membersof the group are associated with the policy. The policy associated with an asset isdisplayed next to the asset in the wizard. When you apply a policy to all assets in agroup, the software disassociates the asset from the assigned policy and associates itwith the policy that is assigned to the group.
When you remove the asset from the user-defined group, the asset is associated withthe group's monitoring policy until you relocate it to another user-defined group thathas a different policy or you manually associate the asset with a different monitoringpolicy.
About Asset Groups with the Same Monitoring PolicyDescribes how to identify a user-defined group by its monitoring policy in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
When you create a user-defined group, you can specify a rule that filters the assetsbased on the name of the associated monitoring policy. Use this type of rule to identifyall the assets associated with that monitoring policy or to identify assets that are notassociated with that monitoring policy.
When viewing the monitoring configuration of an asset, you can navigate to thedefinition of the monitoring policy bound to the asset.
Modifying a Monitoring PolicyThis procedure will copy and make some changes to an existing Monitoring Policy.
1. From the Navigation tree, click Plan Management. Under Operational Plans,click on Monitoring Policies, then, click on OC - Global Zone.
2. In the Actions pane, click on Copy Policy and follow the wizard until the copiedpolicy appears under User Defined policies.
3. Select the File System Used Space Percentage Monitoring Rule.
4. Click on the Edit Monitoring Rule button, go through the wizard, and verify thatthe changes were made.
5. From the Assets tree, select the asset type you want to edit.
6. From the Monitoring tab, click on Apply a Monitoring Policy from the Actionsmenu.
7. Select the new custom copy that was created previously and complete the wizard.
Note:
Make sure everything is working as expected by checking the Incidents tab.Make sure the current status of the incident is Cleared.
Monitoring Policies
Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies 4-17
Modifying a Monitoring RuleProcedure for modifying the defined threshold value for a Monitoring Rule.
1. From the Assets pane in the Navigation pane, click an asset type, such as theOperating system.
2. Click the Monitoring tab.
3. Select the File System Used Space Percentage in the Threshold Monitoring Rules.
4. Click on the Edit Monitoring Rule button.
Note:
This procedure can apply to any similar Collection attributes. Eg. File SystemUsed Space Percentage, ZPool Usage Percentage, etc.
Setting a Threshold For a Specific Filesystem
1. From the Assets pane in the Navigation pane, click an asset type, such as theOperating system.
2. Click the Monitoring tab.
3. Select the File System Used Space Percentage in the Threshold Monitoring Rules.
4. Click on the Edit Monitoring Rule button.
5. In the Set Thresholds part of the wizard, click on the Add a Component button.
6. Type the name of the Filesystem you want to monitor and select the Warning andCritical Thresholds.
Selecting an “Any” threshold will apply to all Filesystems that do not have aspecific threshold.
Note:
This procedure can apply to any similar Collection attributes. Eg. File SystemUsed Space Percentage, ZPool Usage Percentage, etc.
Deleting a Monitoring PolicyProcedure for removing a monitoring policy in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
You can delete user-defined monitoring policies; you cannot delete system-definedpolicies.
1. In the Navigation pane, expand Plan Management, then scroll to the OperationalPlans section.
2. Click Monitoring Policies.
3. Click the policy you want to delete.
Monitoring Policies
4-18 Configuration Reference
4. Click the Delete Policy icon.
Figure 4-8 Delete Policy
Any asset or group associated with a deleted policy is detached from the policy.However, the asset retains the monitoring configuration defined by the policy.
Related Resources for Monitoring Rules and PoliciesList of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center documents with additional information.
For instructions in performing actions or to learn more about the role of this feature,go to the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Operation Reference:
• See the Hardware chapter for information about hardware monitoring.
• See the Operating System Management chapter for information about monitoringoperating systems.
• See the Incidents chapter for information about managing incidents that resultfrom monitoring.
• See About Maintenance Mode for information about temporarily disablingincidents.
See Expression Query Language for details about the language, grammar, lexicalelements, and method details.
The following documents at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/operate.htm relate to monitoring:
• Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Manage Incidents
• Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Tune Monitoring Rules and Policies
• Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Understand OS Performance and Capacity
• Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Use Service Requests
Related Resources for Monitoring Rules and Policies
Configure Monitoring Rules and Policies 4-19
Related Resources for Monitoring Rules and Policies
4-20 Configuration Reference
5Configure Software Libraries
Overview of software libraries in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Topics
• Introduction to Software Libraries and Repositories
• Roles for Software Libraries
• Actions Available for Software Libraries
• Location of Software Library Information in the User Interface
• Overview of the Knowledge Base and Parent Repository
• About Software Libraries
• About Libraries for Oracle Solaris 11
• Overview of the Software Library for Oracle Solaris 10, 9, 8 and Linux
• About Images
• Overview of Local Content for the Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software UpdateLibrary
• About Maintaining Images and Local Content
• Related Resources for Software Libraries
Introduction to Software Libraries and RepositoriesOverview of the role and purpose of software libraries in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses libraries to store and manage cached data,images, packages, and metadata. A library that stores images for provisioningoperations is a Software Library. At least one software library always exists on theEnterprise Controller.
A Software Library accepts the following types of images:
• OS images that install an operating system
• Branded images that install a specialized version of an operating system
• Firmware images and the supporting metadata to update existing firmware onservice processors, RAID controllers, and disks.
Configure Software Libraries 5-1
Roles for Software LibrariesList of required roles for library management tasks in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Table 6 lists the tasks and the role required to complete the task. Contact youradministrator if you do not have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. Seethe Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration for information about thedifferent roles and the permissions they grant.
Table 5-1 Software Libraries Tasks and Roles
Task Role
Set Enterprise Controller Storage Library Ops Center Admin
Create Library Storage Admin
Delete Library Storage Admin
Associate Library Storage Admin
Import image Storage Admin
Upload image Storage Admin
View details of an image Storage Admin
Moving an image Storage Admin
Edit Attributes Storage Admin
Associate Library to Server Pool Cloud Admin
Actions Available for Software LibrariesList of available operations in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Perform the following actions, depending on the requirements:
• Designate a default software library
• View details of an image
• Create Library
• Delete Library
• Associate Library
• Import Image
• Upload Image
• Download an OS image
• Moving an image
• Edit Attributes
• Create a library of OS images and manage content
Roles for Software Libraries
5-2 Configuration Reference
Overview of the Knowledge Base and Parent RepositoryDescription of current OS images for all versions of Oracle Solaris and Oracle Linux inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
By default, Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center operates in Connected mode. Inthis mode, the Enterprise Controller uses the Internet to download images andmetadata from the Oracle Knowledge Base and the Oracle Solaris 11 PackageRepository.
• The Oracle Knowledge Base (KB) contains metadata for Oracle Solaris 10, 9, and 8and Oracle Linux OS components.
• The Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repository includes packages of images in IPSformat for Oracle Solaris 11.
To use the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center software without Internet access,your site can maintain a local version of the Knowledge Base or Repository on yoursite's network. In this case, the Enterprise Controller connects to the local networklocation to get the latest information.
About the EC LibraryDescribes the default software library for images in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
The Enterprise Controller must have at least one Software Library to store the newversions of images that are downloaded from the Oracle Knowledge Base. OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center updates this library each week, by default.
In addition to the routine download operations, you can create jobs to update assets.When you submit an update job for specific target assets, the Agent Controllers on thetargets send a request to the KB through the Enterprise Controller to download thelatest information.
The product installation procedure creates the Initial EC Library. At any time, you canspecify a different software library to accept the automatic download operations fromthe Knowledge Base. A badge identifies the current active library. Figure 5-1 showsthe badge, a white down arrow on a green background.
Figure 5-1 Badge Identifying the Current Default Library
When the product software is updated, the schedule of download is interrupted. Usethe Set Enterprise Controller Storage Library to restore the schedule.
Changing EC Software LibrariesProcedure for changing the default software library that receives automaticdownloads in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
To specify a different software library as the default software library:
1. Create a software library.
2. Expand Administration in the Navigation pane. An alternative is to expandLibraries in the Navigation pane.
Overview of the Knowledge Base and Parent Repository
Configure Software Libraries 5-3
3. Click Set Enterprise Controller Storage Library in the Action pane. The windowlists all libraries with the current library highlighted.
4. Click the new software library.
5. Click Apply.
When the job is completed, the Library section of the Navigation pane shows thesoftware library you selected as the default library.
Publishers and Parent of the Oracle Solaris 11 RepositoryDescribes the role and purpose of the Oracle Solaris 11 Repository and how OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center uses it.
The Oracle Solaris 11 Package repository is similar to the Knowledge Base but is onlyfor Oracle Solaris 11 images and updates. The Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repositoryresides at the Oracle site: http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release.
The Support Repository Updates (SRUs) for Oracle Solaris 11 are released monthlyand contain bug fixes or minor feature enhancements. This repository, https://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/support, is available to users with an Oracle supportagreement.
These repositories have the role of Publisher and Parent for your local repository.
Other parent repositories, such as Oracle Solaris Cluster, are available. For a list ofavailable Oracle repositories and to download the key-certificate pair, see thehttps://pkg-register.oracle.com site.
Location of Software Library Information in the User InterfaceLists the navigation instructions to locate software libraries in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Table 5-2 shows where to find information.
Table 5-2 Location of Library Information in the BUI
Object Location
To see the software libraries Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane, then expand Software Libraries.
To see firmware and OSprovisioning profiles
Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane, then click Profiles andPolicies.
About Software LibrariesDescribes the libraries that handle all image files for operating systems and firmwarein Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
In addition to the EC Library, you can create more Software Libraries and organizetheir content, according to your site's purposes. You can use a file system on theEnterprise Controller's system or a shared file system on an NFS server that theEnterprise Controller mounts. The file system on the Enterprise Controller is called alocal software library. The file system on the NFS server is called a NAS softwarelibrary.
When Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center provisions target systems with anoperating system or firmware, it copies the image files from the designated Software
Location of Software Library Information in the User Interface
5-4 Configuration Reference
Library to the Proxy Controller that manages the target. The Proxy Controllers handlethe provisioning operations. When Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center provisionstarget systems with an update to an operating system, it uses the software librarynamed Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library or the Oracle Solaris 11Software Update Library.
Viewing the Contents of a Software LibraryProcedure for displaying information about a software library in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can display the contents of the software library, its associations, and details aboutthe disks in the software library. You can also see how Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter monitors the library and any problems.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click a software library.
The details of the selected library are displayed in the center pane in a set of tabs.
The Summary tab displays information about the entire software library:
• URL – File for a local library and NFS for a NFS share
• Size – Total storage capacity of the library
• Used Space – Percentage of used space as compared to available space
• State – Status of the library
• Access – Read-Write
The Library Contents table lists all the images in the library, organized by type, andincludes the size and the date the image was modified. The other tables on theSummary tab describe the types of images: Service Processor Firmware,Component Firmware, and BIOS Configuration Snapshots
3. To see the results of monitoring the software library, click the Incidents tab.
4. To see the attributes and values that are being monitored, click the Monitoring tab.
About Libraries for Oracle Solaris 11Description of how Oracle Solaris 11 images are stored and maintained in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
The Oracle Solaris 11 Image Packaging System (IPS) contains the packages that youneed to install, provision, and update your Oracle Solaris 11 operating system. EachIPS package has an associated manifest that describes how the package is assembled.The package manifest provides basic metadata about the package (such as name,description, version, and category), what files and directories are included, and thepackage dependencies. Packages might specify the services to restart to refresh someconfiguration on the system, specify the aliases to update for a given hardware driver,or the users and groups to create as part of the package installation process. A packagerepository holds all software packages. Systems must connect to the repository toinstall software updates.
Viewing the Contents of a Software Library
Configure Software Libraries 5-5
Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update LibraryDescribes the purpose of the Oracle Solaris 11 software library in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
The Enterprise Controller can maintain a repository for the Oracle Solaris 11 ImagePackaging System (IPS). The repository, called the Oracle Solaris 11 Software UpdateLibrary, provides the images for provisioning assets with the Oracle Solaris 11operating system.
Note:
The host system for the Enterprise Controller must use the Oracle Solaris 11operating system. Do not attempt to initialize an Oracle Solaris 11 SoftwareUpdate Library on a different Oracle Solaris operating system.
Options for Configuring the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update LibraryLists the options for initializing the software library for Oracle Solaris 11 in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
You have several options for when and how you configure the Oracle Solaris 11Software Update Library:
• If your site already maintains an Oracle Solaris 11 IPS Repository, direct OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center to use it, instead of initializing a new one. Specifythe location of the existing repository during the product installation or after theproduct is installed, as described in “About Alternate IPS Repositories.”
• At any time, you can create an Oracle Solaris 11 IPS repository at your site and useit as the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library. See the Copying and CreatingOracle Solaris 11 Package Repositories at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E23824_01/html/E21803/toc.html
• During installation of the product software, initialize the library. This librarydownloads content from the https://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/supportrepository and continues to sync with the repository routinely. However, theinitialization of the library can take many hours, depending on your site's access.
• After installation, initialize the library using the Initialize Oracle Solaris 11Software Update Library action. This action performs the same operation as theinstallation option with the same time requirements.
To connect to https://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/support, either at installationor at a later time, you must provide a key file and a certificate file to authenticate theconnection. If these files are missing or have expired, provide a new key andcertificate, using the procedure in the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops CenterAdministration Guide.
Library StatesLists the states that are reported about software update libraries in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
The Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library has the following states:
About Libraries for Oracle Solaris 11
5-6 Configuration Reference
• Unconfigured – Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library was not created atinstallation. The Initialize Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library action isavailable in the Actions pane.
• Configuring – The Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library is in the process ofbeing configured. The process of initializing the library takes many hours. Whencomplete, the new library appears in the Libraries section.
• Syncing – The Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library is in the process ofupdating its contents with the parent IPS repository or is in the process of beingreconfigured. The Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library is locked andunavailable for use when in this state.
• OK – The Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library is ready to use.
Summary of Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update LibraryDescription of the attributes and status of the Oracle Solaris 11 Software UpdateLibrary in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
When the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library is configured, its Summary tab,shown in Figure 5-2, provides an overview of the health, status, and last update. TheURL listed on the Summary is the location of the Oracle Solaris 11 Software UpdateLibrary. The size is the amount of space allocated to the file system, and the usedspace shows the amount of space used by the packages that are located in the library.
The Publishers table shows each Parent Repository and its credentials. The URL is thelocation of the Parent Repository for Oracle Solaris 11 packages and content located inthe Image Packaging System (IPS). Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses theseURLs to synchronize the information in the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Librarywith the Image Packaging System. The Parents list is created when you use theConfigure Parent Repositories Wizard. If your site has its own local repository forOracle Solaris 11 packages, update Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center's libraryfrom that location.
Figure 5-2 Summary Tab of the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library
Content of the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update LibraryDescribes information listed in the Contents tab for the Oracle Solaris 11 library inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
About Libraries for Oracle Solaris 11
Configure Software Libraries 5-7
The Content tab, shown in Figure 5-3, displays a list of the packages in the OracleSolaris 11 Software Update Library with a brief description of each package. You canfilter the list of packages by selecting a category or version. The Support RepositoryUpdate check box is a quick way to filter the list of packages in the Oracle Solaris 11SRU releases. You can also search for a specific package.
Figure 5-3 Content Tab of the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library
Configuring Parent Repositories to SynchronizeProcedure for setting up the repository for Oracle Solaris 11 to synchronize with thelatest content in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Use the Configure Parent Repositories action to manage publishers for the parentrepository. After the library has been configured and the content has beendownloaded the first time, create a recurring schedule to synchronize the OracleSolaris 11 Software Update Library with its parent repository.
In the Configure Parent Repositories Wizard, create a list of parent repositories withtheir credentials that you use to update the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library.During the synchronization operation, all the content in the parent repository iscompared to the existing content in the Oracle Solaris 11 Update Software Library andnew or updated content is downloaded.
About Alternate IPS RepositoriesDescription of an alternate repository to be used as Ops Center’s Oracle Solaris 11repository.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center synchronizes with a parent repository tomaintain the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library, that is, the Oracle Solaris 11Software Update Library is a child of the parent repository. If your site already has anOracle Solaris 11 IPS repository for other purposes, you have the option of declaringthat repository as the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library. Operations that useIPS content retrieve the content from your IPS repository. Because it is not a parent-child relationship, no synchronization is performed.
When you install Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center or when you initialize theOracle Solaris 11 Update Software Library, identify your IPS repository as the OracleSolaris 11 Update Software Library. All operations that use this software library willretrieve content from the IPS repository.
Note:
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center does not maintain the content of theIPS repository. You must maintain this repository manually.
About Libraries for Oracle Solaris 11
5-8 Configuration Reference
Using an Alternate IPS Repository as the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update LibraryProcedure for directing Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center to use a differentOracle Solaris 11 repository.
1. Locate your site's Oracle Solaris 11 IPS repository or create one.
2. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
3. Click Software Libraries.
4. Click Initialize Solaris 11 Software Update Library in the Action pane.
5. In the Specify Library Location field, enter the location of your IPS repository.
6. In the URL field for the parent repository, do not enter any text. Leave this fieldblank.
7. Click OK.
Adding ContentProcedure for adding images to the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library fromanother parent repository in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
In addition to routine updates, you can add ISO images to the Oracle Solaris 11Software Update Library manually. Use the Add Content action to specify a parentrepository and add ISO image files to the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Librarymanually. The parent repository URL and credentials are not saved when you use thisaction. To save a list of repositories, use the Configure Parent Repository action.
1. Locate the ISO image.
2. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
3. Click Software Libraries.
4. Click Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library.
5. Click Add Content in the Action pane.
About Libraries for Oracle Solaris 11
Configure Software Libraries 5-9
Figure 5-4 Add Content
6. In the Repository to add content from field, enter the location of the ISO imageusing the syntax: file:///image_name.iso. You must only use the file://protocol to add ISO images.
Note:
To add the IPS package server contents directly, you can use the http:// orhttps:// URI to IPS server instead of file-based ISO image in the Repositoryto add content from field.
If credentials are required, specify the system's credentials,SystemDefinedSupportCredential, or create new key and certificate identifiers toaccess the repository by selecting Define New, shown in Figure 5-4, to launch theCreate Credential Wizard.
About Using a Custom AI Manifest to Provision an OSDescribes an alternative to using the standard AI manifest for provisioning OracleSolaris 11 in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The Oracle Solaris 11 Automated Installer (AI) uses an XML file to specify how theoperating system is installed. This file is the AI manifest. When you apply aprovisioning plan, Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center creates the AI manifest fromthe specifications in the OS provisioning profile. Starting with Version 12.3.0.0.0, youcan create a custom AI manifest to, for example, specify the disk layout or installsoftware.
When you create the OS provisioning profile, you indicate that this profile uses acustom AI manifest and specify the location of the XML file. When you apply theprovisioning plan, Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses your custom AImanifest if it meets the following requirements:
About Libraries for Oracle Solaris 11
5-10 Configuration Reference
• You create the manifest according to the Oracle Solaris 11 procedure in“Customizing an XML AI Manifest File” at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E36784_01/html/E36800/changeai.html.
• You validate the manifest using the Oracle Solaris 11 command, installadmcreate-manifest(1M).
• You place the manifest in a location and path accessible to the browser on theEnterprise Controller's system.
• You create an OS provisioning profile and enable the Use custom manifest optionin Step 2 of the Create Profile wizard for OS provisioning, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Option for a Custom Manifest
When you select this option, a step is added to the wizard so that you can specifythe location of custom manifest, as shown in Figure 5-6.
Figure 5-6 Location of a Custom Manifest
Although not required, it is a good practice to identify profiles and plans that usecustom manifests by using a naming convention.
About Libraries for Oracle Solaris 11
Configure Software Libraries 5-11
Deleting Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update LibraryProcedure for removing the Oracle Solaris 11 repository in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
When you delete the library, its packages and content remain.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click your site's Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library.
3. Click Delete Solaris 11 Software Update Library in the Action pane.
Figure 5-7 Delete Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library
4. To confirm, click the Delete the library option.
5. Click Finish.
About Creating a Software LibraryDescribes a library for OS images and firmware images in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
You can create a software library that uses space on a file system on the EnterpriseController's system, which is a Local Software Library. You can also create a softwarelibrary that uses space on a shared file system on an NFS server. This type of library isa NAS Software Library.
Note:
When you use both local and NAS software libraries, do not use the samename for the library.
Creating a Local Software LibraryProcedure for creating a library for OS images and firmware images on the EnterpriseController in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click New Local Software Library in the Action pane.
3. Enter a unique name and description.
4. In the URL field, enter the location of the file system.
About Creating a Software Library
5-12 Configuration Reference
5. Click Create.
Creating a NAS Software LibraryProcedure for creating a library on a NAS device in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click New NAS Software Library in the Action pane.
3. Enter a unique name and a description.
4. Select one or more server pools to use this storage library.
5. Choose the type of service:
• To use a storage device, select the storage device and specify the exported shareto use.
• To use an NFS server, enter the host name, port, and path.
6. Click Create.
Overview of the Software Library for Oracle Solaris 10, 9, 8 and LinuxDescribes the repository for Oracle Solaris and Linux in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
Update Profiles and any other profiles that provision an OS or firmware image rely onthe contents of a software library. For Oracle Solaris 10, 9, and 8 and for Oracle Linux,the Linux, Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library is a dedicated software library thatcontains the packages, updates, and site-specific scripts and configuration files forthese operating systems.
You create the Linux, Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library when you install OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center, or after installation, by using the Create UpdateLibrary action. If the Create Update Library action is not available, the library hasbeen created.
Topics
• See Organization of the Linux, Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library for adescription of the libraries organization.
• See About Images for information about managing the content in the library.
• See Overview of Local Content for the Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 SoftwareUpdate Library for information about managing the custom content of the site-specific categories.
Organization of the Linux, Solaris 8-10 Software Update LibraryLists the categories of the software library that stores images of Oracle Solaris 10 andprevious versions and Oracle Linux in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
For each OS, this software library organizes its contents in the following categories.You can change the display of the contents of the library according to the OSdistribution, the category, the type of view, and the version.
Overview of the Software Library for Oracle Solaris 10, 9, 8 and Linux
Configure Software Libraries 5-13
• Clusters (groups of Oracle Solaris packages)
• Configuration files
• Hardware
• Local
• Local Packages
• Local RPMs
• Notifications
• Packages
• Patches
• Post-actions
• Pre-actions
• Probes
• Recommended Software Configurations
• Oracle Solaris Baselines
About ImagesDescribes the types of images that Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center stores.
In most cases, the images you need are downloaded from the Oracle Knowledge Baseor the Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repository. You can also obtain images from alocation external to Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center and then import or uploadthem.
Note:
Another type of image is a virtualization image. This type of image is stored ina Storage Library and contains the configuration information for a guest, itsoperating system, and the applications that the guest uses.
About OS ImagesDescribes the types and formats of images that deploy operating systems in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
OS images provision or update the operating system on both hardware servers andvirtualization hosts. A subset of OS images are branded images, which install anoperating system that is optimized for a specific purpose and can also includeapplications. An OS image contains an entire operating system in either ISO format orFLAR format.
• ISO image – The image, also called a disk image, contains uncompresseddirectories and files of any type: application or data or both. This type of image canreside on removable media.
About Images
5-14 Configuration Reference
• FLAR image – The image is a flash archive of an Oracle Solaris 10, 9, or 8 operatingsystem and other software. You can use a FLAR to install or restore a system to aspecific configuration. Differential FLAR images are not supported. FLAR filesmust have the .flar file name extension.
In addition to being grouped as packages and updates, Oracle Solaris OS images arealso grouped into baselines.
Location of OS ImagesLists the navigation instructions to locate information about OS images in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
Table 5-3 shows the location of OS images.
Table 5-3 Location of Images for Each Operating System
Operating System Location of Images
Oracle Solaris 11 Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library
Oracle Solaris 10, 9, 8 Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library
Oracle Linux Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library
Requirements for OS ImagesRequirements for using an OS image in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
• An OS image must be in a single image file. For example, on an Oracle Solarissystem, the following command collects all OS component files on the auto-mounted file system into an ISO file.
# mkisofs -o <name_of_OS.iso> -J -R /cdrom/<name_of_OS>
• The Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center software uploads or imports one ISOfile per operation. If you are loading an ISO file from physical media and the filespans more than one physical media, you must first combine the content ontomedia that can store the complete file.
• An ISO file cannot be made from Oracle Solaris installation media.
About Unified ArchivesIn Oracle Solaris 11.2, the Unified Archive format (UAR) provides the ability to clone,migrate, or recover a system.
Oracle Solaris 11.2 introduces a native archive file type called Unified Archives. AUnified Archive is a compressed file that can contains one or more instances of theoperating system, such as a global zone and its non-global zones. These individualsystems can be archived independently or bundled together. In Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center, these OS instances are called deployable systems.
You create a UAR file from a deployed OS instance, including any zones or controldomains. You can then deploy the Unified Archive to recover a failed system,duplicate the system on multiple machines, or migrate a system to a new server or to avirtual system. Use Oracle Solaris 11.2 SRU9 and above or Oracle Solaris 11.3.
A UAR for recovery of a system is different than a UAR for deploying a system:
About Images
Configure Software Libraries 5-15
• A clone archive is based upon the system's active boot environment (BE) at the timethe archive is created so only one BE is included. The clone archive type is intendedfor rapid creation and deployment of custom images. A clone archive does notinclude any of the system configuration information from the OS instance or anysensitive data such as SSH keys or passwords. A system deployed from a clonearchive has all the same file systems and applications as the cloned system, but, forexample, will not have the same host name.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center 12.3.1.0.0 can create clone UAR images fromoperating systems with multiple zpools on different disks but they can not be usedto provision control domains, logical domains, or Oracle Solaris Zones. Theseimages can be used to provision hosts and guests manually.
• A recovery archive is a full-system archive containing all boot environments fromall included instances. Although a recovery archive of a global zone can containnon-global zones that are installed within it, the archive itself is treated as a singlesystem. A recovery archive can therefore preserve zone clone relationships, unlikeclone archives. The system configuration information and sensitive data ispreserved in recovery archives.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center 12.3.1.0.0 can create recovery UAR imagesbut they can not be used to provision control domains, logical domains, or OracleSolaris Zones. These images can be used to recover hosts and guests manually.
Like the operating systems they contain, UAR images depend on the type ofarchitecture, either x86 or SPARC.
You can use an Oracle Solaris 11.2 or 11.3 image available from Oracle’s site at the linkprovided in Related Resources for Software Libraries. You then import the image intothe Oracle Solaris 11 Software Library and then use its deployment profile and plan toprovision the operating system. Oracle provides UARs of the following types:
• Oracle Solaris 11.x Unified Archive is based on the minimal-server package cluster.Use this type to provision Oracle Solaris 11.x zones and Oracle VM Server forSPARC logical domains.
• Oracle Solaris 11.x OpenStack Unified Archive is also based on the minimal-serverpackage cluster, but includes Openstack services. Use this type to provision OracleVM Server for SPARC control domains.
For custom images, create a UAR using one of your existing Oracle Solaris 11.xdeployable systems. As part of the creation process, the UAR is imported into yourOracle Solaris 11 Software Library, as described in Creating a UAR Image.
Viewing Details of a UAR ImageProcedure for displaying extensive information about a United Archive image, usingOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Use this procedure to display information about an existing UAR.
1. In the Navigation pane, in the Library section, select a software library.
2. In the Summary tab in the center pane, select an image that an Image Type of UAR.
3. Click the View Image Details icon.
The View Image Details window displays the name and description or the archive,lists any tags and their values, and lists an extensive list of properties and their
About Images
5-16 Configuration Reference
values. Each deployable system has its own section of properties. You can use aSearch box to locate a specific tag, property, or value.
4. When you are finished, click OK.
Creating a UAR ImageProcedure for creating a United Archive from an existing Oracle Solaris 11 operatingsystem in the software library, using Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Use this procedure to create a UAR image. The file system where the UAR is createdmust already exist and have sufficient space to hold the image. After the UAR iscreated, it is imported into the software library that you specify, if the UAR image canbe supported by the version of the operating system in the library.
About Images
Configure Software Libraries 5-17
1. In the Navigation pane, in the Assets section, select an agent-managed deployablesystem such as a global zone or control domain.
2. Click Create UAR in the Actions pane.
The Create UAR wizard opens.
3. Enter the name for the UAR, specifying a maximum of 99 alphanumeric characters,the hyphen character, or the underscore character. This name must be unique andmust not be changed.
4. Enter a description that identifies the UAR as either clone or recovery. The defaultaction creates a UAR that can be used for cloning the operating system: one bootenvironment and no credentials, host name, or system configuration information.
5. In the Staging area field, specify the directory in the target agent’s filesystemwhere the UAR will be created .
6. (Optional) You can add tags specific to your site.
7. To create a recovery UAR, click the Recovery archive option. The UAR is anidentical copy of the operating system, including all boot environments and allsensitive data.
8. By default, media is created for each global zone to improve portability. Select theExclude media option to skip the creation of bootable media in the UnifiedArchive. For a recovery UAR, clear the Exclude media option so that bootablemedia is created.
9. Select the root only option to exclude all non-root pool data and to restrict the UARto one zone. This is useful when the list of non-root pools is not known.
10. By default, the size of the UAR is not determined before it is created. Clear the SkipCapacity Check option to be warned if the directory you specified does not havesufficient space for the UAR. Click Next.
About Images
5-18 Configuration Reference
11. The new UAR can contain all or some of the zones defined in the operating system.These zones are the deployable systems. If you are creating a clone UAR, select thezones to include in the UAR. This step lists all global zones, non-global zones, andkernel zones. Use Ctrl + Click to select multiple zones. Click Next.
12. If you are creating a clone UAR, you can exclude ZFS filesystems from the UAR. Ifyou specify a dataset that has dependent datasets, these datasets are also excluded.Click Next.
13. For either clone or recovery UARs, specify the software library where the new UARis stored. If you the software library is backed by a NAS storage device, make surethat the storage device is mounted and available to the Enterprise Controller’ssystem and that the shared filesystem allows NFS user mapping for root. ClickNext.
14. Review the summary and click Finish.
The UAR is created and imported into the software library that you selected.
About Images for Firmware UpdatesDescribes the characteristics of a firmware image.
Firmware images provision hardware assets. A firmware image is a copy of thevendor's firmware file and its metadata, such as the platform it is used on and any
About Images
Configure Software Libraries 5-19
software dependencies. You obtain the images by downloading them from vendorwebsites or uploading them from their product media. Firmware images are stored inSoftware Libraries. The maximum size of a firmware image is 20 MB.
Supported Firmware ImagesList of types of firmware in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The following firmware types are supported:
• Service Processor firmware
• Chassis firmware
• Power distribution unit firmware
• Storage Component firmware updates firmware on RAID Controllers, Expandersand Disks.
About Firmware MetadataDescribes the information about firmware that accompanies a firmware image, usingan example of firmware metadata.
When you import a firmware image, you might be required to provide the metadata tocomplete the image file, if it is not included. You must provide the firmware type, thesystems that the firmware supports, the version of the firmware, and any otherfirmware images that this firmware image depends on. You can usually find theinformation in the image's README file.
The following example is the README file for ALOM-CMT firmware, where a singlebinary is deployed to the Service Processor. The example contains annotations toidentify the metadata.
Example 5-1 Example of Firmware Metadata
• To determine the type and version of the firmware update:
Latest Sun System Firmware(6.1.2): ---------------------------------- System Firmware 6.1.2 Sun Fire[TM] T2000 2006/01/20 18:19 ALOM-CMT v1.1.2 Jan 20 2006 18:06:10 VBSC 1.1.1 Jan 20 2006 17:56:19 Reset V1.0.0 Hypervisor 1.1.0 2005/12/15 11:10 OBP 4.20.0 2005/12/15 16:48 Sun Fire[TM] T2000 POST 4.20.0 2005/12/15 17:19
• To determine the models supported:
This README is intended for users who wish to upgrade the firmware in their Sun Fire T2000.
• To determine if the system must be powered off before updating the firmware:
a)To update the Sun System Firmware, the system must be powered off (i.e. in standby mode).
From this README file, identify the following metadata:
• Available platforms – Sun Fire T2000
• Type – VBSC
About Images
5-20 Configuration Reference
• Version – 1.1.1
• Require power off – Yes
For this example, the VBSC firmware subcomponent/type with version 1.1.1 wasused. You can use any of the other types such as ALOM-CMT:1.1.2 or OBP:4.20.0.However, you must ensure that the version specified is always the firmwaresubcomponent/type.
About Importing ImagesTo provision firmware or an OS, you use a deployment plan to retrieve an image fromone of the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center's software libraries and install theimage on the targeted assets. To add images to a software library, you import theimage.
Starting in Release 12.2.2.0.0, you must create a profile for each image and then includethe profile in a deployment plan. If you prefer to create profiles by default wheneveryou import the image, you must change Enterprise Controller's configuration byediting the property file.
For Unified Archive (UAR) images, you must verify that the existing Oracle Solaris 11Software Library can support the version of the operating system in the UAR bycomparing the version in the UAR with the version of several packages in the library.For example, if the UAR is created from a system with Oracle Solaris 11.2 SRU 10, therepository must contain the boot environment for Oracle Solaris 11.2 SRU 10.
• On the Oracle Solaris 11.2 system where the UAR image is located, issue thefollowing command to see the version included in the UAR:
archiveadm info -p -v path/uar_name
• In Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center, display the Oracle Solaris 11 SoftwareLibrary and check the versions of the following packages:
– entire
– osnet-incorporation
– userland-incorporation
– install-image/solaris-auto-install
If the versions do not match, any attempt to import the UAR fails in the Extract ImageProperties task.
Importing an ImageProcedure for including an image in the software library in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click Software Libraries or Storage Libraries to expand.
3. Click the library.
4. Click Import Image in the Actions pane.
The Import Image window is displayed.
About Images
Configure Software Libraries 5-21
Figure 5-8 Import Image
5. Identify the type of format for the image. Depending on the type of image, otheroptions are enabled.
6. Identify the current location of the image file. For an ISO image, select the ParentISO from the list.
If the image file is located in an accessible location, enter the name of the directoryor use the Browse button to navigate to the location.
The Image to be Imported field is a list of available images in the location youspecified. If the location contains many images, you can use the Search field to filterthe list.
7. Select the image you want to import.
8. Enter a name for the image and a description. Image names must be unique, canconsist of up to 100 characters, and can include numbers, letters, and some specialsymbols. The following special symbols are prohibited: comma, asterisk, singlequote, double quote, parenthesis, question mark, equal sign, and newline.
9. Click Import Image to copy the image to the library with the name you provided.
About Images
5-22 Configuration Reference
Uploading Firmware ImagesProcedure for adding firmware images to the software library in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
The Upload Firmware action can be directed to retrieve firmware images from eitherthe Enterprise Controller's file system or a local file system. Use the procedures in KeepYour Firmware Up-to-Date to upload firmware.
About Firmware for Power Distribution UnitsDescribes firmware images for a PDU in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The firmware for a PDU consists of two files, one for the firmware and one for themanagement software of the PDU. Each firmware image must be imported oruploaded and then a profile created that includes both images. The firmware imagesmust have metadata, which is not always included in the image. In that case, youspecify the metadata during the import or upload operation.
Uploading Firmware With MetadataProcedure for adding firmware images to the software library in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Use the procedures in Keep Your Firmware Up-to-Date to upload firmware. At the stepfor Select Firmware Components, select both firmware components:
• MKAPP_Vfirmware_version.DL
• HTML_Vfirmware_version.DL
Uploading Firmware Without MetadataProcedure for adding firmware to a software library in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
Use the procedures in Keep Your Firmware Up-to-Date to upload firmware. At the stepfor Select Firmware Components, select the firmware component,MKAPP_Vfirmware_version.DL, and click Upload. To define the metadata for thefirmware:
1. For the target type click PDU.
2. For the platform, click Sun Rack II PDU.
3. Enter the version of the firmware.
4. Choose Depends On None and accept the remaining default options.
After the job is completed, repeat the procedure with the other firmware image,HTML_Vfirmware_version.DL, with one difference: At Step 4, specify that thisfirmware image depends on the MKAPP_Vfirmware_version.DL image.
Creating a Firmware Profile for PDU Firmware UpdatesProcedure for creating a firmware profile for a PDU in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
1. Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane.
About Images
Configure Software Libraries 5-23
2. Click Create Firmware Profile in the Actions pane.
3. Enter a name and description for the profile.
4. For subtype, click Power Distribution Units.
5. For target type, click Power Distribution Units. Click Next.
6. For Firmware Configuration, accept the default options and values. Click Next.
7. Select both images: MKAPP_V<firmware_version>.DL andHTML_V<firmware_version>.DL. Click Next.
8. Review the summary of the new profile and click Finish to submit the job.
Adding Local Content for the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update LibraryProcedure for adding local content to the Oracle Solaris 11 repository in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
To add custom content for Oracle Solaris 11, use pkg commands to add the content toa local IPS repository and then import the repository into Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
To use custom scripts, use an operational profile with either the Execute Operationaction or an operational plan.
Overview of Local Content for the Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 SoftwareUpdate Library
Overview of managing your site’s custom content in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Note:
This section does not apply to Oracle Solaris 11.
The Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library can store site-specificconfiguration files and scripts used in deployment plans. This local content can alsoinclude data files, executable files, or binary files. For example, you might develop ascript to test servers before running a provisioning job.
Topics
• About Local Categories
• Creating a Local Category
• About Local Actions
• Uploading a Local Software Package
• Uploading a Local Configuration File
• About Uploading Software in Bulk
• Using Local Content
Adding Local Content for the Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library
5-24 Configuration Reference
• Editing Local Content
• Deleting Local Content
About Local CategoriesDescribes the organization of local content in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The Local categories of the Updates Library have no connection to the KnowledgeBase. The content in these categories is uploaded from your site to the software library.You maintain the files throughout their life cycle.
Local content is organized into the following default categories: local RPMs or PKGs,configuration files, macros, pre-actions, post-actions, and probes. You can create morecategories.
Creating a Local CategoryProcedure for organizing local content by creating a category in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can create subcategories to further organize your local content. The type of localcontent allowed in a subcategory depends on its parent category.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library.
3. Click Add Local Category in the Actions pane.
4. Enter a name for the new subcategory.
5. Enter a brief description for the new subcategory such as its purpose.
6. Click Distribution to assign to the subcategory.
7. Click Parent Category to select one of the system-defined categories for thesubcategory.
8. Click Apply. The new subcategory is created under the selected default category.
About Local ActionsDescribes how to use a script or executable file to make changes to an asset in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
An action is a script, binary file, or executable file that makes changes to the managedhost. To use the uploaded script or file, create an Update profile and include theprofile in the deployment plan that installs or upgrades the OS. The following actionsare available:
• Pre-Actions – Script that runs on a managed host before the provisioning stepstarts. When you create the deployment plan, you select the Execute Pre-Install stepand then select the profile that includes the script.
• Post-Actions – Script that runs on a managed host after a job is completed. Whenyou create the deployment plan, you select the Execute Post-Install step and thenselect the profile that includes the script.
• Probes – Script that runs on a managed host to verify that a job can be performed.
Overview of Local Content for the Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library
Configure Software Libraries 5-25
• Macros – Script that modifies a generic configuration file to make it specific for amanaged host. Use macros to apply a single configuration file across multiple hostsby customizing the configuration file for each host's environment. The scriptoutputs a single line that replaces a macro sign in a configuration file.
Uploading a Local ActionProcedure for adding a script or executable file to the software library in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library.
3. Click Upload Local Action in the Actions pane.
The Upload Local Action window is displayed in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9 Local Upload Action
4. Enter a name for the action.
5. Enter text to describe the purpose of the script or executable file.
6. Select the type of action such as Pre-Action, Post-action, Macros, or Probes.
7. Click the name of the distribution that is appropriate for the script or executablefile.
8. The Parent Category field shows the category you specified as the type of Action. Ifyour site uses subcategories, click the Browse button to navigate to the specificsubcategory.
9. Click Browse to locate and select the script or executable file.
10. Click Upload. The file is uploaded to the Linux, Solaris 8-10 Software UpdateLibrary in the category you specified.
Overview of Local Content for the Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library
5-26 Configuration Reference
You can now create a profile for the script and then use the profile in a deploymentplan.
About Local Software PackagesDescribes custom packages in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
To use the uploaded package or RPM, create an provisioning or update profile andinclude the profile in a deployment plan.
You can upload software in the following formats:
• pkg
• rpm
• tar
• zip
• gzip
• compress
If the file is in compressed format, the file is uncompressed after it is uploaded.
Uploading a Local Software PackageProcedure for adding a package to the software library in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click the operating system's Software Update Library.
3. Click Upload Local Software Packages in the Actions pane.
4. Select Yes if the package is a security fix for a previous version of the software.Otherwise, select No.
5. Click the name of the distribution to which you want to add this package.
6. In the Parent Category section, click Local PKGs or click Browse to locate asubcategory.
7. In the Files section, click Add to see the list of files. Select at least one softwarepackage.
8. Click Upload. The file is uploaded to the Linux, Solaris 8-10 Software UpdateLibrary in the category you specified.
You can now include the package or RPM in an provisioning profile.
About Local Configuration FilesDescribes custom configuration for assets in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
A configuration file is a text file, binary file, or non-RPM application that contains thesettings and values for an asset type. To use the uploaded file, create an Update profileand include the profile in the deployment plan that installs or upgrades the OS.
Overview of Local Content for the Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library
Configure Software Libraries 5-27
Uploading a Local Configuration FileProcedure for adding a configuration file to the software library in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library.
3. Click Upload Local Configuration File in the Actions pane.
The Upload Local Configuration File window is displayed in Figure 5-10.
Figure 5-10 Upload Local Configuration File
4. In Target path on server, type the full path to the configuration file.
5. In Version, type a character string to identify this version of the file. The string isappended to the file name when it is displayed in a Components list.
6. Enter a brief description of the file.
7. Select the Distribution to which this file is applied. You can choose multipledistributions.
8. In Parent Category, accept the Configuration Files category or click Browse tolocate a subcategory.
9. Click Browse to locate and select the configuration file.
10. Click Upload. The file is uploaded to the Linux, Solaris 8-10 Software UpdateLibrary in the category you specified.
About Uploading Software in BulkDescribes requirements for uploading more than one image file in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can upload multiple files or an entire directory in one operation. For example, youcan upload the contents of a DVD. All components in the directory and subdirectoriesare uploaded.
Overview of Local Content for the Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library
5-28 Configuration Reference
The files must be in the following formats:
• pkg
• rpm (for Linux RPMs)
• tar
• zip
• gzip
• compress
If files are compressed, the software extracts the files after it uploads them.
Before You Begin to Upload in BulkRequirements for uploading local content to libraries in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
• Verify that the files have the supported file types.
• Verify that the file size does not exceed 2 GB. If the file is larger than 2 GB, copy thefile manually to a file system on the Enterprise Controller's system.
• If you are uploading from removable media, insert the media.
Uploading Local Software in BulkProcedure for adding multiple packages and images to the software library in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library.
3. Click Bulk Upload Packages and Patches in the Actions pane.
The Upload Packages, Patches, and RPMS window is displayed in Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11 Upload Local Software
4. Click Distribution to select the distribution that applies to these files.
Overview of Local Content for the Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library
Configure Software Libraries 5-29
5. Select either Upload from OS Image or Upload from Directory.
6. If you specify a directory, prepare this directory to contain only files you want toupload. All files in the directory and its subdirectories are uploaded. Then, specifythe path to the directory or click Browse to locate and select it.
If you specify an OS image, you must mount the OS image and select the files.
a. Click one of the OS images and click Mount.
b. Click Browse to locate and select the files. Navigate to the directory above thepackages.
7. Click Submit. The upload job is created.
To view the status of the upload job, select Bulk Upload Results.
To view the certified packages in the software update library, click the Content tab inthe center pane and select Patches in the Category list. To view non-certified packages,click Local PKGs or Local RPMs in the Category list.
Viewing Results of a Bulk Upload OperationProcedure for displaying uploads to a software library in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
You can view a detailed history of all the local components that were uploaded inbulk.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library.
3. Click Bulk Upload Results in the Actions pane. The uploaded components listdisplays the name, description, status, and date for each component.
4. Select a component and click View Results. The details of the uploadedcomponents are displayed.
Using Local ContentProcedure for including local content a deployment plan in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
The local content that you uploaded to the software library is used in profiles anddeployment plans to guide and complete provisioning operations. For example, a localconfiguration file can be modified by the output of a macro so that each target gets theappropriate configuration file. Use the following workflow to use local content.
1. Create the macro named mymacro and upload it to the software library.
# cat /var/tmp/runme.sh#!/bin/bashhostname
2. Create the local configuration file and upload it.
### This configuration file changes### the following line to the output of "mymacro"### Include this configuration file in the profile.<^AM^>mymacro<^AM^>
Overview of Local Content for the Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library
5-30 Configuration Reference
3. Create an Update profile and deployment plan to include the local configurationfile.
4. Deploy the plan. The resulting configuration file on a particular server, for examplemymachine1, has the following content:
### This configuration file changes### the following line to the output of "mymacro"### Include this configuration file in the profile.mymachine1
Editing Local ContentProcedure for editing a local component file in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can edit files in the Local Categories. For example, if you uploaded a file thatcontained IP addresses and determined that there was an incorrect IP address in thefile, you can edit the file to correct the IP address. You can also use this procedure toreplace the file with a corrected file.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library.
3. Click Edit Local Component File in the Actions pane.
4. To specify the file, type its name or click the Browse button to navigate to the file. Ifthe file is not found, click Distribution to select the correct distribution. Only filesin the selected distribution are displayed.
5. Select either Edit existing file or Replace existing file.
• If you choose to edit the file, make changes to the file and click Save.
• If you choose to replace the file, browse for the replacement file and clickUpload.
Deleting Local ContentProcedure for removing custom content in the software library in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can remove your site's local content or added categories. You cannot remove thedefault categories.
Note:
Deleting content does not require confirmation and cannot be undone. Verifyyou are deleting the correct local component.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library.
3. Click Delete Local Component in the Actions pane.
4. Expand the category to display the component you want to delete. To change thedistribution, click Distribution.
Overview of Local Content for the Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library
Configure Software Libraries 5-31
5. Select the file or a subcategory to delete.
6. Click Delete.
7. If you see a message that the deletion cannot be done because the component is inuse, the component has been installed on at least one agent-managed asset. If it isnot practical to uninstall the component, you can force the deletion. Click the ForceDeletion option and then click Delete.
To remove a subcategory and its components, do not attempt to remove eachcomponent and then remove the subcategory. When there are no components in asubcategory, the subcategory creates a placeholder component, which you cannotdelete. Repeat the procedure and select the subcategory itself to delete. Theplaceholder component is then removed.
About Maintaining Images and Local ContentDescribes recommendations for backing up the contents of software libraries in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
The ecadm backup command does not back up the software libraries. As a goodpractice, create the software library for OS images and local content on networkedstorage (NAS) and include the network storage device in your site's backup plan. Ifnetworked storage is not available, consider the following alternative for OS images:
1. Back up the Enterprise Controller's directory for OSimages, /var/opt/sun/xvm/images/os
2. Move the archive to another server, file-share facility, or a location outside ofthe /var/opt/sun directory, according to your site's disaster recovery plan.
3. If it is necessary to rebuild the Enterprise Controller, restore the EnterpriseController and then restore the /var/opt/sun/xvm/images/os hierarchy.
Related Resources for Software LibrariesList of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center documents with additional information.
For instructions in performing actions or to learn more this feature, see the followingresources:
• The Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repository resides at the Oracle site: http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release.
• Other parent repositories, such as Oracle Solaris Cluster, are available. For a list ofavailable Oracle repositories and to download the key-certificate pair, see the https://pkg-register.oracle.com site.
• In the Operate How To library at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/operate.htm
– Keep Your Firmware Up-to-Date
– Update Oracle Solaris 10 OS Workflow
– Update Oracle Solaris 11 Workflow
• Deploy Software Libraries Workflow in the Deploy How To library at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/deploy.htm
About Maintaining Images and Local Content
5-32 Configuration Reference
• See the Copying and Creating Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repositories at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E23824_01/html/E21803/toc.html
• For information about key file and certificate file, see Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter Administration Guide
• Customizing an XML AI Manifest File in the Oracle Solaris documentation.
• Oracle’s site for UAR images: http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/server-storage/solaris11/downloads/unified-archives-2245488.html
Related Resources for Software Libraries
Configure Software Libraries 5-33
Related Resources for Software Libraries
5-34 Configuration Reference
6Configure Storage
Overview of actions for storage in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Topics
• Introduction to Storage
• Roles for Storage
• Actions Available for Storage
• Location of Storage Information in the User Interface
• Storage Libraries
• Types of Storage for Libraries
• About Oracle VM Storage Connect Plug-ins
• Storage Hardware
• About Opaque Storage and Opaque Filesystems
• Storage Profiles
• About Multipath Storage for Logical Domains
• High Availability for Storage Resources
• Related Resources for Storage
Introduction to StorageOverview of the role and purpose of storage libraries in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center and how it manages storage as both an asset and its resource.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center discover, manages, and monitors storageservers and appliances, discovers and provisions storage capacity through StorageConnect plug-in software, and makes storage resources available to virtual assetsthrough storage libraries.
Storage libraries are the storage resources for Oracle Solaris Zones, Oracle VM Serversfor SPARC, Oracle VM Servers for x86, their server pools, and virtual datacenters.These virtualization hosts and server pools store their metadata and their operationaldata in storage libraries. The metadata and data for Oracle Solaris zones are stored in astorage library associated with the global zone or server pool. A storage library thatsupports an Oracle VM Server for x86 is an Oracle VM Storage Repository.
Configure Storage 6-1
Roles for StorageList of required roles for storage tasks in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Table 7 lists the tasks and the role required to complete the task. Contact youradministrator if you do not have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. Seethe Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration for information about thedifferent roles and the permissions they grant.
Table 6-1 Storage Tasks and Roles
Task Role
Create a new storage library Storage Admin
Remove a storage library Storage Admin
Edit attributes of a storage library Storage Admin
Add storage capacity Storage Admin
Update a storage appliance Update Admin
Actions Available for StorageList of available operations in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can perform the following actions, depending on the requirements.
• Create new storage libraries, either as a file system or as block storage.
• Modify existing storage libraries. You can change the library's attributes or addcapacity.
• Update storage appliances.
The set of available actions depends on what you have selected:
• When you select a physical asset, you can launch the asset's user interface and viewinformation about the hardware's state and configuration.
• When you choose an asset in the File Server group, the Filesystems tab in the centerpane lists all of the file systems with the Add a Backing Device icon, the Edit icon,and the Delete icon.
• When you choose an asset in the Storage Array group, the Logical Units tab givesyou access to the Create Logical Unit icon, the Resize LUN icon, the Delete LUNicon, and the Clone LUN icon.
Location of Storage Information in the User InterfaceLists the navigation instructions to locate storage information in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Table 6-2 shows where to find information.
Roles for Storage
6-2 Configuration Reference
Table 6-2 Location of Library Information in the BUI
Object Location
To see the storage libraries Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane, then expandStorage Libraries.
To see storage hardware information Expand All Assets in the Navigation pane, then scroll to theStorage section. Select a physical asset to see informationabout it in the center pane.
To see groups of storage arrays or file servers Expand All Assets in the Navigation pane, then Storage inthe Resource Management Views section.
To see storage profiles Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane, thenclick Profiles and Policies. The Discovery, RAID Controller,and Update Storage Appliance categories contain profiles.
To see the virtual host that is using a LUN Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane, then expandStorage Libraries. Select the storage library to view theLUNs table in the center pane. The Allocated To fielddisplays the virtual host's identifier.
To see the virtualization host that is using astorage library
Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane, then expandStorage Libraries. Select the storage library to view theSummary tab in the center pane. The IP address of thevirtualization host is in the Allocated To field.
To see incidents for a storage library Expand the Message Center in the Navigation pane. Formore information about recovering from incidents, see theOracle Enterprise Manager Operations Reference.
Storage LibrariesDescribes the role of storage libraries in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
• About Storage Libraries for Virtualization Hosts
• About Storage Libraries for Server Pools
• Storage Libraries for a Virtual Datacenter
• Storage Libraries for Oracle Solaris Zones
• Storage Libraries for Oracle VM Server for SPARC
• About Storage Libraries and Repositories for Oracle VM Server for x86
A storage library stores metadata for each virtualization host in the server pool that isassociated with the storage library. Metadata is a virtualization host's image oridentity: the configuration for its operating system, CPU, memory, and network. Thevirtualization host's data, which results from its use, can reside in the same storagelibrary or in a different storage library. A storage library can be a local, that is, a filesystem on the virtualization host's server, or it can be accessed through an NFS serveror SAN network.
When you create a virtual host, you assign it to one of the storage libraries associatedwith its virtualization host so that its metadata can be stored.
Storage Libraries
Configure Storage 6-3
• For the metadata of its local virtual hosts, virtualization hosts (Oracle VM Serverfor SPARC, Oracle VM Server for x86, and global zones) can use a local storagelibrary. However, storing metadata in a local storage library limits the managementof the virtual host because this virtual host cannot be migrated to another serverand cannot be recovered on another server if it fails.
• For the metadata of all virtual hosts, virtualization hosts must use a NetworkAttached Storage (NAS) storage library.
• For data, Oracle VM Server for SPARC and Oracle VM Server for x86 can use eitherNAS shares or SAN LUNs for itself and for its virtual hosts. A global zone can useSAN LUNs for itself and for its non-global zones. The storage library must beassociated with the virtualization host.
The diagram in Figure 6-1 shows how the NAS and SAN storage libraries andvirtualization hosts interact with LUNs.
• SAN storage libraries expose data as virtual disks (LUNs), identified by their LUNGUIDs. A control domain makes raw partitions available to its logical domainsusing Fibre Channel or iSCSI, as described in About Block Storage
• NAS storage libraries expose data as raw files and files in VMDK format. All typesof virtualization hosts store metadata using NFS services, as described in AboutStorage Libraries for Virtualization Hosts
Figure 6-1 SAN and NAS Storage Libraries
The LUNs, raw files, and raw volumes store data and metadata for the virtual hosts. Figure 6-1 expands the previous figure to show that the metadata for NAS virtualdisks are stored in the NAS storage library. Metadata for SAN virtual disks ispersisted in the SAN Storage Library.
Figure 6-2 Storage Library Metadata
Ensure that the LUNs used by a Brownfield guest are not allocated to another guest. Ifthe Brownfield guest discovery is done in a very close proximity to a network outageor iSCSI discovery or any other action that might cause the disks to be invisible to OpsCenter, the disks coming from Brownfield guests might be detected as opaque andcould be allocated to another guest.
Storage Libraries
6-4 Configuration Reference
About Storage Libraries for Virtualization HostsDescribes NAS storage libraries using NFS services in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Network-attached-storage (NAS) libraries are storage libraries for NFS storage devicemount points. Virtualization hosts use NFS services to attach to the storage librariesand get access to their data and metadata.
You can store metadata for all virtual hosts in one NAS storage library or you cancreate separate storage libraries for each virtual host. Use separate storage libraries toincrease ease of access, to increase capacity, and to increase performance.
If a NAS storage library becomes unavailable, the virtual hosts associated with thelibrary are affected in the following ways:
• If the storage library is used for the virtual hosts' metadata, a virtual host continuesto function but Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center can no longer manage thevirtual host. Because Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center relies on its interactionwith the metadata in the storage library, jobs that must read or modify themetadata fail. You must manage the virtual host manually.
• If the storage library is used for NFS large files that support virtual disks, thevirtual host does not function.
• If the boot disk is on the NFS share, the virtual host cannot be rebooted.
• The virtual host cannot be migrated.
About Storage Libraries for Server PoolsDescribes the use of storage libraries in server pools in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
You group virtualization hosts to create a server pool. The virtualization hosts shareall the storage and networks associated with the server pool. When you add avirtualization host to a server pool, the libraries associated with that virtualizationhost become available to all the other hosts in the server pool.
To delete a storage library or the storage hardware asset that supports the storagelibrary, you must remove its associations. Use the Disassociate Library icon in theLibraries tab to disassociate the library from the server pool.
A server pool must use a NAS storage library. Figure 6-3 shows how virtualizationhosts in a server pool get access to storage resources through the storage libraries.
Storage Libraries
Configure Storage 6-5
Figure 6-3 External Storage
Storage Libraries for a Virtual DatacenterDescription of the role and purpose of storage libraries and repositories in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
The vDC inherits the storage resources allocated for the server pool, as described inSetting Up Storage Resources. For each account, the amount of storage used by theguests is shown on the Account's Dashboard tab. In the Resource Allocation section ofthe dashboard, the Storage graph shows the number of guests and the used space ingigabytes. The scale for the x-axis of the graph is adjusted according to amount ofspace allocated to guests. In Figure 6-4, one guest is allocated 14 GB of space so OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center uses 14 as the midpoint of the x-axis.
Storage Libraries
6-6 Configuration Reference
Figure 6-4 Graph of Guest Storage Resource Allocation
Storage Libraries for Oracle Solaris ZonesDescription of the role and purpose of storage libraries and repositories in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
A global zone provides storage resources to its non-global zones. The Oracle SolarisZone must be associated with a storage library. See “Associating a Storage Librarywith a Global Zone” in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Virtualization Reference.
Storage Libraries for Oracle VM Server for SPARCDescription of the role and purpose of storage libraries and repositories in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
The control domain provides storage resources to its logical domain. The controldomain must be associated with a storage library. See “Associating Storage Librarywith the Domains” in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Virtualization Reference.
About Storage Libraries and Repositories for Oracle VM Server for x86Description of the role and purpose of storage libraries and repositories in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides option to create Oracle VM StorageRepositories. This type of storage library stores virtual machine metadata, templates,assemblies, ISO images, and virtual disks for the Oracle VM Server for x86.
When you create the storage repository on a LUN, it is a block-based repository. Whenyou create the storage repository on a NFS file server, it is a NFS-based storagerepository.
Creating an Oracle VM Storage RepositoryProcedure for creating the repository for Oracle VM templates in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
Storage Libraries
Configure Storage 6-7
2. Select Storage Libraries.
3. Click New Oracle VM Storage Repository.
4. Enter a name and description for the repository and choose either the NFS or OCFSprotocol. Click Next.
5. From the drop-down lists, choose the Oracle VM Manager and the Oracle VMServer for x86 that use the storage repository, and the NFS File Server that supportsthe storage repository.
6. Choose the file system on the NFS file server for the storage repository and specifythe share name. Click Next.
7. Choose the server pool to associate with the storage repository. Click Next.
8. Review the configuration and then click Finish to submit the job.
Uploading Templates and Assemblies to an Oracle VM Storage RepositoryProcedure for adding content to the Oracle VM Storage Repository in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Select Storage Libraries.
3. Select the Oracle VM Storage Repository.
4. Click Import Image in the Actions pane.
The Import Image window is displayed.
Storage Libraries
6-8 Configuration Reference
Figure 6-5 Import Image
5. Identify the type of format for the image, either Assembly Template or Oracle VMTemplate.
6. Identify the current location of the image file. If the image file is located in anaccessible location, enter the name of the directory or use the Browse button tonavigate to the location.
7. Select the image you want to import.
8. Enter a name for the image and a description. Image names must be unique, canconsist of up to 100 characters, and can include numbers, letters, and some specialsymbols. The following special symbols are prohibited: comma, asterisk, singlequote, double quote, parenthesis, question mark, equal sign, and newline.
9. Click Import Image to copy the image to the library.
Types of Storage for LibrariesList types of storage in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Topics for Filesystem Storage Libraries
• About File Systems Libraries
• Viewing Local Libraries
• Editing the Attributes of a Local Library
• Creating a Local Library
Types of Storage for Libraries
Configure Storage 6-9
• Deleting a Local Library
Topics for Block Storage Libraries
• About Block Storage
• About Dynamic Block Storage
• About Static Block Storage
• Comparison of Actions in Static and Dynamic Libraries
• LUN Identification
• Selecting LUNs
• Adding Capacity to Dynamic Block Storage Libraries
• Adding LUNs to a Block Storage Library Manually
• Adding Storage to a Logical Domain
• Moving a LUN
• Creating a LUN
• Cloning a LUN
About File Systems LibrariesDescribes local libraries in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Each virtualization host has a default local library named /guests where data andmetadata for each virtual host is stored. For the purposes of storage efficiency andyour site's organization, you can create and maintain other local libraries.
If the storage library becomes unavailable, the local library remains available.However, any guest with metadata in a local library cannot be migrated.
Viewing Local LibrariesProcedure displaying the local libraries used by virtualization hosts and their guests inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Use this procedure to see the local libraries for a virtual host and the contents of alibrary. You can also see details of the local disks that support the local libraries.
1. Expand Assets in the Navigation pane.
2. Select the virtual host.
3. Click the Libraries tab in the center pane. The Associated Libraries table's Typecolumn identifies the libraries of the Local type.
4. Select a library of the Local type. The Usage table shows all the guests that use thatlocal library.
5. In the Usage table, select a guest.
6. Click the Contents tab to see the Library Contents table with all of the images,sorted by type.
Types of Storage for Libraries
6-10 Configuration Reference
7. To see details of the local disks, return to the Associated Libraries table and clickLocal Devices. Then select the local device library.
When you add new disks, use the Refresh icon to include them in the table of disks.
Editing the Attributes of a Local LibraryProcedure for changing the characteristics of a local library in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can rename a local library and you can change its description. You cannot changethe file system defined for the local library.
1. Expand Assets in the Navigation pane.
2. Select the asset.
3. Click the Libraries tab in the center pane. The asset's associated libraries and theguests that are stored in the libraries are listed.
4. Click the Edit Local Library icon.
5. In the Edit Local Library pane, enter the new name or description for the library.The maximum number of characters for the library name is 30.
6. Click the Update button. When the job is completed, the edited local library islisted in the Associated Libraries table.
Creating a Local LibraryProcedure for creating a storage library on the Enterprise Controller in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
Each virtual host has a local library, located at file: ///guests. In addition to thedefault local library, you can create other local libraries to use your storage resourcesefficiently or organize your images.
Note:
To use the Boot Environment feature of Oracle Solaris 11, the local librarymust be located in its own ZFS file system.
1. Create a file system with read/write permissions for only the root user.
2. Expand Assets in the Navigation pane.
3. Select the asset.
4. Click the Libraries tab in the center pane. The asset's associated libraries and theguests that are stored in the libraries are listed.
5. Click the New Local Library icon.
6. In the Create Local Library pane, type a name and description for the library. Themaximum number of characters for the library name is 30.
7. In the URL field, enter the directory name for the location where you want to storeimages and metadata.
Types of Storage for Libraries
Configure Storage 6-11
8. Click Create Local Library. When the job is completed, the new local library islisted in the Associated Libraries table.
Deleting a Local LibraryProcedure for removing a local library in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The default local library, /guests, cannot be deleted.
Use the Remove Local Software Library action to delete a local library. If the librarywas associated with a virtual host, the virtual host does not have any access to thedirectory defined for the local library or its contents. When you delete a library, thedirectory is not deleted.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Select the library you want to delete.
3. Click Remove Local Software Library in the Action pane.
About Block StorageDescribes a LUN, a slice of a storage volume.
Block storage libraries are used in SAN networks and define storage by Logical Unitsor LUNs, which are backed by either Fibre Channel disks or iSCSI disks. You canassociate block storage libraries with server pools, Oracle VM Servers, or global zonesto store their data.
A LUN (Logical Unit Number) is a slice of a storage volume, as defined by thefollowing terms:
• Disk: Physical storage media. A set of disks is a disk array.
• Volume: An aggregation of storage space provided by several disks.
• Slice: A partition of a volume that is exposed to the servers connected to the diskarray.
• LUN (Logical Unit Number): The representation of a slice.
• GUID: The Global Unique Identifier for a LUN.
If the storage array is a managed asset, the LUNs can provide dynamic storage. See“External Storage” compares static block storage libraries and dynamic block storagelibraries.
About Dynamic Block StorageDescribes what makes a block storage library dynamic.
When Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center can create, resize, delete, and cloneLUNs, the block storage library is dynamic. When you add more virtual hosts to aserver pool, you create LUNs in the storage library in the same action. When youdiscover a storage device with LUNs backed by iSCSI disks, a dynamic block storagelibrary is created.
About Static Block StorageDescribes what makes a storage library static in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Types of Storage for Libraries
6-12 Configuration Reference
When Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center manages a storage device with existingLUNs, it can use the LUNs but cannot change or delete them, or create new LUNs.These operations must be done through the storage device's user interface. A staticblock storage library supports storage devices that were discovered and configured inprevious product software versions. Each LUN is for the exclusive use of its assignedvirtual host. Because a LUN has a fixed size and cannot be shared, you must plan howto optimize the available storage in the storage library and assign a LUN of theappropriate size.
Comparison of Actions in Static and Dynamic LibrariesCompares and contrasts the types of block storage library in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Table 6-3 Comparison of Static and Dynamic Libraries
Dynamic Block Storage Library Static Block Storage Library
Protocol iSCSI iSCSI
Fibre Channel
To create a storagelibrary
The storage library is created implicitlywhen you discover storage hardware andits target groups.
You create LUNs and then create thestorage library. You assign existing LUNsto the library.
To manage a storagelibrary
When you add a virtual host, you cancreate a LUN for it. When a virtual hostneeds more storage, you can increase thesize of the LUN.
Any changes made through the storageserver's user interface are reflected in theOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center'suser interface.
The number of LUNs in the storagelibrary determines the number of virtualhosts that can use the storage library.
Changes made through the storageserver's user interface are not updated inthe Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter's user interface. Some information,such as a LUN's GUID can be obtainedonly from the storage server's userinterface.
Add LUN icon Create a new LUN. Select an existing LUN or enter the GUIDof an existing LUN.
Edit LUN Details icon Increase the size of the LUN. Renames the LUN in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center
Delete LUN icon Deletes the LUN and deletes the data. Youare deleting the LUN on the storageserver.
Deletes the LUN from the library but doesnot delete data.
LUN IdentificationLists the attributes that can be viewed or configured for LUNs in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You select LUNs from a list of available LUNs when you change the configuration of astorage library. Figure 6-6 shows an Available LUNs table, which lists all of the LUNsthat the current virtualization hosts can access. For each LUN, the followinginformation is displayed:
• LUN GUID – The unique 32-digit identifier for the LUN.
• Host information for the LUN:
Types of Storage for Libraries
Configure Storage 6-13
– Hostname – Name or IP address of the host that can access the LUN.
– Controller Number – The host's identifier for the HBA port, which is thephysical interface to the Fibre Channel disk array.
– LUN Number – The host's identifier for the LUN.
• Size (GB) – Size of each LUN in gigabytes.
Figure 6-6 List of Available LUNs
Selecting LUNsList of ways to select a LUN in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You select LUNs when you perform the following procedures:
• You are creating a new SAN storage library and have associated the new librarywith a virtualization host or server pool immediately.
• You are increasing the storage capacity of an existing SAN storage library andchose to select LUNs from the available LUNs.
You can select LUNs in the following ways:
• Enter the LUN GUID.
• Select a storage server and then select LUNs from a table of its available LUNs, thatis, LUNs backed by that storage device.
• Select a storage library and then select LUNs from a table of available LUNs, thatis, LUNs backed by storage assets that contribute to that storage library.
When you use a procedure that provides a table of Available LUNs, you can selectmore than one LUN.
Adding Capacity to Dynamic Block Storage LibrariesProcedure for adding LUNs to a storage library in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
If the block storage library is not associated with a server pool or virtualization host,you add storage capacity by specifying new LUNs by name. If the storage library isassociated, you can also select new LUNs from a list of the LUNs available to theserver pool or virtual host.
Types of Storage for Libraries
6-14 Configuration Reference
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click Block Storage in Storage Libraries.
3. Click one of the available storage libraries.
4. Click Add LUN in the Actions pane.
5. Choose the method for adding LUNs:
• To add LUNs to the library manually, accept the default option: Manually enterthe GUID/WWN of the LUNs to be added. See Adding LUNs to a BlockStorage Library Manually to complete the procedure.
• To select LUNs from the available LUNs, click the Select from available LUNsoption. The Available LUNs table, shown in Figure 6-6, lists all of the LUNs thatthe selected virtualization hosts can access.
6. Select one or more LUNs.
Adding LUNs to a Block Storage Library ManuallyProcedure for selecting LUNs to add to a storage library in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
You use this procedure in the following situations:
• You are creating a new SAN storage library and have accepted the default action ofadding LUNs later. You must add at least one LUN to create the storage library.
• You are adding a LUN to an existing SAN storage library. You selected the libraryand then the Add LUN action. The default option is to specify each new LUN byname.
The table shown in Figure 6-7 is displayed:
1. Click in the GUID/WWN field and type the GUID or WWN for the LUN. TheGUID is the Global Unique Identifier associated with each LUN, which is ahexadecimal number of 32 digits. If your site uses SCSI initiators and targets, youcan enter the WWN for the LUN.
Figure 6-7 Specifying a LUN
Types of Storage for Libraries
Configure Storage 6-15
2. Click the first Add icon to include additional LUNs.
3. If you do not have the GUID or WWN, select a LUN from the list of availableLUNs. Click the second Add icon to see a list of managed storage assets as shownin Figure 6-8.
Figure 6-8 Specifying an Exported LUN
4. Select one of the storage assets to populate the list of exported LUNs on that device.
5. Select the LUNs to use in the library. Use the Search box to locate a specific LUN.
6. Click Add Selected LUNs.
If you are adding a LUN to an existing storage library, a new job starts. If you arecreating a SAN storage library, review the details of the LUNs you have configuredin the Summary pane and click Finish.
Adding Storage to a Logical DomainProcedure for in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
When a logical domain is created, it is assigned storage resources for its metadata andoperational data. You can add storage for the use of the logical domain by selectingadditional virtual disks or LUNs from the storage library.
1. In the Asset section of the Navigation pane, select the logical domain.
2. In the center pane, click the Storage tab.
Types of Storage for Libraries
6-16 Configuration Reference
3. In the table of virtual disks or LUNs, click the Add Storage icon.
The Add Storage wizard opens. The list of libraries includes all storage librariesthat are available to the logical domain.
Figure 6-9 Adding LUNs
4. Select the library. For a filesystem storage library, you can create a new virtualdisk with the size you specify. For a static block storage library, choose a LUNfrom the list of available LUNs. The size of the LUN is fixed. For a dynamic blockstorage library, select one of the existing LUNs of a fixed size or create a new LUNwith the size you specify.
5. Select the LUN or virtual disk. As you select them, the value in the AdditionalStorage Specified field increases.
If you have many LUNs to manage, you can click the Add Multiple SAN LUNsicon, as show in Figure 6-10.
6. You have the recommended option of enabling multipathing by specifying analternate path to the virtual disk or LUN. Select at least two service domains.
7. Click one of the paths as the Active Path. This is the default path.
8. Click in the Domain Name field for each path to create a name or allow OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center to create one.
9. Click Finish. When the job is complete, the additional LUNs are listed in the tableon the Storage tab of the logical domain.
The Add Multiple SAN LUNs action provides a convenient way to manage manyLUNs or virtual disks.
Types of Storage for Libraries
Configure Storage 6-17
1. Select a logical domain and the Add Storage action, as you did in the previousprocedure. Then click the Add Multiple SAN LUNs icon.
Figure 6-10 Adding Multiple SAN LUNs
2. In the Select SAN LUNs window, select a SAN storage library to show its availableLUNs. This example shows that the test1 library has been selected. You can usethe Search field to limit the list of LUNs.
Figure 6-11 Adding Multiple SAN LUNs
3. In the Available LUNs table, select a series of LUNs and then click the right-arrowbutton to display them in the Selected LUNs table. To select all of the LUNs, clickthe double-right-arrow button.
As you select LUNs, the Selected LUNs counter increases. As you specify LUNs byclicking the arrow button, the Additional Storage counter and the AdditionalNumber of LUNs counter increase.
4. You can configure multipathing on all the selected LUNs at the same time. Selectone or more paths to these LUNs by selecting multiple service domains. Identifyone path as the Active Path, the default path.
5. Click Finish. When the job is complete, the additional LUNs are listed in the tableon the Storage tab of the logical domain.
Types of Storage for Libraries
6-18 Configuration Reference
Moving a LUNProcedure for moving a LUN to another library in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
In the course of managing LUNs and creating libraries, it can become convenient tomove a LUN from one storage library to another storage library. This change can bemade without interrupting the assets that are associated with storage library if theassets are able to access both the source and the target library.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click Block Storage in Storage Libraries.
3. Click the storage library that contains the LUN.
4. In the center pane, select the LUN to move.
5. Click Move LUN icon.
Figure 6-12 Move LUN Icon
6. The Move LUN window shows the selected LUN and the guests that use it. In theLibrary to move list, select the target storage library.
Types of Storage for Libraries
Configure Storage 6-19
Figure 6-13 Move LUN Icon
7. Click Move.
Creating a LUNProcedure for creating a LUN from a storage volume in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
In a dynamic block storage library, you can create a new LUN.
1. In the Asset section of the Navigation pane, select an asset in the Storage ArrayGroup.
2. In the center pane, click the Logical Units tab.
3. Click the Create Logical Unit icon.
Types of Storage for Libraries
6-20 Configuration Reference
Figure 6-14 Creating a LUN
4. Enter the name and size for the new LUN.
5. Click Create.
Cloning a LUNProcedure for copying a LUN from an existing LUN in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
In a dynamic block storage library, you can make a copy of a LUN.
1. In the Asset section of the Navigation pane, select an asset in the Storage ArrayGroup.
2. In the center pane, click the Logical Units tab.
3. Select the LUN to copy.
4. Click the Clone LUN icon.
Types of Storage for Libraries
Configure Storage 6-21
Figure 6-15 Cloning a LUN
5. Enter the name and size for the new LUN.
6. Click Clone.
Deleting LUNsProcedure for removing one or more LUNs from a library in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
1. Expand Libraries in the Navigation pane.
2. Click Block Storage in Storage Libraries.
3. Click the storage library that contains the LUN.
4. In the center pane, select the LUN to delete.
• You can click on the Allocated To title to sort the list of LUNs to see theunallocated LUNs.
• Use Ctrl+Click to select more than one LUN.
5. Click Delete button.
6. In the Delete Logical Unit window, review your selections and click the Deletebutton to confirm.
The selected LUNs are removed from the library.
About Oracle VM Storage Connect Plug-insDescription of plug-ins used to get access to storage devices in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center shares the capability of Oracle VM Manager tomanage storage devices of various vendors. Oracle VM Storage Connect is anapplication programming interface (API) that exposes the storage device's featuresand attributes to Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
About Oracle VM Storage Connect Plug-ins
6-22 Configuration Reference
Displaying Storage Connect PluginsProcedure for viewing the Storage Connect plugin software in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
After the plugin is installed on the Proxy Controller that supports the storage device,the storage device can be managed through the Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter's user interface. When you create a discovery profile for storage, the Targetsstep lists the plug-ins installed on the Proxy Controller.
Use the following procedure to see the plug-ins that have been installed:
1. Expand Administration in the Assets pane.
2. Select Enterprise Controller.
3. Click the Proxy Controllers tab in the center pane.
4. Select one of the Proxy Controllers.
5. Click the down-arrow icon, located in the title bar of the display and shown in Figure 6-16.
Figure 6-16 Proxy Controllers
The center pane displays the Installed Storage Connect Plugins table, as shown in
Figure 6-17 Storage Connect Plugins
6. For information about one of the plugins, select the plugin and the click ViewPlugin Details icon
Adding a Storage Connect PluginDescribes the purpose of the Storage Connect Plugin software.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses the same plugins as Oracle VM Manager.The plug-in software is available from the vendor and from Oracle's site, http://www.oracle.com/us/technologies/virtualization/storage-connect-partner-program/overview/index.html.
About Oracle VM Storage Connect Plug-ins
Configure Storage 6-23
Install the plug-in in Oracle VM Manager software, according to the vendordocumentation.
Storage HardwareOverview of types of storage hardware.
The storage features are supported by various types of storage devices. The tabs in thecenter pane contain specific information about each type.
Topics
• RAID Controller
• About NAS Storage Appliance
• File Server
• Storage Array
• Storage Server: Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance
• Storage Server: Exadata
RAID ControllerLists the information that RAID Controllers report to Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
RAID Controllers embedded in other types of storage report the following in additionto the hardware information:
• RAID Volumes
• RAID Levels
• Stripe size
• Number of disks
About NAS Storage ApplianceDescription of the supported NFS service in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Software and Storage Libraries can reside on the shares of an NFS server. Because theEnterprise Controller does not mount the NFS share, use an NFS server on a systemthat is close to the systems where the NFS share must be used, that is, the systems onwhich the virtualization hosts reside. The systems on which the Enterprise Controllerand virtualization hosts reside must be able to write to the NAS shares as root and thefiles must be owned by root.
The procedure for setting up the share for a library depends on several site-specificfactors such as the version of NFS protocol and name service management. Theexample in this section provides one method of configuring the share on an NFSserver running on the Oracle Solaris 10 operating system. See Managing Network FileSystems at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E26502_01/html/E28997/index.html for the information about the Oracle Solaris 11.1 procedure.
Storage Hardware
6-24 Configuration Reference
Setting Up a Share on an NFS ServerProcedure for configuring an NFS share for use by a library in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
1. On the NFS server, edit the /etc/dfs/dfstab file.
2. Add an entry to share the directory with share options that enable the NFS clientsto have read and write root-level access to the share, such as:
share -F nfs -o rw,root=<access_list> -d "<description>" /<directory>
where <access_list> specifies the clients that can access the share as the root user,<description> is text to identify the purpose of the share, and </directory> identifiesthe directory that you want to share on the NFS server. For example, to allow rootaccess to the /export/lib/libX directory for all systems on the 192.168.1 subnet,add the following entry:
share -F nfs -o rw,[email protected] -d "Share 0" /export/lib/libX
See the share_nfs(1M) man page for information about NFS share options, andhow to specify the access list.
3. Share the directory and verify that the directory is shared. For example:
# share export/lib/libX # share- /export/lib/libX rw,[email protected] "Share 0"
After setting up a share on the NFS server, prepare the NFS client to mount the share.
Setting Up an NFS ClientProcedure for preparing an NFS share for use by a library in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
1. On each NFS client, edit the /etc/default/nfs file.
2. Locate the NFSMAPID_DOMAIN variable and change the variable value to thedomain name.
3. Verify the NFS share is visible on the client.
# showmount -e <server-name>export list for <server-name>:/export/virtlib/lib0 (everyone)
To create a storage library, see the Configuring NAS Libraries How To document.
File ServerLists the information about file servers that is collected in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
For file-based storage devices such as NAS appliances and other NFS devices, OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center reports the following in addition to hardwareinformation:
• File systems – The location in the file system hierarchy that is presented as aphysical device. For example, an NAS share.
Storage Hardware
Configure Storage 6-25
• Backing Devices – The physical device that supports a file system. For example, aRAID disk.
Storage ArrayDescribes the requirements for discovering and using a storage array’s storagevolumes and LUNs in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
For block-based storage such as iSCSI SAN and Fibre Channel SAN devices, thestorage array assets include the following tabs in the center pane:
• Volume Groups – Indicates a collection of physical disks or portions of physicaldisks.
• Logical Units (LUN) – Virtual disks created from the volume groups.
For a storage server and Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center to identify each otheras eligible initiators and targets, each one's Fibre Channel World Wide Number(WWN) or iSCSI IQN must be registered with the other one. To create LUNs and makethem available to Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center, see the storage server'sdocumentation for instructions and Oracle Solaris 11.1 Administration: SANConfiguration and Multipathing at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E26502_01/html/E29008/index.html for the procedures to perform the following:
• Configure the initiator and the targets. The initiator (Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center) must be able to recognize the targets (LUNs) and the targets must beable to recognize the initiator. Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center recognizesthe targets because the WWNs of the storage server are recorded when the storageserver is discovered. Any LUNs that have been assigned to that WWN are eligibleto be used in a storage library. On the storage server, you must specify OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center's WWN as an initiator and assign LUNs to thatinitiator.
• Enable multipathing on the Fibre Channel ports.To use LUNs backed by FibreChannel disks, you must enable multipathing on the Fibre Channel storage deviceor on its individual ports. Multipathed I/O (MPxIO) allows I/O devices to beaccessed through multiple host controller interfaces. Multipathing is enabled bydefault on Oracle Solaris x86-based systems, but is disabled by default on OracleSolaris SPARC-based systems. Use the stmsboot -e command to enablemultipathing.
• Create new LUNs. It can take several hours for a new LUN to be displayed inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center's user interface.
Storage Server: Oracle ZFS Storage ApplianceDescribes Oracle’s ZFS storage appliance in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
See the Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance documentation for specific information aboutthe storage appliance. To view the Sun ZFS Storage 7000 System Administration Guide,log in to the Unified Storage System software interface and click Help in the top rightcorner of any screen.
This type of storage appliance contains a service processor, which must also bediscovered. See “About the Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance” for this procedure.
Storage Hardware
6-26 Configuration Reference
Actions for the Oracle ZFS Storage ApplianceLists the device-specific actions that can be performed for the Oracle ZFS StorageAppliance in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
After the storage appliance is discovered, you can manage it as you do other assetswith the additional capabilities that the Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance provides. Fromthe Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center UI, you can launch the storage appliance'sUI. Use the following commands in the Action pane, to launch a specific page of theappliance's user interface. For each one, enter the credentials for the appliance andthen perform the appliance tasks.
• Launch Appliance UI opens a new browser window or tab for the main page.
• Launch Detailed Dashboard opens a new browser window or tab for the statuspage.
• Launch Analytics opens a new browser window or tab for the dynamic analysispage.
• Manage Shares opens a new browser window or tab for the share configurationpage.
• Manage Services opens a new browser window or tab for the data servicesconfiguration page.
Volume CapacityLists the attributes of a storage volume in Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance that can beviewed in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance product uses the term project to indicate avolume group. The Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance reports its current capacity to OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center, where it is displayed on the Dashboard.
• Allocated Size is the sum of all allocated space to LUNs and files systems in theselect project or volume group.
• Total Size is the quota of the project or volume group. If no quota has beenspecified, the Total Size is the same as the Total Storage Space, which is all spacereserved for other project/volume group quotas.
• Free Size is the Total Size - Allocated Size
• Used Size is the sum of the used space in all LUNs/files systems in the selectedproject/volume group
Auto Service Requests for the Oracle ZFS Storage ApplianceDescription of the special case of the Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance for ASR in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
Oracle ZFS Storage Appliances have the capability to contact My Oracle Support, toprovide analytic data, and to generate Oracle Auto Service Requests (ASR). Thecapability does not conflict with Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center's capability tocreate ASRs. If you prefer, exclude an Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance from OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center's communication with My Oracle Support by usingthe blacklisting option described in the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops CenterAdministration.
Storage Hardware
Configure Storage 6-27
Provisioning and Updating an Oracle ZFS Storage ApplianceProcedures for upgrading and downgrading the firmware of an Oracle ZFS StorageAppliance using Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Note:
You update the storage appliance using a provisioning profile anddeployment plan. The Update Firmware action is not available.
1. Download the appliance update from My Oracle Support and uncompress the fileto obtain the image for the appliance update.
2. Upload/import the appliance update image into a software library and accept thedefault action of creating a profile for this image.
3. Create a plan from the Update Storage Appliances plan template. Select thesoftware library and then select the profile for the image.
4. To apply the deployment plan, select the plan and then select the storageappliances to update.
If it is necessary to downgrade a storage appliance, use the following procedure:
1. Expand Assets and then Storage in the Navigation pane.
2. Select the storage appliance.
3. Click the System Details tab in the center pane.
4. In the Appliance Updates table, select the update to remove.
5. Click the Rollback Appliance Software icon.
6. Confirm the action to submit the job.
Storage Server: ExadataDescribes discovery of the Exadata Storage Server in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
The Oracle Exadata Storage Server is a fast, high-capacity storage server. Each serverhas 12 disks connected to a storage controller. Exadata has three disk groups that spanall of the disks so that each physical disk is in each disk group. Having all physicaldisks participating in data retrieval and storage maximizes performance.
In addition to discovering standalone systems, Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Centerdiscovers the Exadata Storage Server and its disks when it manages an Oracle SPARCSuperCluster. See Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Operations for OracleSuperCluster Reference for more information.
About Opaque Storage and Opaque FilesystemsDescription of storage that is in use but not managed by Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
About Opaque Storage and Opaque Filesystems
6-28 Configuration Reference
When a virtual host, managed by Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center, uses storageresources that are not managed, Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center cannotretrieve information about the storage resources. The storage is opaque.
In versions before Release 12.2.0.0, Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center could notmonitor opaque storage or filesystems and no operations could be performed. In thisrelease, when Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center discovers a virtualization host orvirtual host, the product software can also identify the virtual disks in use. For OracleVM Server for SPARC and Oracle VM Server for x86, the storage remains opaque untilyou perform one of the following:
• You enable sharing on the virtual disk in a shared storage library. The opaque diskor filesystem can be shared among Oracle VM Servers.
• If the virtual host gets access to storage through a SAN, you can add the opaqueLUN to the virtualization host's SAN storage library. Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center manages the LUN as a raw disk.
Note:
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center makes a distinction between "sharedstorage" and "sharable storage."
• Shared storage: You inform Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center that theopaque disk is accessible through the storage library. You declare the diskas shared, using the Enable Sharing action.
• Sharable storage: You can attach the same disk to more than one virtualhost. The disk is sharable storage.
Declaring a Logical Domain's Opaque Storage as SharedProcedure enabling shared storage for a logical domain in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
1. Select the Oracle VM Server for SPARC in the Assets tree.
2. Select the logical domain that uses the opaque disk.
3. Click the Storage tab. For each opaque disk, the entry in the Disk Type column isopaque and the entry in the Shared column is empty.
4. Select the disk.
5. Click the Enable Sharing icon and then confirm that you want the storage to beshared.
Figure 6-18 Enable Sharing on a Virtual Disk
When the job is completed, the entry for the virtual disk's Shared column has a checksymbol.
Declaring a Logical Domain's Opaque Storage as Shared
Configure Storage 6-29
Figure 6-19 Shared Virtual Disk
Storage ProfilesList of default profiles for maintaining or configuring storage devices in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides default profiles for the followingoperations:
• Configuring RAID Controllers
• Updating the Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance
About Multipath Storage for Logical DomainsDescribes redundant paths to storage for logical domains in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Logical domains use storage libraries to store their metadata and their operationaldata. The path to the storage consists of the following:
• Name of virtual disk
• Name of the backing device such as the LUN or raw file.
Creating more than one path from a logical domain to its storage ensures that thelogical domain can continue to operate if one path is not accessible. Using multipleI/O Domains provides this redundant access. The path to the storage then consists ofthe following:
• Name of I/O Domain
• Name of virtual disk
• Name of the backing device such as the LUN or raw file.
The control domain and the I/O Domain must have access to the same LUNs. Theoperation requires Oracle Solaris MPxIO.
To create multipathed storage for a logical domain, select the logical domain's Storagetab and click the Add Storage icon. To add a path to a logical domain's existingstorage, click the Edit Storage icon.
When you create a SAN storage library, you have the option to enable multipathedstorage for guests of Oracle VM Servers. The Identify Library Associations step of theNew SAN Storage Library wizard includes the LUNs sharing to LDOMs option.
Storage Profiles
6-30 Configuration Reference
Figure 6-20 Sharing Option in SAN Storage Library
When you click the LUNs sharing to LDOMs option, each logical domain can getaccess to its storage through any of the domains in the server pool. If you do notenable multipath storage, the logical domain gets access to storage through its primarydomain.
Configuring a Logical Domain for Multipath StorageProcedure for setting up a logical domain’s storage as shared and multipathed inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Use the following procedure to set up multipath storage:
1. Select the Oracle VM Server for SPARC in the Assets tree.
2. Select the logical domain.
3. Click the Storage tab. For virtual disk, the entry in the Multipathing column isempty.
4. Select the disk.
5. Click the Enable Sharing icon.
Figure 6-21 Enabling Multipath Storage on a Virtual Disk
6. Enter the path to the storage in the Multipathing Group field.
High Availability for Storage ResourcesLists therequirements for high availability storage.
Storage devices for an HA configuration must meet these requirements:
• Storage must be transferable between the primary and secondary EnterpriseController systems. Do not attempt to use local file systems for high-availabilitystorage.
• Storage must offer data redundancy capability, such as mirroring or RAID 5.
• Storage must offer performance that is sufficient to support operations.
• Storage must have the capacity to hold the data that the Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center software stores in the /var/opt/sun/xvm directory structure.
Configuring a Logical Domain for Multipath Storage
Configure Storage 6-31
A variety of storage solutions meet these criteria, including NAS appliances, hardwareRAID arrays and external JBODs. Storage can be attached directly to the EnterpriseControllers or through Storage Area Networks.
You must determine what storage solution offers the required capacity, performance,connectivity, and redundancy capabilities. Configuration procedures vary greatlyamong the available storage solutions, and among operating systems.
You must determine the specific failover procedures to use for the HA storagesolution. Contact My Oracle Support to determine the procedures to use for yourparticular installation.
Related Resources for StorageList of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center documents with additional information.
For instructions in performing actions or to learn more about the role of this feature,go to one of the following resources.
• Oracle Solaris 11.1 Administration: SAN Configuration and Multipathing at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E26502_01/html/E29008/index.html
• To create a storage library, see Configuring NAS Libraries.
• To manage network file systems, see http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E26502_01/html/E28997/index.html
• The plug-in software is available from the vendor and from Oracle's site, http://www.oracle.com/us/technologies/virtualization/storage-connect-partner-program/overview/index.html
• To exclude an Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance from Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter's communication with My Oracle Support, use the blacklisting optiondescribed in the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration
• See Associating Storage Library with the Domains in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter Virtualization Reference.
• See Associating a Storage Library with a Global Zone in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center Virtualization Reference.
• See Setting Up Storage Resources and Storage Virtualization in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center Virtualization Reference for information on how virtual assetsuse storage resources.
• See Manage Assets for information discovering storage hardware.
• Deploy Storage Workflow in the library at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/deploy.htm
• To view the Sun ZFS Storage 7000 System Administration Guide, log in to the UnifiedStorage System software interface and click Help in the top right corner of anyscreen. You can also access this guide at the host name or IP address of the storagesystem:
– https://hostname:215/wiki
– https://ipaddress:215/wiki
Related Resources for Storage
6-32 Configuration Reference
See the Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance Software product information page at http://www.oracle.com/us/products/servers-storage/storage/unified-storage/sun-storage-7000-uss-103104.html for links to moreinformation.
Related Resources for Storage
Configure Storage 6-33
Related Resources for Storage
6-34 Configuration Reference
7Configure Networks
Overview of networks in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Topics
• Introduction to Networks
• Roles for Networks
• Actions Available for Networks
• Location of Network Information in the User Interface
• About Fabrics
• About Network Domains
• About Networks
• Properties of a Network
• Network Utilization
• About Network Connectivity Information in the User Interface
• About Network Hardware
• Network Profiles
• Related Resources for Networks
Introduction to NetworksOverview of the role and purpose of networks in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center manages network resources, from the physicalto the virtual. Fabrics provide the physical infrastructure and network domainsprovide the logical infrastructure. Networks are created from the resources of anetwork domain.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center supports Ethernet and InfiniBand networkprotocols. While the Ethernet interconnect is the established and commoninterconnect, InfiniBand is popular in high-performance computing environmentsbecause it maximizes the speed of transactions using the short, multiple connectionsfound in clusters and data centers.
• For an Ethernet network, both tagged and untagged VLANs are supported. Anuntagged VLAN has no VLAN IDs. Use tagged VLANs to create multiplenetworks on a fabric that use the same network address but different VLAN IDs.
Configure Networks 7-1
The network instances are independent of each other. However, in a server pool,use either all tagged VLANs or all untagged VLANs; do not mix the types ofnetwork in a server pool. For more information, see “Mixed Network TaggingMode Configuration in Server Pool” in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops CenterVirtualize Reference.
Note:
Previous versions of the product software did not create independent networkinstances.
• For an InfiniBand network, partitions are supported.
Note:
If you use an InfiniBand switch in an Ethernet network, the ports on theswitch have Ethernet names.
Roles for NetworksList of required roles for storage tasks in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Table 4 lists the tasks and the role required to complete the task. Contact youradministrator if you do not have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. Seethe Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration for information about thedifferent roles and the permissions they grant.
Table 7-1 Network Tasks and Roles
Task Role
Add Fabric Network Admin
Remove Fabric Network Admin
Discover and Manage the Switches Network Admin
Configure Network for Server Deployment Server Deployment Admin
Actions Available for NetworksList of available operations in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
After a network is discovered or created, you can perform the following actions,depending on the requirements.
• Discover and manage the switches
• Add a fabric to network domain
Location of Network Information in the User InterfaceLists the navigation instructions to locate networks in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Table 7-2 shows where to find information.
Roles for Networks
7-2 Configuration Reference
Table 7-2 Location of Network Information in the BUI
Object Location
Fabric Expand Networks in the Assets pane. Then select Fabrics.
Physical Fabric Expand Networks in the Assets pane. Then select Fabrics and select Network Switches.
Network To see all networks, regardless of type, expand Networks in the Assets pane. Then selectNetwork Domains.
Services of aNetwork
Network Services tab: time server, WINS, DNS, and NIS. To modify these services, editthe network services. You cannot change the network's IP address or name.
Network Domain Expand Networks in the Assets tree. The Default Network Domain is the first item.
Physical switch Expand Assets and expand Network Switches. To see each port, click the Connectivitytab.
About FabricsDescribes the result of using different types of fabrics on the available networkresources.
The fabric is the physical network infrastructure, such as switches, ports, host busadapters, that provides network resources, through a network domain, to virtualassets.
When you use Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center to discover a physical switch orthe host of switch, all the switching fabrics that the switch supports are alsodiscovered. One physical fabric supports many fabrics, also called data links. Thephysical fabric is the collection of all switch ports, links, and physical interfaces orendpoints.
For each Ethernet fabric, the maximum VLAN ID range is 4096, which allows you tocreate 4096 networks.
For each InfiniBand physical fabric, the maximum number of partitions keys is 32000so you can create 32000 partitions. Each partition is a logical fabric. For example, if aserver has two partition keys, it participates in two different partitions.
Fabrics provide resources to the virtual networks they support in a manner thatdepends on their type: fully-managed, host-managed, or unmanaged. Table 7-3 showsthe types of fabrics.
About Fabrics
Configure Networks 7-3
Table 7-3 Fabrics and the Network Domain
What Is Managed Capability Comments
Fully-managed switchedfabric
The switch is discoveredand managed.
For each VLAN ID orpartition key, you cancreate a static or dynamicprivate network.
This type of fabric can beachieved on only the SunEthernet 10GbE Fabricswitch or the SunDatacenter InfiniBandswitch and gateway.
Host-managed fabric The host connected to theEthernet switch isdiscovered and managed.A range of VLAN IDs hasbeen assigned.
For each VLAN ID, youcan create a static ordynamic private network.
To create a host-managedfabric, use the DefineEthernet Fabric action tospecify the fabric and itsVLAN ID range.
Unmanaged fabric The Ethernet fabric isdiscovered or declaredduring the discovery ofanother asset, but theswitch is not managed.
If the fabric has existingnetworks with VLAN IDs,you can create staticprivate networks.
To convert an unmanagedfabric to a host-managedfabric, use the AssignVLAN ID Range action.
About Network DomainsDescribes the purpose of network domains in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
• About the Default Network Domain
• About User-Defined Network Domains
• Editing Attributes of a User-Defined Network Domain
A network domain is a container for fabrics, managed networks, and privatenetworks. The network domain handles the relationship between the physical fabricsand the virtual assets, such as virtualization hosts or server pools. The fabrics providedata links and IP subnets to the network domain, which then provides networks to thevirtualization hosts and server pools.
Within the network domain, networks that have been discovered or specified areavailable for assignment. These are called public networks because their IP addressspace has been specified for their exclusive use. Another type of network is private,that is, the network is created using an IP address space that the network domainallocates to it.
A fabric can contribute to more than one network domain. When a network domainhas more than one fabric, you designate one of the fabrics as the anchor fabric, whichis the fabric from which new networks are created.
Public networks can be members of more than one network domain because their IPaddresses are specific and dedicated. Private networks exist only within a specificnetwork domain so two network domains could construct a private network with thesame IP address without a conflict.
In Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center, networks become part of a network domainin the following ways:
• An asset that has a network is discovered.
• A user creates a network.
About Network Domains
7-4 Configuration Reference
• A network is created when it is required. This is a dynamic network.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center operates on more than one layer of the OpenSystems Interconnection model, using the network domain. Table 7-4 shows what thenetwork domain manages in the physical to logical stack.
Table 7-4 Elements of a Network Domain
Layer Asset What Is Managed Capability
Layer 3
Network: IP address
For Ethernet: fabricnetworks
For InfiniBand: non-fabricnetworks
IP subnet and mask
IP address range
VLAN or Partition
Services
Routing
The network providesconnectivity.
Layer 2
Data links
For a tagged Ethernet:VLAN
For an untagged Ethernet:portID
For InfiniBand: partition
VLAN IDs
Partition keys (P-key)
A virtual host uses thevirtual NIC and a virtualswitch in a VLAN orpartition.
Layer 1
Physical: switches, ports,host bus adapters
Fabrics Varies, by type of fabric.See Table 7-3
Varies by type of fabric.See Table 7-3
About the Default Network DomainDescribes the purpose of the system-defined network domain in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
The Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center software always has a Default NetworkDomain and all networks are members of it. If you have upgraded your productsoftware from the previous release, the existing managed networks are now in theDefault Network Domain. A new network becomes a member of the default networkdomain. If you direct the new network to a user-defined network domain, the networkis also a member of that network domain.
About User-Defined Network DomainsDescribes network domains in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Like the default network domain, a user-defined network domain provides networkresources to a server pool or virtualization host. You create a network domain tosupport the use of virtualization hosts, server pools, or a virtual datacenter. Forexample, a virtual datacenter uses server, storage, and network resources in a dynamicway, allocating and releasing resources whenever necessary. The network domainprovides the network resources to the virtual datacenter.
When you create a network domain, you set a limit on the number of networks thatcan be created in the network domain. Increase the number of networks whenaccounts in a virtual datacenter are not able to create vnets.
A new user-defined network domain includes the address space specified as privateby the RFC 1918 specification. These addresses cannot be routed to the Internet andprovide a way for organizations to create intranets. If you organization uses a portionof this private address space, reserve these IP addresses when you create a networkdomain so that the network domain does not use them.
About Network Domains
Configure Networks 7-5
Editing Attributes of a User-Defined Network DomainProcedure for changing the attributes of a network domain in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can change the name and description of the network domain and you can changethe number of dynamic networks that are in use simultaneously.
1. Expand Networks in the Navigation pane.
2. Click the network domain.
3. Click Edit Attributes in the Actions pane.
The Details tab is displayed in the center pane. You can now change the NameDescription, and Number of Networks fields.
4. Edit the name or description or increase the number of networks.
5. Click Save.
About NetworksDescribes how networks support virtualization hosts in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
• Requirements for a Network
• Limitations of Networks in Previous Versions
• Overview of Public Networks and Private Networks
• Assigning Networks to a User-Defined Network Domain
• About Bandwidth Management
• About IPMP Groups
• About Link Aggregations
• Creating a Trunk Link Aggregation
• Creating a DLMP Link Aggregation
In Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center, networks are the discovered and managedIP subnets. Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center manages network resources for itsvirtualization hosts.
Note:
These networks are part of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center'svirtualization services. For a description of the networks that support theproduct, see the planning information in Installation for Oracle Solaris OperatingSystems or Installation for Linux Operating System.
Networks are associated with a single virtualization host or a server pool, whichcontain multiple virtualization hosts. When you assign a network to a server pool, the
About Networks
7-6 Configuration Reference
network is accessible to each virtualization hosts in the pool and every guest of eachvirtualization host.
You can use networks to do the following:
• Manage individual virtualization hosts
• Connect virtualization hosts to the Proxy Controller
• Allow guests to communicate with each other or with the Internet
• Connect remote JMX with the public API
A network depends on the physical network interface card (PNIC) that is available tothe host. You can create one network for each physical network interface card. If onehost has two PNICs, it is a good practice to create two networks: a managementnetwork and a data network. Then place all virtual hosts on the data network, keepingthem separate from the management network. The management network is dedicatedto giving access to internal resources of the data center.
Figure 7-1 shows how two virtualization hosts participate in two networks. The actualnetwork connection is made to the PNICs in the virtualization host. Network A isconnected to PNIC 1 of both hosts and Network B is connected to PNIC 2 of the hosts.
Figure 7-1 Network with Virtual Hosts
Requirements for a NetworkRequirements for assigning and using networks in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
About Networks
Configure Networks 7-7
A network requires a physical network interface or a link aggregation and thefollowing specifications:
• IP address and netmask or CIDR format
• If you use static IP addressing, the IP address of the management interface
If you use dynamic IP addressing, the range of allowed IP addresses and thegateway address
Before you attach a network to a server pool, verify that each virtualization host in theserver pool has a physical network interface to the network so that all members of thepool can continue to share the network resources of the server pool.
Limitations of Networks in Previous VersionsDescribes networks that share CIDR addresses.
InfiniBand networks that share a CIDR or sub-blocks of the same CIDR (ClasslessInter-Domain Routing) are called overlapping networks. The support for thisconfiguration has been enhanced through several product releases, as shown in
Table 7-5 Comparison of Overlapping Network Configuration for InfiniBand
Product Version Default Action To Change
Release 12.2.1.0.0 andolder
Shared CIDRs are not allowed.Reconfigure an asset before it isdiscovered.
No change.
Release 12.2.2.0.0 toVersion 12.3.0.0.0
Shared CIDRs are allowed butdisabled by default.
You can allow InfiniBandnetworks to overlap using Enabling OverlappingNetworks
Release 12.3.1.0.0 Shared CIDRs are enabled forInfiniBand by default.
You can prevent overlappingnetworks using DisablingOverlapping Networks
In Versions 12.2.1.0.0 or earlier, verify that the InfiniBand networks comply with thefollowing constraints. If not, reconfigure the asset before it is discovered.
• No assets with overlapping management networks. For example, 192.0.2.1/21 and192.0.2.1/24 are overlapping. However, you can use the same CIDR (not sub-block)for different assets. For example, you can use 192.0.2.1/22 as a CIDR for theEthernet network for two assets.
• No overlapping private networks. For example, two private networks cannot havethe same CIDR.
• No overlapping public networks. However, you can use the same CIDR (not sub-block) for different assets. For example, you can use 192.2.0.0/22 as a CIDR for thepublic EoIB network for multiple engineered systems.
Starting in Release 12.2.2.0.0, you can configure InfiniBand networks to share a CIDR.However, when you allow networks to have the same CIDR, you must ensure that allthe NFS shares used by storage libraries have a unique pathname. Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center identifies an NFS share by its CIDR, its NFS server, and the sharename. When the CIDR addresses are the same, either each NFS server must have a
About Networks
7-8 Configuration Reference
unique name or each share must have a unique name. Use the following procedure toallow overlapping InfiniBand networks. You must have the Ops Center Admin role tochange the value of a product property variable.
Disabling Overlapping NetworksProcedure for changing the default operation of the product to disallow networks toshare a CIDR.
Starting in Release 12.3.1.0.0, InfiniBand networks can share a CIDR by default. Youmust ensure that any NFS shares used by storage libraries have a unique pathname. Ifyou prefer to disallow networks from sharing a CIDR and prevent networks fromoverlapping, change the default value, using the following procedure. You must havethe Ops Center Admin role to change the value of a product property variable.
1. Log in to the Enterprise Controller.
2. Click Administration in the Navigation pane.
3. Click Enterprise Controller.
4. Click Configuration in the center pane.
5. In the Subsystem field, click Network/Fabric Manager.
The oem.oc.networkmgmt.ib.overlapping.enabled property's defaultvalue is true.
6. Click in the Value field to edit it. Change the value to false.
7. Click the Save Properties icon.
8. Stop the Enterprise Controller:/opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/ecadm stop
9. Start the Enterprise Controller:/opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/ecadm start
Enabling Overlapping NetworksProcedure for changing the default operation of the product to disallow networks toshare a CIDR.
In Releases 12.2.2.0.0 through 12.3.0.0, InfiniBand networks can share a CIDR, but thecapability is disabled by default. If you prefer to allow networks to share a CIDR,change the default value using the following procedure. You must have the OpsCenter Admin role to change the value of a product property variable. You mustensure that any NFS shares used by storage libraries have a unique pathname.
1. Log in to the Enterprise Controller.
2. Click Administration in the Navigation pane.
3. Click Enterprise Controller.
4. Click Configuration in the center pane.
5. In the Subsystem field, click Network/Fabric Manager.
In Releases 12.2.2.0.0 through 12.3.0.0, theoem.oc.networkmgmt.ib.overlapping.enabled property's default value isfalse.
About Networks
Configure Networks 7-9
6. Click in the Value field to edit it. Change the value to true.
7. Click the Save Properties icon.
8. Stop the Enterprise Controller:/opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/ecadm stop
9. Start the Enterprise Controller:/opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/ecadm start
Overview of Public Networks and Private NetworksDescribes the types of networks in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Networks are introduced into Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center in the followingsways:
• By discovering the fabric that supports existing networks. All the attributes arediscovered but, other than the name and description, they cannot be changed. Allnetworks of a discovered fabric are in the Default network domain.
• By specifying the network completely, using the resources provided by a fabric.Use the Define Network action to specify the IP addresses and the VLAN IDs foran Ethernet network, based on what the fabric can provide. To create untaggednetworks, specify a VLAN ID of -1. For InfiniBand networks, the P-keys areassigned automatically.
Note:
In previous versions of the product software, this action was called ManageNetwork.
• The Create Private Network action creates a network from the resources of a user-defined network domain. Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center allocates the IPaddress from the addresses available within the network domain.
If you are creating networks for the use of virtual datacenters, create a private networkto ensure that the virtual datacenter has exclusive use of the IP address space that itgets from the network domain, as described in Creating Private Networks ina Virtual Datacenter.
Note:
The Automated Installer for Oracle Solaris 11 uses the installadm service toidentify all network interfaces and adds them to the /var/ai/ai-webserver/listen-addresses.conf file.
When you add a network interface, run the following command to update theinstalladm service and ensure the Automated Installer has access to allnetwork interfaces:
svcadm refresh system/install/server
To see the list of network interfaces handled by the installadm service, viewthe /var/ai/ai-webserver/listen-addresses.conf file.
About Networks
7-10 Configuration Reference
Assigning Networks to a User-Defined Network DomainProcedure for adding a network to a network domain in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
All networks are in the Default network domain, but a network can be a member ofmore than one user-defined network domains. You place a network into a user-defined network domain so that the network is available to the server pools associatedwith the network domain. Use the Assign Network action to place a network into aspecific network domain.
1. Expand Networks in the Navigation pane.
2. Select the user-defined network domain.
3. Select Assign Network in the Actions pane.
Figure 7-2 Assign Network
4. Select a network. If the network is does not share its IP addresses with any othernetwork, select the Private Network option.
5. Click Assign Network to submit the job.
About Bandwidth ManagementDescribes in data link’s bandwidth flow in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
A data link is a physical NIC, an aggregated link, or a virtual NIC. When a new datalink is created, the operating system sets the default bandwidth flow. You cannotremove this flow. The flow is removed only when the physical link is removed.
In Oracle Solaris 11 operating system environments, you can manage the bandwidthflow of a data link, prioritizing the network traffic on the link and setting themaximum bandwidth limit.
About Networks
Configure Networks 7-11
Managing the Bandwidth Flows for a Data LinkProcedure for adding or changing a bandwidth flow in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
1. Expand Assets in the Navigation pane.
2. Select an Oracle Solaris 11 operating system.
3. Click the Networks tab in the center pane.
4. Click the Bandwidth Management subtab in the center pane.
5. To modify a flow, click the Modify icon. To create a new link, click the Add icon,then specify a name for the flow and the physical network interface.
The name of flow must meet the following requirements:
• The first character must be alphabetic.
• All characters must be alphanumeric: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, underscore ('_'), period ('.'),or hyphen ('-').
• Maximum number of characters is 127.
6. Set the new bandwidth properties, as described in Properties of Bandwidth Flow.
Properties of Bandwidth FlowLists the attributes of bandwidth flow in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
• Priority: Set the priority of the network traffic on the link as high, medium or low.
• Bandwidth Limit: Enable the bandwidth limit to allocate guaranteed bandwidth tothe specified link. Enter the maximum value for bandwidth limit in Kbps, Mbps, orGbps.
• Set attributes for the data flow to identify its network traffic:
– Local and Remote IP: The source and destination IP address.
– Transport: The Internet Protocol used such as TCP, UDP. SCTP, ICMP.
– Ports: The source and destination ports for TCP, UDP, and SCTP.
– DS Field: The type of service field in the IP packets' header.
About IPMP GroupsDescribes each operating system's way of defining IPMP groups.
For information about how IPMP groups work in Oracle Solaris 11.2, see http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E36784_01/html/E37476/index.html. For informationabout how IPMP groups work in Oracle Solaris 11.1, see http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E26502_01/html/E28993/index.html. For OracleSolaris 10 documentation, see IP Services at http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/documentation/solaris-10-192992.html.
From the Network tab, view and manage IPMP groups as shown in Figure 7-3.
About Networks
7-12 Configuration Reference
Figure 7-3 IPMP Groups
For all types of networks, you create an IPMP group by specifying the following:
• The link-based failure detection is enabled by default. To use, Probe-Based failuredetection, select the Probe-Based option and provide the test address to track theinterface status.
• You must assign the data addresses for the physical interfaces in the IPMP group.Data traffic flow uses the data addresses hosted on the IPMP interface and flowsthrough the active interfaces of the group.
• The active and the standby interfaces of the group. By default, an interface addedto an IPMP group is active. You can configure as many standby interfaces as youwant for the group. The list of available network interfaces contains the interfacesthat qualify, depending on the operating system, the type of network you select,and the network's existing attributes.
– For an Ethernet network on Oracle Solaris 10:
◆ If the network has a VLAN ID, you can select the Tagged mode and you cankeep or change the VLAN ID.
◆ If the network has a VLAN ID, you can select the Untagged mode and youcan keep or change the VLAN ID.
◆ If the network does not have a VLAN ID, the option to make it a tagged oruntagged network is not available.
– For an Ethernet network on Oracle Solaris 11, you can specify its media type:
◆ For the Ethernet media type, the resulting options are the same as for anEthernet network in the Oracle Solaris 10 environment.
◆ For the InfiniBand media type for a network with a VLAN ID, the P-Keyfield is displayed.
– For an InfiniBand network on Oracle Solaris 10, no network interfaces areincluded in the list of available network interfaces.
– For an InfiniBand network on Oracle Solaris 11:
◆ For the InfiniBand media type for a network with a VLAN ID, the P-Keyfield is displayed and you can keep or change its value.
◆ For the Ethernet media type, the P-Key field is not available.
Creating an IPMP GroupProcedure for creating an IPMP Group in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
About Networks
Configure Networks 7-13
1. Select the Oracle Solaris OS in the Assets section.
2. Click the Network tab in the center pane.
3. Click the IPMP Groups subtab in the pane. The existing IPMP groups are listed inthe subtab.
4. Click the Create IPMP Group icon to open the Create IPMP Group wizard.
Figure 7-4 Specify IPMP Group Details for an Ethernet Network on OracleSolaris 11
Figure 7-5 Specify IPMP Group Details for an InfiniBand Network on OracleSolaris 11
5. Enter the following details for the IPMP group, as shown in Figure 7-4:
a. Provide a name for the IPMP group.
b. Select a network from the list of available network interfaces.
c. Depending on the type of network you select, specify the characteristics of thenetwork interfaces.
About Networks
7-14 Configuration Reference
d. The Link-Based failure detection is always enabled by default. Select whetheryou want to also enable Probe-Based failure detection.
e. Select each interface you want in the IPMP group from the Available NetworkInterfaces list and click the right arrow to include the interface in the group.
Click Next to specify the NIC settings.
6. If you enabled probe-based failure detection, enter the test address for the NICs.
7. Select the interfaces that are in standby mode.
You must have at least one active interface in the group. Click Next.
8. Enter the data address for the active interfaces of the group and select whether theinterface has a failover and click Next.
9. Review the information and click Finish to create the IPMP group.
About Link AggregationsDescribes Link Aggregation Control Protocol in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
The link aggregation conforms to the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) asdescribed in the IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Standard specification. The switchthat communicates with the network interface must also support LACP.
To create a link aggregation, specify the following:
• Load balancing policy
• Link Aggregation Control Policy (LACP) mode and timer
• MAC address policy and if required, the MAC address
From the Network tab, you can create and manage the link aggregations as shown in Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-6 Link Aggregations
Creating a Trunk Link AggregationProcedure for creating a link aggregation (LAG) in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
About Networks
Configure Networks 7-15
1. Expand Assets in the Navigation pane.
2. Select an OS asset.
3. Click the Network tab in the center pane.
4. Click the Link Aggregation subtab.
5. Click the Create Link Aggregation icon to open the wizard.
6. Enter the name of the link aggregation. By default, the name starts with aggr.Append a number to make the name unique.
7. Select the network interfaces to be in the aggregation by selecting each one fromthe list of available interfaces and clicking the right arrow to include them in the listof network interfaces in the link aggregation. Click Next.
8. Click the Trunk Link Aggregation Mode.
9. Accept the default options or specify alternative options:
• For Load Balancing Policy, set the type of packet identification in outgoingtraffic. Packets with the same identification are routed to the same networkinterface in a link aggregation. The L4 policy is the fastest and the default.
• For LACP mode, set the type of LACPDU or packet required between the linkaggregation and the switch. The value of off requires no packet, the value ofactive sends packets at intervals set by the LACP timer, and a value ofpassive sends a packet when the switch sends one.
• For LACP timer, set the time for the LACP active mode. The default is 1 second.
• For MAC Address Policy, select either Auto or Fixed. The Auto policy generatesthe MAC address. The Fixed policy uses the MAC address you enter in theMAC Address field.
Click Next to view the summary.
10. Review the information and click Finish to create the link aggregation.
About Datalink Multipathing Aggregation (DLMP)Describes DLMP’s method of aggregating network interfaces.
About Networks
7-16 Configuration Reference
Link aggregation consists of configuring several network interfaces together topresent a single, logical unit that increases throughput of network traffic. OracleSolaris supports two types of link aggregations:
• Trunk aggregation has been supported in Ops Center for several releases.
• Datalink multipathing (DLMP) aggregation is now supported in 12.3.1.0 for assetsrunning Oracle Solaris 11.1 and later.
DLMP aggregations support the following features:
• The aggregation can span multiple switches.
• No switch configuration is required on the switches.
• You can change between a trunk aggregation and a DLMP aggregation when theoptions are common to both types.
In a trunk aggregation, every port is associated with every configured datalink overthe aggregation. In a DLMP aggregation, a port is associated with any of theaggregation's configured datalinks as well as with the primary interface and VNICs.
A trunk aggregation can handle network traffic of varying loads, but because this typeof aggregation works with only one switch, the switch becomes a single point offailure. Although a DLMP aggregation does not require multiple switches, this is itsstrength:
• If the number of VNICs exceeds the number of underlying links, an individual portis associated with multiple datalinks.
• If a port fails, all the datalinks that use that port are distributed among the otherports transparently to the user and independently of any external switchesconnected to the aggregation.
• If a switch fails, the aggregation continues to provide connectivity to its datalinksby using other switches in the aggregation.
See https://docs.oracle.com/cd/E26502_01/html/E28993/gmdlu.html#scrolltoc for acomparison.
Creating a DLMP Link AggregationProcedure for creating a link aggregation (LAG) in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
1. Expand Assets in the Navigation pane.
2. Select an OS asset.
3. Click the Network tab in the center pane.
4. Click the Link Aggregation subtab.
5. Click the Create Link Aggregation icon to open the wizard.
6. Enter the name of the link aggregation. By default, the name starts with aggr.Append a number to make the name unique.
7. Select the network interfaces to be in the aggregation by selecting each one fromthe list of available interfaces and clicking the right arrow to include them in the listof network interfaces in the link aggregation. Click Next.
About Networks
Configure Networks 7-17
8. Click the Data Link Multipathing (DLMP) Link Aggregation Mode.
9. Click Next to review the configuration.
10. Click Finish to create the link aggregation.
Properties of a NetworkOverview of network properties in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Topics
• About IPv4 and IPv6 Protocols
• About Routing Modes
• Managing Static Routes for the Network
• Address Allocation Method
• Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
About IPv4 and IPv6 ProtocolsDescription of the supported Internet Protocol formats in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
Some environments have a mix of IPv4 and IPv6. Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter is "IPv6-aware." If an asset has an IPv6 network interface, Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center can read it and displays its information, but it cannot provisionan IPv6 network or use IPv6 networks to discover, monitor, or provision assets.
About Routing ModesDescribes the various routing modes used by virtual hosts in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
A virtual host uses the network assigned to it according to the host's routing mode.You specify a virtual host's routing mode during its initial configuration if you do notaccept the default mode, Automatic Routing. Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Centersupports the following routing modes:
• Automatic Routing – This is the default routing mode. Applying the static routesdepends on the following conditions:
– If your site defined a default gateway or static route or retrieved one from theDHCP server, this route is used and dynamic routing is disabled.
– If no default gateway or static route is available, dynamic routing is enabled.
• Dynamic Routing Off – The virtual host uses the default gateway and any staticroutes configured for the network. The default gateway is retrieved from theDHCP server.
• Dynamic Routing On – The virtual host uses routes provided by the dynamicrouting service. The default gateway and any static routes configured for thenetwork are ignored.
Properties of a Network
7-18 Configuration Reference
Managing Static Routes for the NetworkProcedure for adding routes for the subnet of a network in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
Static routes specify the route for external access. Although you define a defaultgateway for a network, it might not reach a particular subnet. In this case, you mustalso provide a static route for the subnet.
When you create a network, you can specify the static route. To add static routes afterthe network has been created, use the following procedure.
1. Click Managed Networks in the Navigation pane.
2. Select a network from the list of networks.
3. Click Edit Network Attributes in the Actions pane.
4. Click the Add icon in the Static Routes table. A row is added to the table.
5. Enter the values for destination IP, netmask, and gateway.
6. Click Finish.
You can delete a static route and change the order of the routes using the icons in theStatic Routes table.
Address Allocation MethodLists the options for allocating IP addresses for new networks in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
When you define a new network, you specify how its IP address is assigned:
• Static IP: You enter a specific IP address.
• Use System Allocated IP: Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center assigns anavailable IP address.
• Do not allocate IP: No IP address is assigned.
• DHCP: Use the DHCP service to acquire an IP address.
When you create an Ethernet network without an SR-IOV connection for a controldomain, you have an additional option: Do Not Plumb Interface.
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)Lists the network interface cards that can support changes in the MTU in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
The default size for the network's Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is 1500 bytes. Ifyour network interface card is one of the following types, you can change the size ofthe MTU to a size between 576 and 9216 bytes. However, to assign the network to alogical domain, the minimum MTU size is 1500 bytes.
• e1000g
• ce
Properties of a Network
Configure Networks 7-19
• nxge
• nge
• bge
• xge
• hme
• ixgbe
• hxge
• ipge
• igb
When you specify a size greater than 1500 bytes, Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter modifies the network interface card's MTU size. For other types of networkinterface cards, the MTU is changed when the card's driver firmware is updated tosupport the new MTU size. However, to change the MTU value for an IPMP group,you must edit the MTU value manually.
Note:
When you provision an operating system, the MTU size resets to the defaultvalue. You must change the MTU again after you provision the system.
Network UtilizationLists the options displaying information about utilization of network resources inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center collects information every five minutes onevery managed asset and displays the last hour of data on the asset. To see utilizationdata for a network over longer periods of time, up to six months, create a NetworkUtilization chart, which includes operating system, operating system for a virtualmachine, virtual host, and server pool. You can also create a network utilization chartfor an OS group or host group.
About Network Connectivity Information in the User InterfaceDescription of how network connections are represented in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
Connectivity is the network interface of the system. The Connectivity tab of theselected asset's dashboard displays appropriate information, depending on the assettype.
For a hardware server, the Connectivity tabs displays information about NetworkInterface Card (NIC), including name, connection status, MAC address, and thecorresponding IP address.
For switch hardware, the Connectivity tab shows information about each port.
For an Oracle Solaris OS, the Connectivity tab includes IPMP groups and aggregatedlinks.
Network Utilization
7-20 Configuration Reference
• The IPMP Groups subtab shows the group's name, its assigned network, and thetype of failure detection, either link-based, probe-based, or both. For each IPMPgroup, the details include the state of the connection for each NIC, whether it is instandby mode or failover mode, and the IP address the NIC supports.
• The Link Aggregation subtab shows the aggregation's name, its MAC address, andits attributes. For each aggregated link, the subtab shows the state of the connectionfor each NIC, whether it is in standby mode or failover mode, and the IP addressthe NIC supports.
For a virtualization host, the Connectivity tab, shown in Figure 7-7, displays the OSinformation and information about bandwidth and the virtual hosts that use thenetworks.
Figure 7-7
When you attach or assign networks or when you create virtual hosts, Figure 7-8shows an example of a step in the wizard where you configure the networkconnection.
Figure 7-8 Configure Interfaces
About Network HardwareDescription of supported network hardware and how ports are represented in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
• About PCIe Endpoints
• About Single Root I/O Virtualization
About Network Hardware
Configure Networks 7-21
• Network Switches
• About Virtual Network Switches
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center can manage Sun Ethernet 10GbE Fabricswitches and Sun Datacenter InfiniBand switches. These switches reside in the systemor blade system and provide the switch fabric.
The InfiniBand Gateway switch can expose the ports of a server that resides on anInfiniBand partition to an Ethernet network. To create an Ethernet on InfiniBand(EoIB) interface on the switch, you associate the switch's external port (eport) with theInfiniBand partition where the server resides, creating a virtual NIC (vNIC). Theserver's ports are displayed on the Switch Connectivity tab in the center pane.
About PCIe EndpointsDescription of PCIe bus and its devices in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
A PCIe bus consists of the PCIe bus itself and all of its PCI switches and devices.Oracle VM Server for SPARC software can assign a PCIe bus (also known as a rootcomplex) to a domain. An I/O domain that is configured with an entire PCIe bus isalso known as a root domain.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center also supports the NIU-compatible cards inT5x20, T3 or T4 systems if an XAUI card is present. You can assign the NIU device to aLogical Domain in the same way you assign a PCIe bus or End Point.
Figure 7-9 PCIe and Buses
About Single Root I/O VirtualizationDescribes the virtual functions of a physical network card suing SR-IOV in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
InfiniBand switches support Single Root I/O Virtualization (SR-IOV), so that a singlePCIe device (a physical network card) is presented as multiple PCIe devices. SR-IOVrelies on both the hardware BIOS and the hypervisor layer to create these virtual PCIedevices. Each virtual PCIe device specializes in an operation called its virtual function(VF), but does not have the complete functionality of the physical PCIe device.
About Network Hardware
7-22 Configuration Reference
By defining a network on a virtual PCIe device, one physical PCIe device supportsseveral networks as if each network had exclusive access to the device. Figure 7-10shows the physical PCIe devices available to a virtualization host. When one of thephysical functions is selected, its virtual functions are also displayed.
Figure 7-10 SR-IOV Tab
When you create a virtual host, you specify its network connection. If the networks arebacked by an InfiniBand fabric, you can specify that the virtual host uses a virtualfunction by checking the SR-IOV option.
About the Network Interface Card (NIC)Description of network interface cards and how they are represented in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
The Network Interface Card (NIC) is the physical connection between a networkswitch and a network. When you create a network or attach an asset to a network, youselect the NIC. You can create one network for each physical network interface card.To see the NICs for a server, select the server and then click the Connectivity tab. TheServer Processor Connectivity table lists all of the NICs.
Network SwitchesDescribes the support for network switches in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center can manage Sun Ethernet 10GbE Fabricswitches and Sun Datacenter InfiniBand switches. These switches reside in the systemor blade system and provide the switch fabric. The Cisco Catalyst® 4948 Switch is alsosupported.
For the Ethernet switches, both tagged and untagged VLANs are supported.
If you use an InfiniBand switch in an Ethernet network, the ports on the switch haveEthernet names.
For more information about these switches, see the product documentation:
• For the Sun Ethernet 10GbE Fabric switch, see http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19934-01/index.html
• For the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch, see http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E36256_01
About Network Hardware
Configure Networks 7-23
• For the Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36, see http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E26698_01
About Virtual Network SwitchesDescribes a virtual switch in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Oracle Solaris network virtualization provides an internal virtual network solution inwhich a virtualization host communicates with its virtual hosts as if using a networkhardware. A virtual network consists of virtual network interface cards (VNICs) andvirtual switches. A VNIC depends on a physical NIC and handles incoming andoutgoing data in the same ways as a physical NIC. A virtual switch is created from thehypervisor layer of Oracle Solaris to provide the data path between the virtual hoststhat reside on the same server and so must communicate with each other using thesame ports. Figure 7-11 shows the relationship among the elements of a virtualnetwork built on a single system with one NIC. Three VNICs support three zones. Thevirtual switch handles the communication, both between the VNICS and between theVNICs and the physical NIC.
Figure 7-11 Virtual Network
In Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center, the virtual network switches are listed onthe Virtual Services tab, as shown in Figure 7-12. For a specific switch, you can also seeVNICs that use the virtual switch.
About Network Hardware
7-24 Configuration Reference
Figure 7-12 Virtual Switches
Network ProfilesLists the default profiles for network devices in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides default profiles for the followingoperations:
• Monitor Network hardware – Reports Cisco switch's connection to assets on theSwitch Connectivity tab.
• Discover a switch – Use a discovery profile with Cisco iOS credentials.
Related Resources for NetworksList of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center documents with additional information.
For instructions in performing actions or to learn more about the role of this feature,go to one of the following resources.
• For a description of the networks that support the product, see the planninginformation in Installation for Oracle Solaris Operating Systems or Installation for LinuxOperating System
• Mixed Network Tagging Mode Configuration in Server Pool in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center Virtualization Reference.
• Network Virtualization in the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center VirtualizationReference for information on how virtual assets use network resources.
• Deploy Networks Workflow in the library at http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/deploy.htm
• For more information about these switches, see Switch Details.
• For the Sun Ethernet 10GbE Fabric switch, see http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19934-01/index.html
• For the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch, see http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E36256_01
• For the Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36, see http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E26698_01
Network Profiles
Configure Networks 7-25
• For information about how IPMP groups work in Oracle Solaris 11.2, see http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E36784_01/html/E37476/index.html. Forinformation about how IPMP groups work in Oracle Solaris 11.1, see http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E26502_01/html/E28993/index.html. For OracleSolaris 10 documentation, see IP Services at http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/documentation/solaris-10-192992.html.
•
Related Resources for Networks
7-26 Configuration Reference
8Create Plans and Profiles
Overview of plans and profiles in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
This chapter provides an overview of the concepts of operational plans, deploymentplans, and profiles. Detailed information is covered in the corresponding featurechapters.
Topics
• Introduction to Plans and Profiles
• Roles for Plans and Profiles
• Actions Available for Plans and Profiles
• Location of Plan and Profile Information in the User Interface
• About Version Control
• Operational Plans and Profiles
• Profiles and Policies
• Overview of Deployment Plans
• Managing Deployment Plans
• About Applying a Deployment Plan
• Related Resources for Plans and Profiles
Introduction to Plans and ProfilesOverview of the purpose and definition of plans and profiles in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses a combination of plans and profiles toreduce complexity and increase consistency when you perform standard managementand operational activities, such as configuring hardware, installing servers, updatingoperating systems, and creating virtual systems.
A plan defines the actions and the targets. A profile defines a task, how the task isperformed and enables you to define what is allowed, and not allowed, to be installedon a system. Together, plans and profiles enable you to create a reusable set ofprocedures to perform tasks, such as configuring hardware, upgrading firmware,installing and patching operating systems, and creating virtual systems and guests.
You create, manage, and access all plans and profiles in the Plan Management sectionof the user interface. Plan Management contains three basic components:
Create Plans and Profiles 8-1
• Profiles and Policies: Profiles define the configuration of components for a specifictype of system and task, such as the naming schema and configuration options touse when creating a zone or logical domain. Update policies define the level ofinteraction you want when applying patches and packages.
• Deployment Plans: Perform standard management activities. A Deployment Planprovides a framework of steps that you need to complete one or more tasks. Youcustomize the plan to include specific profiles for the steps. Complex deploymentplans enable you to add operational plans as a step. When you apply a DeploymentPlan, you select one or more targets, or group of targets, on which to complete thetasks.
• Operational Profiles and Plans: Perform one or more operational activities, such asscripts and utilities to fix common problems, monitoring rule configurations andthresholds, and a knowledge base that you can create based on the incidents thatoccur in your environment.
Roles for Plans and ProfilesList of required roles for plan management in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Table 5 lists the tasks and the role required to complete the task. Contact youradministrator if you do not have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. Seethe Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration for information about thedifferent roles and the permissions they grant.
Table 8-1 Plan Management Roles and Permissions
Task Role
View a profile or plan Read
Create a profile or plan Profile Plan Administrator
Edit a profile or plan Profile Plan Administrator
Copy a profile or plan Profile Plan Administrator
Delete a profile or plan Profile Plan Administrator
Apply a plan The plan determines the role required.
Actions Available for Plans and ProfilesList of available operations in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses plans and profiles to perform many tasksin your data center.
The following types of plans and profiles are available:
• Deployment plans and Profiles: Several types, or categories, of profiles areavailable. Deployment plans and profiles perform a variety of tasks, includingdiscovering and adding assets to the UI, deploying or updating operating systemsand firmware, creating zones, and creating logical domains.
• Operational Plans and Profiles: Operational profiles are a specific type of profilethat you can create to store a user-defined script. The associated operational plandeploys the script to selected targets.
Roles for Plans and Profiles
8-2 Configuration Reference
You can create, copy, edit, and delete profiles and create, copy, edit, deploy, and deleteplans. In addition to deploying operational plans on their own, you can add anoperational plan as a step in a complex deployment plan. See Operational Plans andProfiles, Profiles and Policies, and Overview of Deployment Plans for moreinformation about the actions you can perform.
Location of Plan and Profile Information in the User InterfaceLists the navigation instructions to locate plans and profiles in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Profiles, plans, and templates are available in the Plan Management section of the UI.
Table 8-2 Location of Profile and Plan Information in the UI
Object Location
Deployment Plans Expand the Plan Management section of the Navigation pane. Click Deployment Plansfor a list of existing plans. To locate a specific plan, expand the folder for the plan youwant, such as Configure Server Hardware.
Profiles Expand the Plan Management section of the Navigation pane, then scroll down toProfiles and Policies. Click Profiles and Policies for a list of existing profiles. Expand thefolder for the type of profile you want, such as RAID Controller.
Update Policies Expand the Plan Management section of the Navigation pane, then scroll down toProfiles and Policies. Click Profiles and Policies, then scroll to the bottom of the section toview the OS Update Policies. Click Update Policies to list the existing OS Update Policiesin the center pane.
Update Profiles Expand the Plan Management section of the Navigation pane, then scroll down toProfiles and Policies. Click Profiles and Policies, then scroll to the bottom of the section toview the OS Update Profiles. Click Update Profiles to list all default and user-defined OSUpdate Profiles in the center pane.
Operational Plans Expand the Plan Management section of the Navigation pane, then scroll down toOperational Plans. Expand Operational Plans for a list of user-defined operational plans.
Operational Profiles Expand the Plan Management section of the Navigation pane, then scroll down toOperational Plans. Expand Operational Plans, then click Operational Profiles for a list ofuser-defined operational profiles.
Monitoring Policies Expand the Plan Management section of the Navigation pane, then scroll down toOperational Plans. Expand Operational Plans, then expand Monitoring Policies todisplay a list of system-defined and user defined monitoring policies. System definedpolicies all begin with OC.
About Version ControlDescribes in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Profile and plan versions are numbered sequentially. When you create a profile orplan, the version number is one. When you edit a profile or plan, you create a versionthat is referenced by a new number.
When you create a version, you have the option to automatically change the relatedplan during the update. When you do not choose that option, the operational anddeployment plans that are using the profile are not updated with the new version. Forexample, you have a firmware profile that is using firmware image A, the profileversion is one. You want to update the profile to use the latest firmware image, B.
Location of Plan and Profile Information in the User Interface
Create Plans and Profiles 8-3
When you update the profile to change the image to B, version two of the profile iscreated. When you have five plans that are using version one of the firmware profile,all of those plans continue to use version one and image A. When you want the plansto use image B, you must manually update the plans to reference version two of theprofile.
When you edit a deployment plan that is referred to by another plan in a complexplan, the referring plan is not automatically updated to refer to the edited plan'sversion unless you choose the option when you edit the plan.
You can view version details by highlighting the plan, then clicking the View VersionDetails icon. Use the arrows to view the different versions. When you want a plan touse the new version of the profile, edit the plan and associate it with the correctversion of the profile. You can edit the following fields in an Operational Plan:Description, Failure Policy, and Associated Profile. You cannot edit the name of aprofile or plan. When you want a different name, you must copy or create a profileand plan.
You can delete a version of a profile or plan. When you delete a version and more thanone version exists, the previous version becomes the default. When only one version ofthe plan exists, both the profile and plan are deleted. When the plan is used in otherplans, then the Delete Deployment Plan option is not enabled.
Operational Plans and ProfilesOverview of actions done by operational plans in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
An Operational Profile performs one or more routine tasks. You must have anOperational Plan to execute an Operational Profile.
Topics
• About Operational Profiles
• About Editing an Operational Profile or Plan
• Copying an Operational Profile
• Copying an Operational Plan
• About Deleting an Operational Profile or Plan
About Operational ProfilesDescribes profiles that perform actions on assets in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
The profile defines one or more operations that are to be performed on a managedresource or group of resources. For example, deploying thresholds onto a managedresource, or performing state changing actions such as shutting down all logicaldomains and then shutting down an Oracle VM Server for SPARC.
The profile uses a shell script to define the operations. You can use an existing profileor create a profile when you create the plan. To create the profile, either download ashell script that is on the Enterprise Controller (EC Shell script), or specify the shellscript (Remote Shell script). The EC Shell and Remote Shell differ in their location (onthe Enterprise Controller or on the remote Agent) and credentials. The EC Shell isexecuted with the credentials of the user that is logged in. The Remote Shell can run
Operational Plans and Profiles
8-4 Configuration Reference
on any managed system that contains a remote agent and is executed with rootpermissions.
Scripts and Variables for an Operational ProfileList of requirements for operational profiles in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The profile consists of a single shell script and can include asset attributes asenvironmental variables. For each profile, choose one of the following types of shellscripts:
• EC Shell: The script runs only on the Enterprise Controller and is executed withthe logged-in user's credentials.
• Remote Shell: The script can run on any managed system that contains a remoteagent and is executed with root permissions.
Note:
The uploaded shell script file cannot exceed 2 GB.
A list of supported asset attributes is available in About Asset Attributes.
About Operational PlansDescribes plans that perform actions on assets in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
An Operational Plan defines how an Operational Profile is deployed. An operationalplan defines the targets and failure policy for an operational profile. By default,creating a profile also creates an Operational Plan. You use the plan to execute theprofile on a managed resource or group of resources, such as performing statechanging actions.
You can create a simple plan, such as disabling print capabilities, and deploy the planacross a group of resources in your data center. A more sophisticated example is tocreate several Operational Plans and add them as steps in a complex type DeploymentPlan. For example, you can create an Operational Plan to shut down all logicaldomains and another Operational Plan to shut down an Oracle VM Server for SPARC.You can then add these plans as steps in a complex Deployment Plan.
Creating an Operational Profile and PlanProcedure for creating an Operational Plan and operational profile in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
Perform the following steps to create an operational profile and plan:
1. Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane, then click OperationalProfiles.
2. Click Create Profile.
3. Name the new profile and add a description.
4. Select a subtype from the list to identify the type of target for this profile. ClickNext.
Operational Plans and Profiles
Create Plans and Profiles 8-5
5. Specify the type of script, either EC Shell if the script is on the EnterpriseController’s host or Remote Shell.
6. If the script is an EC Shell script:
a. Click Choose File , navigate to its location, and select it.
b. Navigate to the file’s location and select it.
c. Click Load File.
If the script is a Remote Shell script or is not in an accessible location, create thescript in the Script field. Click the View System Variables button to see a list ofproduct-specific variables for specifying a target name, target type, a user-friendlyname, a Simple Authentication and Security Layer file, and to return a job ID.
7. Specify the number of minutes or seconds that the script can run. The default is 60minutes. Click Next.
8. In the Reboot Policy field, select a policy from the drop-down list to direct theaction of the script when the system reboots: Fail on Reboot, Success on Reboot, orRestart on Reboot.
9. (Optional) To add environment variables to either type of script, click the Addicon, then specify the variable’s name, value, whether input is required atexecution and a hint for that input.
10. Click the View Script button to review. Click Next.
11. Review the entire profile, then click Finish.
About Editing an Operational Profile or PlanDescribes in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
When you edit a profile or plan, you create a version. When you create a version, youhave the option to automatically change the related plans during the update. See“About Version Control to learn how versions are maintained.
You can view version details by highlighting the plan, then clicking the View VersionDetails icon. Use the arrows to view the different versions. When you want a plan touse the new version of the profile, edit the plan and associate it with the correctversion of the profile.
You can edit the following fields in an Operational Plan: Description, Failure Policy,and Associated Profile. You cannot edit the name of an Operational profile or plan.You cannot rename an Operational plan; you must copy or create a Operational Profileand Plan.
Copying an Operational ProfileProcedure for making a copy of an existing operational profile in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can copy an existing operational profile, rename it, and create a new profile andplan.
1. Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane, then click Operational Profiles.
Operational Plans and Profiles
8-6 Configuration Reference
2. Select the profile in the center pane that you want to copy, then click the CopyProfile icon. Or you can double-click the profile in the center pane to displayactions in the Actions pane.
3. Rename the new profile you are creating and revise the description, then clickNext.
4. (Optional) Edit the script. Click Next.
5. (Optional) Edit the variables in the Specify Additional Variables page. Click Next.
6. Review, then click Finish.
Copying an Operational PlanProcedure for making a copy of an existing Operational Plan in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can copy an existing operational plan, rename it, and create a new profile andplan.
1. Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane, then click Operational Plans.
2. Select the plan in the center pane that you want to copy, then click the Copy Planicon. Alternatively, double-click the plan in the center pane to display actions in theActions pane.
3. Rename the new plan you are creating and revise the description. You can chooseto change the Failure Policy for the new plan and change the Operational Plansteps. You can change the associated profile or plan for each step. To change theprofile or plan, click the associated profile or plan to select from a list of availableoptions. To add additional steps, click the Replicate Step icon, then select theprofile or plan from the list to associate with that step. Click Save.
4. (Optional) Edit the script. Click Next.
5. (Optional) Edit the variables in the Specify Additional Variables page. Click Next.
6. Review, then click Finish.
About Deleting an Operational Profile or PlanDescribes requirements for deleting versions of a profile or plan in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
You can delete a version of a profile, or you can delete all versions of the profile andthe associated plan. If a plan has more than one version and you delete a version, theprevious version becomes the default plan.
Note:
Deleting a version of a plan or profile might affect the Incident KnowledgeBase or deployment plans that rely on that version . Before deleting a version,verify that the version is not being used.
You can delete only a version of an operational plan that you created.
Operational Plans and Profiles
Create Plans and Profiles 8-7
Profiles and PoliciesOverview of profiles and policies in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Profiles and policies define how a job is performed and the level of interaction.
Topics
• About Profiles
• Viewing Profile Details and Associated Plans
• Creating a Profile
• Copying a Profile
• Editing a Profile
• About Policies
About ProfilesDescribes how profiles are used in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Profiles define how standard management tasks are performed. With the help ofwizards, you create a customized set of profiles. Users can use the profiles to performtasks, such as discovery and provisioning. The software has system-defined profilesfor some common OS tasks, such as reboot and check for installed security patches.You can choose to use these profiles for those actions or create your own.
With the exception of the Discovery profile, these types of management profilesrequire a deployment plan to execute the tasks on specific targets. When you create aprofile, the default setting is to create a corresponding deployment plan.
Profiles are listed in the Plan Management section of the UI and are organized bycategory. For specific information about the profiles, see the following:
• For Discovery: See “About Discovery Assets”.
• For Service Processor, RAID controllers, firmware provisioning and updating,Dynamic System Domain, OS provisioning, configuration, and updating, BootEnvironments, and BIOS Configuration, see Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops CenterOperations Reference.
• For Logical Domain, Oracle Solaris Zones, Virtual Machines, see Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center Virtualization Reference.
Viewing Profile Details and Associated PlansProcedure for displaying the contents of a profile and the plans it supports in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
Details for each profile, including the associated plans and version number aredisplayed in the center pane.
1. Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane.
2. Select the profile from the list of Profiles and Policies. Finish.
The following tabs are displayed in the center pane:
Profiles and Policies
8-8 Configuration Reference
• Details Tab
• Referrers Tab
• Version History Tab
3. Click each tab to review the details of the profile.
Details TabLists the information on a profile’s Details tab in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
The Details tab displays the profile configuration details for the current version. Asshown in Figure 8-1, the details include Name, Description, Target Type, Subtype,Version, and date and time last modified. The Profile Details and File Systems sectionsinclude the wizard selections and settings for this version of the profile.
Figure 8-1 Profile Details
Referrers TabDescribes the information on the Referrers tab for profiles in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
The Referrers tab displays all deployment plans that use the profile and the profileversion number used. For example, in Figure 8-2 two deployment plans use theprofile. The first deployment plan listed uses version 3 of the profile and the seconddeployment plan listed uses version 1 of the plan. This occurred because the profilewas edited after the profile was part of the S11.1 SPARC Large deployment plan.Because the profile was part of the plan, the plan automatically updated to use thelatest version of the profile. When the S11.1 SPARC Large - Data center A deploymentplan was created, three versions of the profile existed and the user had the option ofwhich version to associate with the plan. In this case, version 1 of the profile wasselected to be part of the plan.
Profiles and Policies
Create Plans and Profiles 8-9
Figure 8-2 Profile Referrers
Version History TabDescription of Version History tab for profiles in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
The Version History tab shows the number of versions, the profile description, thetarget type, and when the version changed. Click the View icon to display the profiledetails for that version. Figure 8-3 shows a Solaris 11 OS Provisioning profile withthree versions. By clicking the view icon in the upper left corner, you can display thedetails for the selected profile.
Figure 8-3 Profile Version History
Creating a ProfileProcedure for creating a profile in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
When you import images into the software library, a default OS profile is created forthe image. You can use the default profile, copy the default profile to create your ownprofile, or create a new profile. To preserve the default profile configuration, make acopy the profile and specify a name and description that describes the profile and anyunique properties for the profile.
The prerequisites and steps to create a profile differ, depending on the type of profileyou want to create. The following steps are an overview of how to launch the CreateProfile Wizard:
1. Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane.
2. Expand the Profiles and Policies, then select a profile type.
Profiles and Policies
8-10 Configuration Reference
3. Click Create Profile.
4. Complete the wizard, then click Finish.
Copying a ProfileProcedure for making a copy of an existing profile in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter
Copy a profile to re-use a standard configuration with some unique modifications. Forexample, you might want to copy a default operating system profile to create a user-defined profile and retain the default profile as a template.
The following steps are an overview of how to launch the Copy Profile Wizard:
1. Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane.
2. Expand the Profiles and Policies navigation tree, then select a profile.
3. Click Copy Profile.
The Create Profile - OS Provisioning Wizard is displayed.
4. Edit the name and description of the profile.
5. Edit any parameters that you want to change.
6. Click Finish.
About Editing a ProfileDescribes editing a profile in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Editing a profile enables you to create a new version or a new profile. Editing thename or description of the profile creates a new profile. Editing values other than thename or description creates a new version. When a profile is referenced by one ormore deployment plans, the default action is to update the referring plans to the newversion. Before editing a profile or plan, see “About Version Control” to learn howversions are maintained.
Editing a ProfileProcedure for changing a profile in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Perform the following steps to edit a profile:
1. Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane.
2. Expand the Profiles and Policies navigation tree, then select a profile.
3. Click Edit Profile.
4. Complete the changes, then click Finish.
About PoliciesDescribes policies for upating an operating system in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Policies are lists of actions that are explicitly approved or denied. Policies are specificto OS update and define the amount of user interaction you want when applying OS
Profiles and Policies
Create Plans and Profiles 8-11
patches and packages. For example, you might want to automate applying fixeswithout user interaction, but you might want to pause a job and require user approvalbefore performing a downgrade or uninstall. You can also deny certain actions, suchas installing patches or packages that are not certified.
Policy settings are hierarchical. When you have not defined a policy for a component,the policy for that component's parent applies. For example, it is possible to create apolicy that allows the system to install a given component, but prohibits installingspecific versions of that component.
For more information about update policies, see “Creating Update Policies” in theOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Operate Reference.
Overview of Deployment PlansDescribes the role and purpose of deployment plans in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
Deployment Plans use profiles to perform standard management activities in aconsistent and repeatable manner. A deployment plan defines the sequence ofoperations or steps that must be carried out on an asset to deploy it together with thespecification or profile that each step applies and the resources that are required toapply it such as network addresses and system names.
Deployment plans are based on a set of templates. Some templates are designed forsimple tasks and other, more complex plans, are designed to perform a series of tasks.A comprehensive set of deployment templates is available for you to use to create avariety of deployment plans. Each template is an unbound deployment plan whichdefines the steps of execution, but not the profiles and assets.
Use the template to define a task and the associated resources such as images andnetwork addresses to complete the task. You can use the templates and customizedprofiles to create plans for your data center. For each plan, you can define the courseof action to take when a step cannot be completed on a target. You can choose to stopthe job at the first failure, or attempt to complete as much as possible. In some cases,you can build complex plans by combining existing plans. For example, you mightadd an operational profile and plan to the end of a deployment plan.
Several plans contain more than one step. In some cases, you can associate steps in aplan with another plan. The associated plan is referred to as a nested plan. You can usenested plans as shared building blocks, much in the same way as profiles are used.Configuring a single nested plan once and reusing it in many other plans reduces thenumber of individual operations that you must complete in the UI. The templatesappear in the user interface in alphabetical order, not by type. However, it is useful tocategorize the plans as simple, multi-step, and complex. See the different categories fora description of each plan.
Use the templates to create your own deployment plans and configure the plans usingprofiles. The settings and values in the profiles bound to each step are defaults. Youcan modify the plan before it is actually applied. You can further constrain the profilesettings and values by the target systems to which the plan is applied.
With the exception of complex plans, the templates do not allow you to add steps to aplan. You can use only those steps that are defined in the template from which theplan is derived. Complex plans enable you to add one or more deployment andoperational plans inside a complex type plan.
Overview of Deployment Plans
8-12 Configuration Reference
About Simple Deployment PlansDescribes deployment plans that perform one operation in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
The software provides you with the ability to create, configure, manage and executedeployment plans which drive the hardware, firmware and software provisioningactivities in a repeatable fashion.
You create plans from defined templates. Each plan defines the sequence of steps thatmust be carried out for configuration or provisioning of a system. Plans might containa single step or a sequence of multi-steps. Each step in the plan is configured byassociating a profile or another plan.
A simple plan contains a single step with a single image. You can define the imageused by the plan, but you cannot add more than one image or add steps. In most cases,when you create a profile, the default action also creates a simple deployment plan.
Templates for Simple Deployment PlansList of templates for deployment plans in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The following plans are simple deployment plans:
• Configure RAID: Use this plan to configure the RAID controller on a server. See“Configuring a RAID Controller” for information and see Configure RAIDControllers for an example of how to use the profile and plan.
• Configure Service Processor: Use this plan to configure the service processor on achassis. See “Configuring the Service Processor” for information and someprocedures and see Discover and Manage Hardware for an example of how to usemanage existing service processors.
• Update Firmware: Use this plan to update firmware. See “Firmware Provisioning”for information and some procedures and see Keep Your Firmware Up-to-Date in thelibrary at for an example of how to use the profile and plan.
• Update BIOS Configuration: Use this plan to update the BIOS configuration ofservers. See “Configuring a BIOS Configuration Profile and Plan” in forinstructions in using the profile and plan.
• Create Dynamic System Domain: Use this plan to create dynamic system domains.See “Configuring a Dynamic System Domain” for information about this profileand plan.
• Update Storage Appliances: Use this plan to update storage appliance software. See“Provisioning and Updating an Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance” for instructions inusing the profile and plan.
• Create Oracle Solaris Zones: Use this plan to create zones. See “Creating a ZoneProfile” and “Creating and Deploying Zone Plans” for information andprocedures. See Create Oracle Solaris 11 Zones and Create Oracle Solaris 10 Zones forexamples of the profiles and plans.
• Create Logical Domains: Use this plan to create logical domains. See “Creating aGuest Domain Profile” for information and procedures. See Configure and InstallGuest Domains for an example of how to use the profile and plan.
Overview of Deployment Plans
Create Plans and Profiles 8-13
About Multi-Step Deployment PlansDescribes deployment plans in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Several deployment templates with multi-step sequences are available. These plansare designed to provide you with a customized and repeatable way to performcommon operations with a single click. The steps in a multi-step plan are defined inthe template. You cannot skip steps or add steps.
Templates for Multi-Step Deployment PlansList of templates for deployment plans in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The following plans are multi-step deployment plans:
• Install Server: Use this plan to provision the server and update the OS.
• Software Deployment and Update: Use this plan to apply script-based updateprofiles. See Updating an Operating System From a Deployment Planin Oracle Enterprise Manager Operate Reference for information on how to use theprofile and plan.
• Provision OS: Use this plan to provision and configure an operating system. See“Operating System Provisioning” in Oracle Enterprise Manager OperationReference for information about how to use the profiles and plan. See ProvisionOracle Solaris 11 Operating Systems and Provision Oracle Solaris 10Operating Systems for examples.
• Update Solaris 11 OS: Use this plan to update Oracle Solaris 11 operating systems.See Updating an Operating System From a Deployment Plan in OracleEnterprise Manager Operations Reference for information about how to use the profileand plan. See Update Your Oracle Solaris 11 Operating System for an example.
• Create Boot Environment: Use this plan to create Oracle Solaris boot environments.See Overview of Oracle Solaris 11 Boot Environments and Overviewof Oracle Solaris 10 Boot Environment in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOperations Reference for information about how to use the profile and plan. SeeCreate and Administer a Boot Environment for Oracle Solaris 11 and Create andAdminister a Boot Environment for Oracle Solaris 10 for examples.
• Update Firmware and Install Oracle VM Server for SPARC: Use this plan to updatefirmware and then install Oracle VM Server for SPARC on the system. SeeOverview of Oracle VM Server for SPARC Installation in OracleEnterprise Manager Virtualization Reference for information about to use the profileand plan.
About Complex Deployment PlansDescribes complex deployment plans in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can use a combination of profiles, deployment plans, and operational plans tocreate a complex deployment plan that enables you to automate a variety of detailedworkflows into a single plan. Complex plans provide flexibility to structure plans thatmeet your local requirements, increasing consistency and allowing for a greater levelof automation.
When you create complex deployment plans, you can choose to skip a step in the plan.Skipped steps are not processed when the plan is applied. You can replicate certain
Overview of Deployment Plans
8-14 Configuration Reference
steps to perform the same operation but using a different profile or plan. You can alsoadd one or more deployment plans and operational plans.
See Use Complex Plans How To document for an example.
Templates for Complex Deployment PlansList of templates for deployment plans in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The following plans are complex deployment plans:
• Configure M-Series Hardware, Create and Install Domain: Use this plan toconfigure an M-Series server, create dynamic system domains, provision OS on thedomains, and update the domains.
• Configure Server Hardware and Install OS: Use this plan to configure a serviceprocessor or a chassis, provision OS and update the OS.
• Configure and Install Dynamic System Domain: Use this plan to create dynamicsystem domains, provision and update OS on the domains.
• Configure and Install Logical Domains: Use this plan to create logical domains andprovision OS on the logical domains.
Managing Deployment PlansOverview of actions performed by deployment plans in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
Topics
• Copying a Deployment Plan
• Editing a Deployment Plan
• Deleting a Deployment Plan
Copying a Deployment PlanProcedure for making a copy of an existing deployment plan in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center
You can copy an existing deployment plan, rename it, and create a new plan.
Perform the following steps to copy a plan:
1. Select Plan Management from the Navigation pane.
2. Use one of the following methods to select Copy Deployment Plan:
• Method 1: Select the deployment type from the tree and select a plan from thelist to enable the Copy Deployment Plan icon. Click the Copy Deployment Planicon.
• Method 2: Expand the selected deployment type and select a plan from the list.Select Copy Deployment Plan from the Actions pane.
3. Edit the following details of the plan:
• Description: Provide a description of the plan.
Managing Deployment Plans
Create Plans and Profiles 8-15
• Plan Name: By default, the plan name is Copy of <plan name>. For example,Copy of Firmware Update. You can modify the name.
• Failure Policy: Select whether the plan execution is to stop at failure or completeas much as possible.
4. Configure a step of the plan by setting or changing the associated profile or bycreating a new profile.
5. Edit the plan by replicating the steps and associate targets, depending on the typeof plan selected.
6. Click Save the new plan. A new plan is saved with the version v1.
Editing a Deployment PlanProcedure for changing a deployment plan in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
You can edit the deployment plan details, alter the plan configuration by skippingsteps in the plan, change the profile or plan bound to each step, or save the plan undera different name to create a new plan.
Note:
When you edit a deployment plan that is referred to by another plan, forexample, in a nested plan, the referring plan is not automatically updated torefer to the edited plan's version. You must manually modify the referringplan if you want it to use the modified version.
Before editing a plan, see “About Version Control to learn how versions aremaintained.
Perform the following steps to edit a plan:
1. Select Plan Management from the Navigation pane.
2. Use one of the following methods to select the Edit Deployment Plan option:
• Method 1: Select the deployment type from the tree and select a plan from thelist to enable the icon. Click the Edit Deployment Plan icon.
• Method 2: Expand the selected deployment type and select a plan from the list.The plan details appear. Select Edit Deployment Plan from the Actions pane.
3. Edit the following details of the plan:
• Plan Name: Edit the name to create a new plan. You create a new plan whenyou modify the plan name.
• Description: Provide a description of the plan.
• Failure Policy: Select whether you want the plan execution to stop at failure orcomplete as much as possible.
4. Configure a step of the plan by setting or changing the associated profile, or bycreating a new profile.
Managing Deployment Plans
8-16 Configuration Reference
5. (Optional) Edit the plan by replicating the steps and associate targets depending onthe type of plan selected.
6. Click Save to save any changes made to the plan. When you have changed thename, a new plan is saved with the version v1.
Deleting a Deployment PlanProcedure for removing a deployment plan from Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
You can delete a deployment plan or only a version of the plan. When the selecteddeployment plan is not referenced by any other plans, you can confirm deleting theplan or its version. When the plan is used in other plans, the Delete Deployment Planoption is not enabled.
Perform the following steps to delete a plan:
1. Select Plan Management from the Navigation pane.
2. Use one of the following methods to select the Delete Deployment Plan option:
• Method 1: Select the deployment type from the tree. The plans of that type arelisted in the center pane. Select a plan from the list. The Delete Deployment Planand Delete Version icon is enabled. Click Delete Deployment Plan or DeleteVersion.
• Method 2: Expand the selected deployment type and select a plan from the list.Select Delete Deployment Plan or Delete Version from the Actions pane.
3. Click Delete to confirm the delete action.
Deleting Plans and Profiles Using the Command Line InterfaceProcedure for using CLI to delete one or more profiles or plans of any type.
Topics
• Deleting a Single Profile or Plan
• Deleting Multiple Profiles and Plans
• Using a Command File to Delete Profiles and Plans
Deleting a Single Profile or PlanProcedure for using CLI to delete an individual profile or plan of any type.
Use the CLI’s plan mode to view a list of plans and delete one. You can also delete theprofile for the plan.
1. Invoke the Oracle Enterprise Manager’s command line interface.
The command prompt shows the Enterprise Controller’s host name:
>./ochostname>
2. Enter plan mode.
Deleting Plans and Profiles Using the Command Line Interface
Create Plans and Profiles 8-17
hostname>planhostname/plan>
3. View the list of plans and identify the plan to delete by its ID number.
hostname/plan>listName | ID | Descriptionosp_planA | 1111 | alphaosp_planB | 1234 | betafw_planA | 1728 | alphacomplexD | 0023 | deltahostname/plan>
4. Issue the command to delete a plan, in this example, the plan with an ID of 1728:
hostname/plan>delete 1728Plan with Id 1728 deleted successfully. (Job Id <id>)
To delete the profile related to the plan, issue the following command:
hostname/plan>delete -p 1728Plan with Id 1728 deleted successfully. (Job Id <id>)
Deleting Multiple Profiles and PlansProcedure for using CLI to delete one or more profiles or plans of any type.
Use the CLI’s plan mode to view a list of plans and delete several of them. You canalso delete the profile for the plan.
1. Invoke the Oracle Enterprise Manager’s command line interface.
The command prompt shows the Enterprise Controller’s host name:
>./ochostname>
2. Enter plan mode.
hostname>planhostname/plan>
3. View the list of plans and identify the plan to delete by its ID number.
hostname/plan>listName | ID | Descriptionosp_planA | 1211 | alphaosp_planB | 1234 | betafw_planA | 1728 | alphacomplexD | 0023 | deltahostname/plan>
4. Issue the command to delete a plan, in this example, the plans for OS provisioning:
hostname/plan>delete 12*Plan with Id 12* deleted successfully. (Job Id <id>)
To delete the profile related to the plan, issue the following command:
hostname/plan>delete -p 12*Plan with Id 12* deleted successfully. (Job Id <id>)
Deleting Plans and Profiles Using the Command Line Interface
8-18 Configuration Reference
Using a Command File to Delete Profiles and PlansProcedure for using a command file to delete profiles or plans of any type.
Use plan mode in a command file to delete plans and profiles routinely or to deletelarge numbers of plans and profiles.
1. Create a file containing the commands to delete the plans and/or profiles.
2. View the list of plans and identify the plans to delete.
3. For each plan or for each type of plan, edit the command file to include deletesubcommand. The following example shows the delete subcommand for OracleSolaris:
/opt/SUNWoccli/bin/oc -e "connect;plan;delete -p 1231"/opt/SUNWoccli/bin/oc -e "connect;plan;delete -p 1232"/opt/SUNWoccli/bin/oc -e "connect;plan;delete -p 1234"<lines omitted>
4. Invoke the Oracle Enterprise Manager’s command line interface.
The command prompt shows the Enterprise Controller’s host name:
>./oc -c <filename>hostname>
(Optional) Enter the result of the procedure here.
About Applying a Deployment PlanDescribes deployment plans in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
When you deploy a plan, you select the target assets against which the plan isexecuted. After you select the targets, you have the option to temporarily override theprofile configuration for specific assets before you deploy the plan.
Many actions use deployment plans. See the documentation in the Deploy How Tolibrary and the Operate How To library for workflows and end-to-end examples.
Related Resources for Plans and ProfilesList of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center documents with additional information.
For profile and plan details, and how to use individual profiles and plans, go to one ofthe following resources.
• Manage Assets
• See About Version Control for how versions are maintained.
• In the Oracle Enterprise Manager Operations Reference, see:
– Hardware
– Operating System Management
– Operating System Provisioning
– Operating System Updates
About Applying a Deployment Plan
Create Plans and Profiles 8-19
– Creating Update Policies
– Configuring a RAID Controller
– Configuring the Service Processor
– Firmware Provisioning
– Configuring a BIOS Configuration Profile and Plan
– Configuring a Dynamic System Domain
– Updating an Operating System From a Deployment Plan
– If you prefer to create profiles by default, editing the property file. See DefaultProfiles and Plans.
• In the Oracle Enterprise Manager Virtualization Reference, see:
– Oracle Solaris Zones
– Oracle VM Server for SPARC
– Creating a Zone Profile and Creating and Deploying Zone Plans
– Creating a Guest Domain Profile
– Overview of Oracle Solaris 11 Boot Environments and Overview of OracleSolaris 10 Boot Environment
– Overview of Oracle VM Server for SPARC Installation
• For Discovery: See About Discovering Assets
• Configure RAID: See Configure RAID Controllers for an example of how to use theprofile and plan.
• Configure Service Processor: See Discover and Manage Hardware for an example ofhow to use manage existing service processors.
• Update Firmware: See Keep Your Firmware Up-to-Date for an example of how to usethe profile and plan.
• Update Storage Appliances: Use this plan to update storage appliance software. See Provisioning and Updating an Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance for instructions inusing the profile and plan.
• Create Oracle Solaris Zones: See Create Oracle Solaris 11 Zones and Create OracleSolaris 10 Zones for examples.
• Create Logical Domains: See Configure and Install Guest Domains for an example.
• Provision OS: See Provision Oracle Solaris 11 Operating Systems and Provision OracleSolaris 10 Operating Systems for examples.
• Update Solaris 11 OS: See Update Your Oracle Solaris 11 Operating System for anexample.
• Create Boot Environment: See Create and Administer a Boot Environment for OracleSolaris 11 and Create and Administer a Boot Environment for Oracle Solaris 10 forexamples
Related Resources for Plans and Profiles
8-20 Configuration Reference
• See Use Complex Plans for an example.
For end-to-end examples, see the workflows and how to documentation in the library.For deployment tasks, go to http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/deploy.htm and for operate tasks go to http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E59957_01/nav/operate.htm
Related Resources for Plans and Profiles
Create Plans and Profiles 8-21
Related Resources for Plans and Profiles
8-22 Configuration Reference
AAbout Asset Attributes
Overview of properties of asset types in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center records the attributes of the assets it manages.You can use these attributes to administer groups. You can use the time zone values toadjust the reporting of assets.
Monitoring AttributesDescribes the contents of the Javadoc package and its location in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
The attributes that are used for asset monitoring vary across asset types. The list ofattributes for each asset is available in a set of Javadocs within the SDK package. Thispackage is located in the following directory:
• Linux OS: Installation directory/xvmoc_full_bundle/Linux_i686/Product/components/packages/sun-xvmoc-sdk-12.0.0.noarch.rpm
• Oracle Solaris OS for SPARC: Installation directory/xvmoc_full_bundle/SunOS_sparc/Product/components/packages/SUNWxvmoc-sdk.pkg
• Oracle Solaris OS for x86: Installation directory/xvmoc_full_bundle/SunOS_i386/Product/components/packages/SUNWxvmoc-sdk.pkg
This package installs the Javadocs in the /opt/sun/xvm/sdk/xvm_oc/doc/javadoc/ directory. Open the Javadoc file for an asset type to view the attributes forthat asset type.
Grouping AttributesLists the attributes of assets that recorded in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Table A-1 lists the attributes that you can use in group rules.
Table A-1 Group Asset Attributes
Attribute Supported Values
Appliance IP Address Any IP address
Appliance Name Any string
Architecture na
Asset Provisioning Supported na
About Asset Attributes A-1
Table A-1 (Cont.) Group Asset Attributes
Attribute Supported Values
Asset Type GlobalZone
NonGlobalZone
LDomHost
LDomGuest
OperatingSystem
Server Network
ServerContainer
MSeriesChassis
VirtualPool
SolarisCluster
SolarisClusterNode
SolarisClusterZoneClusterGroup
Auto Boot on
off
Capability Entry na
Control Component Info Description na
Control Component Info Version na
Control Component Server Hostname na
Control Web Console URI na
CPU Architecture POWER_PC
SPARC
SPARC-SUN4V
X86
CPU Core Count Any number
CPU Info Thread Count Any number
CPU Mode compatible
auto
CPU Model Any string
CPU Speed Any number
CPU Type Any string
Debug User SSH Access TRUE
FALSE
Description Any string
Grouping Attributes
A-2 Configuration Reference
Table A-1 (Cont.) Group Asset Attributes
Attribute Supported Values
Diag Level max
none
min
DNS Configured TRUE
FALSE
DNS Domain Name Any string
Domain Degredation Policy fru
system
xsb
Ethernet Port Fabric Tag
Ethernet Port Info IP Address Any IP address
Ethernet Port Infos Management TRUE
FALSE
Fabric Type
Firmware Info Type Any string
Firmware Description Any string
FirmwareInfo Compliant TRUE
FALSE
FirmwareInfo Provider Any string
Firmware Version Any string
Hard Disk Size (Bytes) Any number
Host ID Any string
Hostname Any string
HTTP Enabled na
IbP Key na
In Ucast Packets na
Interface Info Enabled TRUE
FALSE
Interface Info Fabric Tag
Interface Info Subnet Mask Any number
Interface Infos Mac Address Any number
Grouping Attributes
About Asset Attributes A-3
Table A-1 (Cont.) Group Asset Attributes
Attribute Supported Values
Interface IP Address Any IP address
IP Address Any IP address
IPSLicense Any string
IPS Readme Any string
Keep Alive Trap Time Seconds na
LDAP Profile Name Any string
LDAP Proxy DN Any string
LDAP Server Any string
Local DNS Address na
Locale C
POSIX
en_CA
en_CA.ISO8859-1
en_CA.UTF-8
en_US
en_US.ISO8859-1
en_US.ISO8859-15
en_US.ISO8859-15@euro
es
es_MX
es_MX.ISO8859-1
es_MX.UTF-8
fr
fr_CA
fr_CA.ISO8859-1
fr_CA.UTF-8
iso_8859_1
Location na
Locator Light On TRUE
FALSE
MAC Address na
Grouping Attributes
A-4 Configuration Reference
Table A-1 (Cont.) Group Asset Attributes
Attribute Supported Values
Machine Hardware Class InfiniBand
Ethernet
FibreChannel
EthernetGateway
InfiniBandGateway
Unknown
TOR
NEM
Maintenance Mode na
Managed State HIDDEN
MANAGED
MANAGED_OR_PROVISIONED
PROVISIONING
UNMANAGED
UNMANAGED_OR_PROVISIONED
Management IP na
Manufactured Service Tag na
Manufacturer Any string
MBean Interface Name Any string
Member Info Secure Mode on
off
Member Info Set Type DOMAIN
NEM
SERVER
Memor Size Any number
Memor Type Any string
Model Any string
Monitored TRUE
FALSE
Monitoring Policy na
MTU na
Multi Path Enabled TRUE
FALSE
Name
Grouping Attributes
About Asset Attributes A-5
Table A-1 (Cont.) Group Asset Attributes
Attribute Supported Values
Name Service Domain Name Any string
Network CIDR Any string
NFS Map ID Domain Any string
NIS Name Server By IP Address Any IP address
NIS Name Server By Name Any string
Notifications Enabled TRUE
FALSE
Operator Panel Switch Status Any string
Ops Center Version na
OSRunning TRUE
FALSE
Out Ucast Pkts na
PDU Modules na
Platform na
Port Info Address Any string
Port Info Connected Peer Any string
Port Connector Type BOARD_INTERNAL
CHASSIS_BLADE
CHASSIS_FABRIC
CXP
QSFP
SFP
SFP_PLUS
UNKNOWN
Port Description Any string
Port Fabric Tag ETHERNET
FIBRE_CHANNEL
INFINIBAND
UNKNOWN
Port Info In Discards Any number
Port Info In Errors Any number
PortInfos.inNUcastPkts Any number
Port Info In Octets Any number
Grouping Attributes
A-6 Configuration Reference
Table A-1 (Cont.) Group Asset Attributes
Attribute Supported Values
Port Info Last Tick Any number
Port Info Link Type Any string
Port Info Local IP Address Any string
Port Info Management TRUE
FALSE
Port Info MTU Any number
Port Info Node Address na
Port Info Oper Status Any string
Port Info Out Discards Any number
Port Info Out Errors Any number
Port Info Out NU CastPackets Any number
Port Info Out Octets Any number
Port Info Peer Address Any number
Port Info Port Type HOST
ROUTER
SWITCH
TARGET
Port Info Remote DNS Address Any string
Port Info Remote IP Address Any string
Port Info Speed Any string
Port Info Type ETHERNET
FIBRE_CHANNEL
INFINIBAND
POWER
SERIAL
VLAN
UNKNOWN
Port Infos In Unknown Proto na
Port Infos NUcast Packets na
PoweredOn TRUE
FALSE
Product Defined Instance ID na
Grouping Attributes
About Asset Attributes A-7
Table A-1 (Cont.) Group Asset Attributes
Attribute Supported Values
Product Name na
Product URN na
Product Vendor na
Product Version na
Public UUID na
Rack ID na
Rack Info Asset Domain Type na
Rack Info Asset Gear Type na
Rack Info Asset ON na
Rack Info Asset Status na
Rack Info Asset User Friendly Name na
Rack Info Assets na
Rack Info Assets Model na
Rack Info Assets Occupancy na
Rack Info Position X na
Rack Info Position Y na
Rack Info Position Z na
Rack Info Assets User Friendly Name na
Rack Info Configuration na
Rack Info Number of Slots na
Rack Info Type na
Rcv Error Rate Any string
RcvThroughput Any string
Repeat Trap Number na
Repeat Trap Time Seconds na
Revision na
RoutingMode DYN_OFF
DYN_ON
DYN_AUTO
Grouping Attributes
A-8 Configuration Reference
Table A-1 (Cont.) Group Asset Attributes
Attribute Supported Values
Satellite Any string
Semantic Tag Key na
Semantic Tag Key & Value na
Sensor Notification Enabled TRUE
FALSE
Serial Console URL Any string
Serial Number na
Service Tag Agent Version Any string
Service Tag AssetLabel Any string
Service Tag CPU Manufacturer Any string
Service Tag Customer Asset Tag Any string
Service Tag Host Any string
Service Tag Instance URN Any string
Service Tag IP Address Any IP address
Service Tag Platform Architecture Any string
Service Tag Port Any number
Service Tag Product Hierarchy Any string
Service Tag Release Any string
Service Tag Serial Number Any string
Service Tag Sub-Status Any string
Service Tag Type NATIVE
NATIVE_NOT_FOUND
MANUFACTURED
SNMP Enabled na
Solaris Non-global zone Exclusive na
Solaris Non-Global Zone. na
Static Route Info Set na
Grouping Attributes
About Asset Attributes A-9
Table A-1 (Cont.) Group Asset Attributes
Attribute Supported Values
Status FAULTED
NON_RECOVERABLE
MAINTENANCE
DECONFIGURED
DEGRADED
CRITICAL
WARNING
INFO
OK
UNINITIALIZED
UNKNOWN
UNCONFIGURED
NEEDS_POWERON
Subnet Manager TRUE
FALSE
Subnet Manager Address Any string
Subnet Mask Any string
System Identifier na
System Name na
System Version na
Time Zone See Time Zone Values list below
Total Rcv Errors Any string
Total Rcv Octets Any string
Total Xmit Errors Any string
Total Xmit Octets Any string
User Friendly Description Any string
User Friendly Name Any string
Version na
Virtualization Type ldom
xen
zone
VLan ID Any string
Web Console URI Any string
Web Console URL Any string
Grouping Attributes
A-10 Configuration Reference
Table A-1 (Cont.) Group Asset Attributes
Attribute Supported Values
Xmit Error Rate Any string
Xmit Throughput Any string
XSB Assignment Status Assigned
Available
Unavailable
XSB Connection Status y
n
XSB Diag Status Failed
Passed
Testing
Unknown
Unmount
XSB Domain ID 00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
SP
XSB Dynamic Reconf Status Any string
XSB ID Any string
XSB Fault Status Degraded
Faulted
Normal
XSB Info Set na
XSB Power Status y
n
XSB PSB ID Any string
Grouping Attributes
About Asset Attributes A-11
Table A-1 (Cont.) Group Asset Attributes
Attribute Supported Values
XSB Incorporation Status y
n
XVMServerVersion Any string
Grouping Attributes
A-12 Configuration Reference
BExpression Query Language
Overview of expression queries in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Use the expression query language to build query object constraints and createcustomized expression monitoring rules. . See Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops CenterTuning Monitoring Rules and Policies for examples of how to tune the default rules thatare provided with the software and how to add new rules.
The expression query language is mainly used to define monitoring rules and to checkif an asset attribute verifies a given condition. The query language is closely modeledon the WHERE clause of SQL SELECT statements.
This section contains the following information:
• Monitoring Attributes and Classes
• Lexical Elements
• Grammar
• Semantics
• Informal Examples
Monitoring Attributes and ClassesDescribes the contents of the Javadoc package.
Asset monitoring attributes vary by asset type. The asset types and correspondingattributes are available in the API Javadocs that are part of the SDK package. Thepackage installs the Javadocs in the /opt/sun/xvm/sdk/xvm_oc/doc/javadoc/directory. Open the Javadoc file to view all attributes and classes.
ClassesLists the attributes that can be viewed or configured for assets in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
The classes corresponding to the asset types are located in the com.sun.hss.typepackage and subpackages. The following are a few of the classes representing the assettypes that you can use to create expression monitoring rules and some attributesavailable for monitoring:
• com.sun.hss.type.os.OperatingSystem
• com.sun.hss.type.server.Server
• com.sun.hss.type.servercontainer.ServerContainer
• com.sun.hss.type.virtserver.VirtServer
Expression Query Language B-1
• com.sun.hss.type.virtserver.VirtServerContainer
For each class, you can deduce the attributes that the software can monitor by lookingfor the getter methods defined by the class. Those are the methods whose names startwith get or is and which take no parameters. The name of the attribute correspondingto a method is built by removing the get or is prefix from the method name. Forexample, the OperatingSystem class defines a method named getCpuUsage, asfollows:
@Description(value="CPU Usage information")
CpuUsage getCpuUsage()
The name of corresponding attribute name is CpuUsage.
Attribute TypeDescription of methods available for an attribute type for monitoring rules in OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center.
The return type of the method describes the attribute type. To find the subfields of theattributes that the software can monitor, navigate to the definition of thecorresponding class. The name of the subfields are also deduced from the gettermethods defined on the attribute type class. Given the name of a getter method, youcan deduce the subfield name by removing the get or is prefix and by setting the nextcharacter to lowercase. Following the previous example, when you navigate to theJavadoc of the CpuUsage class, you will find the following getter method:
@ValueInfo(metricType="gauge",
thresholdRising=true,
units="%",
minValue="0",
maxValue="100")
public float getUsagePercentage()
This means the subfield is named usagePercentage. The complete attribute/subfield name that you can use in a monitoring rule isCpuUsage.usagePercentage.
Lexical ElementsLists the lexical elements for queries.
The following are some lexical elements:
• Attribute names are case sensitive.
• Keywords, such as and, like, and between, are not case sensitive.
• Use double quotes to access an attribute whose name, ignoring case, is the same asone of these keywords: not, instanceof, like, true, or false. For example,"not". You can use double quotes to include non-identifier characters in the nameof an attribute. For example, "attribute-name-with-hyphens". To include the doublequote character in the attribute name, write it twice. "foo""bar""baz" representsthe attribute called foo"bar"baz.
• String constants are written with single quotes, for example 'this'. A singlequote within a string constant must be doubled, for example 'can''t'.
Lexical Elements
B-2 Configuration Reference
• Integer constants are written as a sequence of decimal digits, optionally precededby a plus or minus sign. An integer constant must be a valid input toLong.valueOf(String).
• Floating-point constants are written using the Java syntax. A floating-pointconstant must be a valid input to Double.valueOf(String).
• A boolean constant is either true or false, ignoring case.
• Spaces cannot appear inside identifiers (unless written with double quotes),keywords, or multi-character tokens, such as <=. Spaces can appear anywhere else,but are not required except to separate tokens. For example, you can write thequery a < b and 5 =c as a<b and 5=c, but you cannot remove any other spaces.
GrammarLists the grammar for the syntax of queries.
query
andquery [OR query]
andquery
predicate [AND andquery]
predicate
( query ) |
NOT predicate |
INSTANCEOF stringvalue |
LIKE objectnamepattern |
value predrhs
predrhs
compare value |
[NOT] BETWEEN value AND value |
[NOT] IN ( value commavalues ) |
[NOT] LIKE stringvalue
commavalues
[ , value commavalues ]
compare
= | < | > | <= | >= | <> | !=
value
factor [plusorminus value]
Grammar
Expression Query Language B-3
plusorminus
+ | -
factor
term [timesordivide factor]
timesordivide
* | /
term
attr | literal | ( value )
attr
name [# name]
name:
identifier [.name]
identifier
Java-identifier | double-quoted-identifier
literal
booleanlit | longlit | doublelit | stringlit
booleanlit
FALSE | TRUE
stringvalue
stringlit
objectnamepattern
stringlit
SemanticsList of strings that map to Java object in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Table B-1 describes the grammar semantics and defines a function q that maps a stringto a Java object, such as a QueryExp or a ValueExp.
Table B-1 Semantics
String s q(s)
query1 OR query2 Query.or(q(query1), q(query2))
query1 AND query2 Query.and(q(query1), q(query2))
( queryOrValue ) q(queryOrValue)
Semantics
B-4 Configuration Reference
Table B-1 (Cont.) Semantics
String s q(s)
NOT query Query.not(q(query))
INSTANCEOF stringLiteral Query.isInstanceOf(Query.value(q(stringLiteral)))
LIKE stringLiteral new ObjectName(q(stringLiteral))
value1 = value2 Query.eq(q(value1), q(value2))
value1 < value2 Query.lt(q(value1), q(value2))
value1 > value2 Query.gt(q(value1), q(value2))
value1 <= value2 Query.leq(q(value1), q(value2))
value1 >= value2 Query.geq(q(value1), q(value2))
value1 <> value2 Query.not(Query.eq(q(value1), q(value2)))
value1 != value2 Query.not(Query.eq(q(value1), q(value2)))
value1 BETWEEN value2 ANDvalue3
Query.between(q(value1), q(value2), q(value3))
value1 IN ( value2, value3) Query.in(q(value1), new ValueExp[] { q(value2), q(value3)})
value1 NOT IN ( value2,value3 )
Query.not(Query.in(q(value1), new ValueExp[] { q(value2),q(value3)}))
value LIKE stringLiteral Query.match(q(value), translateWildcards(q(stringLiteral)))
value NOT LIKE stringLiteral Query.not(Query.match(q(value),translateWildcards(q(stringLiteral))))
value1 + value2 Query.plus(q(value1), q(value2))
value1 - value2 Query.minus(q(value1), q(value2))
value1 * value2 Query.times(q(value1), q(value2))
value1 / value2 Query.div(q(value1), q(value2))
name Query.attr(q(name))
name1#name2 Query.attr(q(name1), q(name2))
FALSE Query.value(false)
TRUE Query.value(true)
decimalLiteral Query.value(Long.valueOf(decimalLiteral))
floatingPointLiteral Query.value(Double.valueOf(floatingPointLiteral))
The translateWildcards function translates from the SQL notation for wildcards,using % and _, to the API notation using * and ?. If the LIKE string already contains a* or ?, these characters have their literal meanings, and are quoted in the call toQuery.match.
Semantics
Expression Query Language B-5
Informal ExamplesLists the examples for queries.
The formal specification of the language is described in Lexical Elements. Theattributes are located in the Javadocs.
This section provides some informal examples.
Message = 'OK'
Message = 'OK' is verified if the Message attribute is the string 'OK'.
Message like 'OK: %'
Message attribute whose value is a string beginning with "OK: ". The wildcardcharacters are the same as in SQL. In the query language, percent character means anysequence of characters and the underscore character means any single character.
FreeSpacePercent < 10
TheFreeSpacePercent attribute whose value is a number less than 10.
FreeSpacePercent < 10 and WarningSent = false
Uses the same attribute as the previous example, but includes a boolean attributeWarningSent whose value is false.
SpaceUsed > TotalSpace * (2.0 / 3.0)
SpaceUsed and TotalSpace attributes where the first is more than two-thirds thesecond.
not (FreeSpacePercent between 10 and 90)
FreeSpacePercent attribute whose value is not between 10 and 90, inclusive.
FreeSpacePercent not between 10 and 90
Another way of writing the previous query.
Status in ('STOPPED', 'STARTING', 'STARTED')
Status attribute whose value is one of those three strings.
Example B-1 Root Disk and CPU Usage
Example B-1 is an expression that will raise an alert when the root disk is above 80%and the CPU usage is above 10.
FileSystemUsages.name="/".usedSpacePercentage >= 80) AND (CpuUsage.usagePercentage >= 10
Example B-2 Root Disk and System Load
Example B-2 is an expression that will raise an alert when the root disk is above 80%and the system load is above 15.
FileSystemUsages.name="/".usedSpacePercentage >= 70) AND (SystemLoad.average1Minute >= 15
Informal Examples
B-6 Configuration Reference
CAbout the API for Oracle Enterprise
Manager Ops Center
Overview of the API in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center APIs allow external systems managementsolutions to integrate with Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center. The APIs areavailable remotely using TCP/IP through the secure protocol, JMXRemoting over TLS.
The Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Software Developer's Kit (SDK), which isshipped with the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center software, includes someexamples that show how to use the public APIs.
Using the SDK ExampleProcedure for using the examples in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center’s SDK.
The example demonstrates the JMX Messaging Protocol (JMXMP) connector withJava/JMX technology. This example does not require any external JARs except Javaand JDMK. This example performs the following functions:
• Configures the connection.
• Performs security settings.
• Opens the connection (locally or remotely).
• Uses the connection with JMX basic requests.
• Closes the connection.
1. Locate the SUNWxvmoc-sdk.pkg package in the dvd/<platform>/Product/components/packages/ directory on the DVD/Install Media.
2. Install the SUNWxvmoc-sdk.pkg package.
3. Locate the example, BasicClient.java
4. Compile the example.
5. Execute the example, using the appropriate shell script.
List of Public APIsLists the packages in the API of the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Table C-1 provides a brief description of the public APIs. For a complete list ofpackages, its classes, interfaces, and methods, refer to the Javadoc that is included inthe SDK.
About the API for Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center C-1
Table C-1 List of Public APIs
Package Description
com.oracle.sysman.services.bios Provides BIOS configuration services.
com.oracle.sysman.services.bootenvironment
Provides parameters for ABE related operations.
com.oracle.sysman.services.cloudmgmt
Provides virtual datacenter (vDC) administration and vDCmanagement services.
com.oracle.sysman.services.common Provides common constants and utility classes.
com.oracle.sysman.services.discovery
Provides services to perform discovery and manage discoveryprofiles.
com.oracle.sysman.services.dmmaintenance
Provides the service for Domain Model maintenance
com.oracle.sysman.services.exadatacell
Provides the service interface for exadata cell management.
com.oracle.sysman.services.network
Provides network domain services.
com.oracle.sysman.services.ocdoctor
Provides services for OCDoctor functionality in Ops Center.
com.oracle.sysman.services.ops Provides Oracle pre-engineered system management services.
com.oracle.sysman.services.osanalytics
Provides services for operating systems and virtual servercontainer analytics.
com.oracle.sysman.services.ovm Provides services to perform operations on OVM deploymentsthrough the OVM manager.
com.oracle.sysman.services.rack Provides rack management services.
com.oracle.sysman.services.reset Provides the reset service interface to handle resetting andrefreshing the service processor.
com.sun.xvm.services.agentprov Provides service for managing the provisioning of agents. Thispackage provides services for the installation, configuration, andremoval of agent software to remote operating systems.
com.sun.xvm.services.agentupgrade Provides the service interface for agent upgrades.
com.sun.xvm.services.alarm Provides services for alarm management.
com.sun.xvm.services.authorization
Provides the operations for authorization management.
com.sun.xvm.services.bootenvironment
Provides the interface for boot environment service.
com.sun.xvm.services.cachemanager Provides the service interface for managing the cached view of thedomain model.
List of Public APIs
C-2 Configuration Reference
Table C-1 (Cont.) List of Public APIs
Package Description
com.sun.xvm.services.cluster Provides the service interface for cluster management. Thisservice is responsible for viewing and managing Solaris clusterinstances and their nodes.
com.sun.xvm.services.common Provides the service interfaces that are common to different publicAPI services.
com.sun.xvm.services.componentmgmt
Provides the service interface for hardware componentsmanagement.
com.sun.xvm.services.datamodel Provides the service for accessing low-level data models.
com.sun.xvm.services.deleteasset Provides the service interface to delete assets such as servers,operating systems, service tags, and chassis. The virtualizationassets such as hosts, guests, virtual image libraries, and networkscan be removed by calling the appropriate methods on theirrespective services.
com.sun.xvm.services.discovery Provides services to discover assets. The interface for discoveryservice provides capability to initiate a discovery operation for aset of IP addresses.
com.sun.xvm.services.event Provides the interface for event service. The interface for eventservice allows the client to subscribe to notifications emitted fromthe domain model.
com.sun.xvm.services.fabricmgmt Provides service interfaces for fabric management.
com.sun.xvm.services.fwdeployment Provides services for firmware deployment management. Thispackage manages deployments of firmware updates to serversand chassis.
com.sun.xvm.services.gear Provides service tag and general gear management interfaces.
com.sun.xvm.services.grouping Provides asset group management services.
com.sun.xvm.services.guest Provides service interfaces for guest management.
com.sun.xvm.services.guest.provision
Provides service interfaces for guest provisioning.
com.sun.xvm.services.jobmanager Provides job management services for performing job actions,controlling job status, and retrieving information on job actionsand job history.
com.sun.xvm.services.migration Provides the service interface for migration service. This packageprovides the service for live, warm and cold migration of guestdomains.
com.sun.xvm.services.mos Provides the My Oracle Support services.
com.sun.xvm.services.network Provides the network management services. This packageprovides services for managing networks for guests.
com.sun.xvm.services.notification Provides notifications management services.
List of Public APIs
About the API for Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center C-3
Table C-1 (Cont.) List of Public APIs
Package Description
com.sun.xvm.services.oemgc Provides the service interface for Oracle Enterprise ManagerCloud Control repository integration.
com.sun.xvm.services.operation Provides services for operation profile functionality.
com.sun.xvm.services.opscenter Provides the service interface for XMV Update Job Manager.
com.sun.xvm.services.osconfig Provides classes for OS Configuration profiles management.
com.sun.xvm.services.osdeployment Provides services and types to manage deployment of operatingsystems to servers. This package provides services to accessaggregated and detailed information on installed operatingsystems, monitor OS activity, and provision OS. This package isavailable only in Enterprise Controllers.
com.sun.xvm.services.osmonitoring Provides the parameters for OS monitoring profile value objectcreation.
com.sun.xvm.services.pam Provides access to services based on the pluggable authenticationmodules
com.sun.xvm.services.pis Provides the product and asset information service and typesinterfaces, used to classify assets according to their product nameand hierarchy.
com.sun.xvm.services.productupdate
Provides the service interface to download update catalog filesand bundles.
com.sun.xvm.services.profile Provides the profile services to create, delete, and update profiles.
com.sun.xvm.services.provisioning Provides services for managing server provisioning.
com.sun.xvm.services.proxyprov Provides services for the installation of proxy software on a set ofsystems.
com.sun.xvm.services.proxyservice Provides service for managing the provisioning of ProxyControllers.
com.sun.xvm.services.report Provides services and types for retrieving reports on utilizationtrend.
com.sun.xvm.services.reportsmanager
Provides services interfaces for the report manager.
com.sun.xvm.services.storagemgmt Provides service interfaces for storage server management.
com.sun.xvm.services.svrmgmt Provides service interfaces for server management.
com.sun.xvm.services.switchmgmt Provides the physical and virtual switch management serviceinterface.
com.sun.xvm.services.topology Provides the topology service and types interfaces to get topologyinformation of the managed resources. This package provides atree-based navigation view of the Ops Center assets.
com.sun.xvm.services.user Provides the services to manage user preferences.
List of Public APIs
C-4 Configuration Reference
Table C-1 (Cont.) List of Public APIs
Package Description
com.sun.xvm.services.virtimagelib Provides the services for virtual images library and virtual imagemanagement.
com.sun.xvm.services.virtpool Provides the service for managing the life cycle of virtual poolssharing the same libraries or networks, and have the sameprocessor architecture, integrating virtual pools with storage,networks, and virtualization hosts.
com.sun.xvm.services.virtservercontainer
Provides the service interface for managing virtualized servercontainers.
com.sun.xvm.services.win Provides filters supported for Windows services.
com.sun.xvm.services.winpm Provides service interfaces for Windows compliance reports andWindows software updates deployment.
com.sun.xvm.services.wme Provides the service interface for Windows managementextension administration.
com.sun.xvm.services.xvmserver Provides the XVM server management service for managing thesystem level aspects of the XVM server.
Public API AccessOverview of the API in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Topics
• About JMX
• About Public API Access Through JMX Clients
About JMXDescribes Java Management Extensions (JMX) in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Java Management Extensions (JMX) technology provides the tools for buildingdistributed, modular, and dynamic solutions for managing and monitoring devices,applications, and networks. The JMX API defines the notion of MBeans, ormanageable objects, which expose attributes and operations in a way that allowsremote management applications to access them. An important new feature of theJMX API in the Java Platform, Standard Edition 7 (Java SE 7) is its ability to createMXBeans, a substantial improvement over Standard MBeans. For more information onJMX, see the Java Management Extensions (JMX) Technology website at http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/javase/tech/javamanagement-140525.html.
About Public API Access Through JMX ClientsDescribes the API of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The simplest and preferred way of interacting with the public APIs is using a Javaclient. This Java client communicates with the public APIs using a secure remote JMX
Public API Access
About the API for Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center C-5
client. By using a remote JMX client, it is possible to directly interact with the ServiceMXBeans in Java using the strongly-typed Java MXBeans interface class library. TheJMX MXBean interfaces are documented in the javadoc that is included in the SDK.The following remote JMX management protocols are supported: JMXMP and WS-MAN.
Overview of the Virtualization Management StackDescribes tiers of the virtualization management stack in Oracle Enterprise ManagerOps Center.
The virtualization management stack is a three-tier management paradigm. The stackconsists of presentation tier, service tier, and an underlying domain model.
• About the Presentation Tier
• About the Service Tier
• About the Domain Model
About the Presentation TierDescribes the presentation tier of the API in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The presentation tier provides the user interface, displays the information provided bythe service tier, and takes actions through the service tier.
About the Service TierDescribes the service tier of the API in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
The service tier contains all the core management logic. This tier exposes themanagement functionality through a set of public APIs that are used by thepresentation tier and external systems management solutions. These public APIs arethe ideal integration points for third-party software to control or to monitor theEnterprise Manager Ops Center software.
The service tier exposes its management APIs as a series of Java ManagementExtensions (JMX) MXBean interfaces. These interfaces are made accessible as publicAPIs through several remote protocols, including JMXRemoting (JSR 160) and WS-Management (JSR 262).
The services are identified by MXBean ObjectName, and these are of the form:
com.sun.xvm.services:type=<service name>
The main entry point to the public APIs is the MXBean interface defined incom.sun.xvm.services.
About the Domain ModelDescribes the way Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center registers each asset and itsrelationships.
The domain model provides the representation of underlying managed resources andassociations between them. The domain model exposes a normalized data model ofthese managed resources as a collection of JMX MXBeans. Each managed resource hasone MXBean and each association between these resources as one MXBean.
Overview of the Virtualization Management Stack
C-6 Configuration Reference
DChanging the Patch Install Directory
Location for Oracle Solaris OS
You can change the temporary location of the patch install directory for AgentControllers on Oracle Solaris OS.
Note:
This procedure is not applicable for versions greater than Oracle Solaris 10.
Use one of the following methods to change the temporary location of the patch installdirectory:
• Configure the patch installation directory by modifying the following file inthe /usr/lib/scn/update-agent/bin/.uce.rc directory on each agentmanually:
( all ) ( invisible.directories.__pkg.extraction_tmp_dir, "/var/tmp/" );
After the configuration changes, restart the Agent Controller.
• Perform the following steps to create an operational profile and plan and launchthe deployment job:
1. Expand Plan Management in the Navigation pane, then click OperationalProfiles.
2. Click Create Profile.
3. Name the new profile and add a description.
4. Select a subtype from the list to identify the type of target for this profile. ClickNext.
5. Specify the type of script as Remote Shell.
6. Add the below script in the Script field.
#!/bin/bash
UCE_BIN=/usr/lib/scn/update-agent/binif [ -f $UCE_BIN/.uce.rc ]; then grep -v 'extraction_tmp_dir' $UCE_BIN/.uce.rc > $UCE_BIN/.uce.rc.tmp mv $UCE_BIN/.uce.rc $UCE_BIN/.uce.rc.bk mv $UCE_BIN/.uce.rc.tmp $UCE_BIN/.uce.rc echo '( all ) ( invisible.directories.__pkg.extraction_tmp_dir, "'${UCE_TMP_DIR}'" );' >> $UCE_BIN/.uce.rc
Changing the Patch Install Directory Location for Oracle Solaris OS D-1
/usr/lib/cacao/bin/cacaoadm restart -i scn-agentfi
7. Specify the number of minutes or seconds that the script can run. The default is60 minutes. Click Next.
8. In the Reboot Policy field, select Success on Reboot policy from the drop-down list to direct the action of the script when the system reboots.
9. (Optional) To add environment variables to either type of script, click the Addicon, then specify the variable’s name, value, whether input is required atexecution and a hint for that input. Add the following variables:
– Variable Name: UCE_TMP_DIR
– Input at Execution: Required
– Value: /var/tmp/ (or other)
– Hints: extraction tmp dir
10. Click the View Script button to review. Click Next.
11. Review the entire profile, then click Finish.
12. To launch the deployment job, Select Plan Management from the Navigationpane.
13. Click Operational Plans and select the new plan created for the new profile.
14. Click Apply Operational Plan.
D-2 Configuration Reference
Glossary
accountAn account entitles designated cloud users the right to use computing, network, andstorage resources of vDC. The account provides the required capabilities to managethese resources. Account defines the amount of vCPU, memory and storage resourcesthat can be used from the available vDC resources.
actions paneThe Actions pane is used to start jobs based on the current selection in the Navigationpane. Selections in the Navigation pane or center pane change the display ofoperations in the Actions pane. The Actions pane is subdivided into four sections –Operate, Organize, Deploy, and Update.
activeReflects the state of system and indicates whether monitoring is actually beingperformed. The active state is not editable. When a rule is not enabled, monitoring isnot active. The status is displayed on the Alert Monitoring Rules page, which isaccessed from the Monitoring tab. Text in the Active field indicates whether theparameter is active.
activateChanges an inactive Oracle Solaris boot environment to the new default bootenvironment on reboot.
Agent ControllerThe Agent Controller software communicates with the Enterprise Controller and isinstalled automatically when an asset is discovered to make the asset a managed asset.You can choose to manage resources remotely with proxy resources without puttingan agent on the system. Some features of the product don't work without the agent,but discovery manages the assets without putting an agent on them.
Requirements for a NetworkRequirements for assigning and using networks in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
A network requires a physical network interface or a link aggregation and thefollowing specifications:
Glossary-1
• IP address and netmask or CIDR format
• If you use static IP addressing, the IP address of the management interface
If you use dynamic IP addressing, the range of allowed IP addresses and thegateway address
Before you attach a network to a server pool, verify that each virtualization host in theserver pool has a physical network interface to the network so that all members of thepool can continue to share the network resources of the server pool.
Requirements for Installing an Agent Controller on Oracle Solaris 11List of requirements for installing an agent on an asset running Oracle Solaris 11 inOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
• The Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repository must be configured and its initialsynchronization completed.
• The version of Oracle Solaris 11 installed on the target system must be available inthe Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repository.
• The Agent Controller packages must already be in the Oracle Solaris 11 PackageRepository.
Requirements for OS ImagesRequirements for using an OS image in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
• An OS image must be in a single image file. For example, on an Oracle Solarissystem, the following command collects all OS component files on the auto-mounted file system into an ISO file.
# mkisofs -o <name_of_OS.iso> -J -R /cdrom/<name_of_OS>
• The Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center software uploads or imports one ISOfile per operation. If you are loading an ISO file from physical media and the filespans more than one physical media, you must first combine the content ontomedia that can store the complete file.
• An ISO file cannot be made from Oracle Solaris installation media.
Roles for Asset ManagementList of required roles for asset management tasks in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Table 2–1 lists the tasks and the role required to complete the task. Contact youradministrator if you do not have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. SeeOracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration for information about the differentroles and the permissions they grant.
Table 1 Asset Management Tasks and Roles
Task Role
View Assets Read
Add Assets Asset Admin
Agent Controller
Glossary-2
Table 1 (Cont.) Asset Management Tasks and Roles
Task Role
Find Assets Asset Admin
Create Discovery Profile Asset Admin
Update Management Credentials Security Admin
Edit Asset Attributes Asset Admin
Edit Access Points Security Admin
Delete Assets Asset Admin
Edit Tags Asset Management
Create Group Asset Admin
SuperCluster Systems Admin
Edit Group Asset Admin
SuperCluster Systems Admin
Move Group Asset Admin
SuperCluster Systems Admin
Add or Remove Assets From a Group Asset Admin
SuperCluster Systems Admin
Delete Group Asset Admin
SuperCluster Systems Admin
Roles for Job ManagementList of required roles for job tasks in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
If a job has multiple targets, you can see only the targets for which you have thecorrect role. If you do not have the role for any of the targets, the job is not displayed.
A cloud user can only view or act on jobs that were created by the user. The cloud usercannot view jobs that were created by another user.
The following table lists the tasks that are discussed in this section and the rolerequired to complete the task. An administrator with the appropriate role can restrictprivileges to specific targets or groups of targets. Contact your administrator if you donot have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. See the Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center Administration for information about the different roles and thepermissions they grant.
Table 2 Job Management Tasks and Roles
Task Role
Viewing Job Status The same as the role required to launch the job.
Viewing Job Details The same as the role required to launch the job.
Agent Controller
Glossary-3
Table 2 (Cont.) Job Management Tasks and Roles
Task Role
Monitoring Jobs for anAsset
The same as the role required to launch the job.
Answering Questions The same as the role required to launch the job.
Stopping a Job The same as the role required to launch the job.
Re-running a Job The same as the role required to launch the job.
Copying a Job The same as the role required to launch the job.
Deleting a Job The same as the role required to launch the job or JobManagement.
Changing the MaximumTime for a Job
Root access on Enterprise Controller system.
Roles for Monitoring Rules and PoliciesList of required roles for monitoring tasks in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Table 3 lists the roles required to complete monitoring tasks. You can restrictprivileges to specific targets or groups of targets. Contact your administrator if you donot have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. See the Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center Administration for information about the different roles and thepermissions they grant.
Table 3 Monitoring Tasks and Roles
Task Role
View a monitoring rule Read
Plan/Profile Admin
View a monitoring policy Read
Plan/Profile Admin
View the association of an asset and a monitoring policy Read
Asset Admin
Plan/Profile Admin
View the historical data of a threshold rule Read
Asset Admin
Create, edit, or delete a monitoring rule Fault Admin
Create, copy, extract, edit, and apply a monitoring policy Plan/Profile Admin
Modify the monitoring configuration of an asset Fault Admin
Delete a monitoring policy Plan/Profile Admin
Group assets by a monitoring policy Asset Admin
Agent Controller
Glossary-4
Table 3 (Cont.) Monitoring Tasks and Roles
Task Role
Apply a monitoring policy to an asset Fault Admin
Apply a monitoring policy to a group Asset Admin and Fault Admin
Roles for NetworksList of required roles for storage tasks in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Table 4 lists the tasks and the role required to complete the task. Contact youradministrator if you do not have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. Seethe Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration for information about thedifferent roles and the permissions they grant.
Table 4 Network Tasks and Roles
Task Role
Add Fabric Network Admin
Remove Fabric Network Admin
Discover and Manage the Switches Network Admin
Configure Network for Server Deployment Server Deployment Admin
Roles for Plans and ProfilesList of required roles for plan management in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Table 5 lists the tasks and the role required to complete the task. Contact youradministrator if you do not have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. Seethe Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration for information about thedifferent roles and the permissions they grant.
Table 5 Plan Management Roles and Permissions
Task Role
View a profile or plan Read
Create a profile or plan Profile Plan Administrator
Edit a profile or plan Profile Plan Administrator
Copy a profile or plan Profile Plan Administrator
Delete a profile or plan Profile Plan Administrator
Apply a plan The plan determines the role required.
Roles for Software LibrariesList of required roles for library management tasks in Oracle Enterprise Manager OpsCenter.
Agent Controller
Glossary-5
Table 6 lists the tasks and the role required to complete the task. Contact youradministrator if you do not have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. Seethe Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration for information about thedifferent roles and the permissions they grant.
Table 6 Software Libraries Tasks and Roles
Task Role
Set Enterprise Controller Storage Library Ops Center Admin
Create Library Storage Admin
Delete Library Storage Admin
Associate Library Storage Admin
Import image Storage Admin
Upload image Storage Admin
View details of an image Storage Admin
Moving an image Storage Admin
Edit Attributes Storage Admin
Associate Library to Server Pool Cloud Admin
Roles for StorageList of required roles for storage tasks in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Table 7 lists the tasks and the role required to complete the task. Contact youradministrator if you do not have the necessary role or privilege to complete a task. Seethe Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration for information about thedifferent roles and the permissions they grant.
Table 7 Storage Tasks and Roles
Task Role
Create a new storage library Storage Admin
Remove a storage library Storage Admin
Edit attributes of a storage library Storage Admin
Add storage capacity Storage Admin
Update a storage appliance Update Admin
agentlessA system that is managed with Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center without theAgent Controller software being installed.
agentless
Glossary-6
alert monitorMonitors the state of managed resources and their attributes and raise an alert whenthe state is outside the pre-defined thresholds.
annotationsAnnotations are scripts or comments that you can associate with a incident.Annotations can be automated operations to solve a incident, a suggested action, or acomment. You can associate an annotation with a specific incident. Annotations can beadded to the Incidents Knowledge Base.
assetsAssets are physical or virtual piece of hardware, storage device, or operating systemthat you can manage with Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
audit logAn audit log file stores details about user log ins, changes to user accounts, and jobdetails. It shows the activity on the Enterprise Controller and the Proxy Controller.
bandwidth flowBandwidth flow is the speed of a connection, or the amount of data that flows from asite's server out to the viewer at any given time.
block storageA block storage library consists of LUNs (Logical Unit Number). Each LUN is a slice ofa storage volume, which is storage space provided by a collection of disks.
Boolean Control ParameterA monitoring rule that uses a true-false check.
Boot EnvironmentA collection of mandatory file systems (disk slices and mount points) that are criticalto the operation of the Oracle Solaris operating system. These disk slices can be on thesame disk or distributed across multiple disks.
branded zoneZones that are capable of emulating user environments from operating systems otherthan Oracle Solaris 10. Zones supports different versions of Oracle Solaris operatingsystem in the zones for running applications.
categoryFor Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center's Local Content, a category is the type ofsoftware that is uploaded to Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center for use at a site.The parent category is one of the types defined in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops
category
Glossary-7
Center. The local category is a category defined for the site, for example a script for aquarterly inventory.
channelAn operating system distribution, such as Oracle Solaris 10 5/09 on x86 platform orOracle Linux 5.5. A channel is also called a distribution.
CloudA cloud is a set of physical resources that can be divided and allocated to multipleusers who can in turn create and use virtual resources as needed without impact to orawareness of the other users' resources. A cloud is implemented as a pool of serverssharing the same virtualization type, storage, networks and fabrics.
connected modeThis is the default connection mode for Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center. Withthis mode, patch data is regularly downloaded from Knowledge Base through anInternet connection.
DashboardDisplays a high-level overview of an asset or a group of assets on the user interface.The information of the selected asset or group is displayed in the Center Pane.
Deployment PlansDefines the sequence of steps that must be carried out on an asset to deploy.Deployment plans also include the specification or profile that each step should apply,and the resources that are required to apply it such as network addresses, host namesand so on. Customized deployment plan enables you to perform hardware, firmwareand operating system provisioning activities in a repeatable fashion.
disconnected modeThis is the alternate connection mode for Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.Instead of relying on an Internet connection for updates, patch data is acquired usingthe harvester script and moved to the Enterprise Controller.
discoveryThis is the method for adding assets to Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center. Assetscan be discovered using a variety of protocols, by their service tags, or by declaringhardware so that it can be configured and provisioned with an operating system.
Domain Name Service (DNS)DNS is a network protocol that issues IP addresses within a specified range to deviceson the network.
channel
Glossary-8
Dynamic System DomainsIn M-Series servers, you can partition the available hardware resources into smallerlogical systems called as dynamic system domains. Dynamic System Domains runtheir own copies of the operating system and offer a very high level of isolation fromother domains in the system because the partitioning occurs at the hardware level.
Dynamic Storage LibraryWhen the block storage library uses LUNs constructed from a storage array that is amanaged asset, the block storage library is dynamic. You can add storage capacity asneeded by adding LUNs supplied by the storage array.
When the block storage library relies on a storage array that is not a managed asset,the block storage library is static. Because Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center hasless information about the storage array, you cannot increase the number of LUNs inthe storage library.
enabledA monitoring rule that is enabled is actively monitoring a parameter. By default, allrules are enabled. Users can disable and enable parameters on a per asset or groupbasis. The status is displayed on the Alert Monitoring Rules page, which is accessedfrom the Monitoring tab. Text in the Enabled field indicates whether the parameter isenabled.
Enterprise ControllerThis is the central server for Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center software. TheEnterprise Controller hosts the user interface and communicates with the KnowledgeBase. Enterprise Controller stores management information, such as firmware andoperating system images, plans, profiles, and policies and also stores the asset dataand site customizations. All operations, or jobs, are initiated from the EnterpriseController.
Enumerated Control ParameterA monitoring rule that uses a series of values.
Expression ParameterA monitoring rule that uses an instruction to execute something that returns a value.
/export File SystemA file system on an operating system server that is shared with other systems on anetwork. For example, the /export file system can contain the root ( / ) file systemand swap space for diskless clients and the home directories for users on the network.Diskless clients rely on the /export file system on an operating system server to bootand run.
/export File System
Glossary-9
FabricsFabrics are network topologies where network nodes connect with each other throughone or more network switches. A true fabric provides a direct connection between anytwo ports, and supports single step/lookup-based processing. Regardless of itsvarious components, a fabric appears on the outside as a single, logical device with asingle, consistent state.
The term is popular in telecommunication, Fibre Channel storage area networks, andother high-speed networks, including InfiniBand.
Filesystem StorageA software or storage library that relies on a file system on the Enterprise Controller'ssystem or a shared file system on an NFS server that the Enterprise Controller mounts.
global zoneIn Oracle Solaris Zones, the global zone is both the default zone for the system and thezone used for system-wide administrative control. The global zone is the only zonefrom which a non-global zone can be configured, installed, managed, or uninstalled.Administration of the system infrastructure, such as physical devices, routing, ordynamic reconfiguration (DR), is only possible in the global zone. Appropriatelyprivileged processes running in the global zone can access objects associated withother zones.
groupA group is a user-defined set of assets. Assets can be added to groups based on assetattributes such as type or location. A group can include other groups. Assets can bemanually added in addition to the rules based addition using attributes. Any type ofasset that can be in a group can be added manually to any user-defined asset group.
guestGuest refers to a virtual machine that is configured and installed in a virtualizationhost. For example, the logical domains in an Oracle VM Server host are referred to asguests in a server pool.
Guest DomainA guest domain is a non-I/O domain that consumes virtual device services that areprovided by one or more service domains. A guest domain does not have any physicalI/O devices, but only has virtual I/O devices, such as virtual disks and virtualnetwork interfaces.
GUIDGlobally Unique Identifier. A pseudo-random 128-bit number that is computed byWindows to identify any component in the computer that requires a unique number.In Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center, GUIDs are identify LUNs.
Fabrics
Glossary-10
Hardware Virtualization (HVM)Hardware virtualization is a technology that is used to create multiple virtual systemson a single piece of physical hardware. When you create a hardware virtualized(HVM) guest, you must supply an ISO file in a repository to create the virtualmachine.
Hardware Virtualized with Paravirtualized Drivers (PVHVM)PVHVM is identical to HVM, but has additional paravirtualized drivers for improvedperformance of the virtual machine. PVHVM improves the performance level ofMicrosoft Windows running in guests.
host nameThe name by which a system is known to other systems on a network. This name mustbe unique among all the systems within a particular domain (usually, this meanswithin any single organization). A host name can be any combination of letters,numbers, and dashes ( - ), but it cannot begin or end with a dash.
hypervisorA hypervisor is the software that enables multiple virtual machines to be multiplexedon a single physical machine. The hypervisor code runs at a higher privilege level thanthe supervisor code of its guest operating systems to manage use of the underlyinghardware resources by multiple supervisor kernels.
Image Packaging System (IPS)Image Packaging System is an Oracle Solaris 11 package that contains operatingsystem components and a manifest that provides basic metadata.
incidentAn event that triggers an alert when a monitored attribute does not meet themonitoring parameters. A new incident is displayed in the Unassigned Incidentsqueue in the Message Center. From the Message Center you can view and act onincidents.
Incident Knowledge BaseA custom database of annotations that are associated with known incidents.
InfiniBandInfiniBand is a switched fabric communications link primarily used in high-performance computing. Its features include quality of service and failover, and it isdesigned to be scalable. The InfiniBand architecture specification defines a connectionbetween processor nodes and high performance I/O nodes such as storage devices.
InfiniBand transmission rates begin at 2.5 GBps.
InfiniBand
Glossary-11
I/O DomainAn I/O domain has direct access to a physical I/O device, such as a network card in aPCI EXPRESS (PCIe) controller. An I/O domain can own a PCIe root complex, or itcan own a PCIe slot or on-board PCIe device by using the direct I/O (DIO) feature. AnI/O domain can share physical I/O devices with other domains in the form of virtualdevices when the I/O domain is also used as a service domain.
IPMPIPMP (IP network multipathing) provides physical interface failure detection andtransparent network access failover. You can configure one or more physical interfacesinto an IP multipathing group, or IPMP group. After configuring IPMP, the systemautomatically monitors the interfaces in the IPMP group for failure.
JMXJava Management Extensions (JMX) technology provides the tools for buildingdistributed, modular, and dynamic solutions for managing and monitoring devices,applications, and networks. The JMX API defines the notion of MBeans, ormanageable objects, which expose attributes and operations in a way that enablesremote management applications to access them. The public API in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center can be accessed through JMX-Remoting.
Knowledge BaseThe Knowledge Base is the repository for metadata about Oracle Solaris and Linuxoperating system components. Knowledge base stores information about patchdependencies, patch compatibilities, withdrawn patches, downloads, and deploymentrules and also stores URL of operating system vendor download sites and downloadsthe components at set intervals. The Enterprise Controller must have Internetconnection to connect to the Knowledge Base.
librariesA collection of virtual machine images and disk images that are located under thesame file system. When a server pool is created, one or more libraries are assigned tothe server pool. Server pools can share the same libraries.
link aggregationLink aggregation is a standard defined in IEEE802.3ad. An aggregated link consists ofseveral interfaces on a system configured as a single, logical unit. Link aggregationincreases the speed and high availability of a connection between a server and aswitch.
LUNLUN stands for Logical Unit Number. In storage, a LUN is the number assigned to aSCSI protocol entity, that handles (I/O) operations. A SCSI target provides a LUN foreach storage volume.
I/O Domain
Glossary-12
managed assetAn asset is managed when Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center can monitor it andtarget it with jobs. Operating systems can be managed with or without an AgentController, but operating system update functions are only available with an AgentController.
manifestEach Oracle Solaris 11 package has an associated manifest that describes how thepackage is put together. The package manifest is an XML file that provides basicmetadata about the package (such as name, description, version, and category), whatfiles and directories are included, and the package dependencies.
maintenance modeDisables incidents from displaying in the UI, but does not disable monitoring. Thismode is useful when you do not want incidents generated during systemmaintenance.
membership graphShows a graphical relationship between assets and status of the connection. A blueline shows the working connection and a red line represents the faulted ordisconnected status. The membership graph is displayed in the Center Pane.
message centerDisplays all incidents, alerts, and notifications. Message Center helps you to view andmanage incidents, notifications, and service request, and display warrantyinformation.
MTUMTU stands for Maximum Transmission Unit. MTU is the largest packet size, in bytes,that can be sent over a network.
monitoring policyA set of monitoring rules that defines alert conditions. Policies are either system-defined, user-defined, or generic. Each monitoring policy contains one or more alertmonitors for a specific type of resource. An alert is raised when the state is outside thepre-defined condition.
monitoring ruleContains monitoring parameters that state the values and boundaries for an asset'sactivity. The set of rules is called a monitoring policy.
monitoring rule
Glossary-13
MPxIOMPxIO provides a multipathing solution for storage devices accessible throughmultiple physical paths. MPxIO is included as a part of the distribution in Solaris 10onwards.
NATNAT stands for Network Address Translation. NAT is a protocol that enables anetwork to use many internal-only IP addresses and a few Internet-facing IPaddresses.
navigation paneNavigation pane is an important part of the user interface of Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center. navigation pane contains Message Center, Assets, PlanManagement, Networks, Libraries, Reports, vDC Management, and Administration.The Assets section of the Navigation pane lists all the asset that are managed by OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center, grouped by its type and the required criteria.
networkA network enables guests to communicate with each other or with the external world(that is, the Internet). When a server pool is created, one or more networks is assignedto the server pool. Server pools can share the same networks.
network bondingNetwork bonding refers to the combination of network interfaces on one host forredundancy and/or increased throughput. Redundancy is the key factor you use toprotect your virtualized environment from loss of service due to failure of a singlephysical link. This network bonding equals as the Linux network bonding. Usingnetwork bonding in Oracle VM might require some switch configuration.
network domainA system of centralized network administration, in which the permissions that grantaccess to resources in the network are maintained in one or more servers. NetworkDomains use a hierarchical structure that enables you to assign permissions tocollaborate with different departments in an organization.
A large network may have several domains based on the needs of each set of users.
NISNIS stands for Network Information System. NIS is a network naming andadministration system for smaller networks. NIS is similar to the Internet's domainname system (DNS) but designed for a smaller network.
non-global zoneA virtualized operating system environment created within a single instance of theOracle Solaris operating system. One or more applications can run in a non-global
MPxIO
Glossary-14
zone without interacting with the rest of the system. Non-global zones are also calledzones.
non-sparse copyA clone of the type "non-sparse copy" is a disk image file of a physical disk, taking upthe space equivalent to the full specified disk size, including empty blocks.
notificationsAn email, pager, or user interface message that is automatically sent by OracleEnterprise Manager Ops Center when specified conditions are met. You can configureseparate notification profiles for different assets and different users. You can configurethe software to send notification for specific incidents, or when a critical or warningincident is detected.
Opaque DataAn opaque data is a data type that is incompletely defined in an interface, so that itsvalues can only be manipulated by calling subroutines that have access to the missinginformation.
/optA file system that contains the mount points for third-party and unbundled software.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud ControlOracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control is a single, integrated solution for managingall aspects of the Oracle Cloud and the applications running on it. Oracle EnterpriseManager Cloud Control couples a potent, top-down monitoring approach todelivering the highest quality of service for applications with a cost-effectiveautomated configuration management, provisioning, and administration solution.
Oracle Engineered SystemOracle Engineered Systems are hardware and software integrated systems that aredesigned for a specific enterprise purpose. Oracle Engineered System helps inreducing the cost and complexity of the IT infrastructures, and increases theproductivity and performance.
Oracle ServicesProvides integrated methods of maintaining and displaying current contracts,warranty information, contract dates, and service requests in Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center.
Oracle Solaris ClustersOracle Solaris Clusters is a high availability software product for Solaris operatingsystem. Oracle Solaris Clusters are used to improve the availability of softwareservices such as databases, file sharing on a network, electronic commerce websites, orother applications. You can now manage Oracle Solaris Clusters as any other assetusing Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Oracle Solaris Clusters
Glossary-15
Oracle Solaris ZonesOracle Solaris Zones is a software partitioning technology used to virtualize operatingsystem services, and provide an isolated and secure environment for runningapplications. When you create a non-global zone, you produce an applicationexecution environment in which processes are isolated from all other zones. Thisisolation prevents processes that run in a zone from monitoring or affecting processesthat run in any other zones. See also global zone and non-global zone.
Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update LibraryOracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library repository is located on the EnterpriseController. This contains the Oracle Solaris 11 packages that you need to install,provision, and update your Oracle Solaris 11 operating system.
Oracle VM Server for SPARCOracle VM Server is a virtualization technology that enables the creation of multiplevirtual systems by a hypervisor in the firmware layer, interposed between theoperating system and the hardware platform. This is designed to abstract thehardware and can expose or hide various system resources, allowing for the creationof resource partitions that can operate as discrete systems, complete with virtual CPU,memory and I/O devices.
Oracle VM Server for SPARC was previously known as Logical Domains, it is avirtualization technology designed to run on CMT based servers.
Oracle VM Server for x86Oracle VM Server for x86 is a managed virtualization environment or part of such anenvironment, that is designed to provide a lightweight, secure, server-based platformfor running virtual machines. Oracle VM Server for x86 is based upon an updatedversion of the underlying Xen hypervisor technology, and includes Oracle VM Agent.
Oracle Solaris ZFSAn Oracle Solaris operating system file system that uses storage pools to managephysical storage.
ParavirtualizationParavirtualization enables you to select a location for the mounted ISO file from whichyou create the virtual machine. Before you create the virtual machine using theparavirtualized method, you must mount the ISO file on an NFS share, or HTTP orFTP server.
parent repositoriesAny hosted Oracle repository that Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library can useto upload, or sync, content.
Oracle Solaris Zones
Glossary-16
photorealistic viewPhotorealistic view displays the front and rear views of the rack. All slots and therespective assets are displayed. Positions within the rack are displayed in a 2-dimensional view. All assets in the rack have a specific image. The health status ofassets such as OK, Warning, and Critical are displayed in the form of colored buttons.
policyDefines how a job is performed and sets the automation level of the job. A policy file issimilar to a response file. If there is a conflict between a profile and policy, the profileoverrides the policy.
Private vNetvNet that is unique to a given account is called private vNet.
profileDefines the configuration of components for a specific type of system. By using aprofile, you can define what is enabled, and not enabled, to be installed on a system. Ifthere is a conflict between a profile and policy, the profile overrides the policy.
Proxy ControllerProxy Controllers link the managed assets to the Enterprise Controller and act asproxies for operations that must be located close to the managed assets, such asoperating system provisioning. Proxy Controllers distribute the network load andprovide for fan-out capabilities to minimize network load. Proxy Controllers performmanagement operations on assets and report the results to the Enterprise Controller.An Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center installation must have at least onefunctioning Proxy Controller.
repositoryA repository is a central place that stores an aggregation of data in an organized way,usually in a computer storage. Depending on how the term is used, a repository maybe directly accessible to users or may be a place from which specific databases, files, ordocuments are obtained for further relocation or distribution in a network.
rootThe top level of a hierarchy of items. root is the one item from which all other itemsare descended. See root directory or root ( / ) file system.
root directoryThe top-level directory from which all other directories stem.
Root DomainA root domain has a PCIe root complex assigned to it. This domain owns the PCIefabric and provides all fabric-related services, such as fabric error handling. A root
Root Domain
Glossary-17
domain is also an I/O domain, as it owns and has direct access to physical I/Odevices.
root file systemThe top-level file system from which all other file systems stem. The root ( / ) filesystem is the base on which all other file systems are mounted, and is neverunmounted. The root ( / ) file system contains the directories and files critical forsystem operation, such as the kernel, device drivers, and the programs that are used toboot a system.
RPMA package manager used by many versions of the Linux operating system.
rule parametersDefine the monitoring parameters. The following types of rule parameters areavailable: Threshold, Boolean Control, Enumerated Control, and Expression. Someparameters are editable. All active parameters can be disabled.
SAN Storage LibraryStorage Attached Network (SAN) storage which is used for providing storage spacesfor managed assets in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center. The SAN storage libraryconsists of groups of LUNs.
scriptA command file that is associated with one of Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center'sactions, either before the action occurs (pre-action script), or after the action completes(post-action script).
security groupThe organization of users and other domain objects into groups for easyadministration of access permissions is known as a security group. A Security Groupenables you to specify certain security settings on an instance specific basis. You havethe ability to filter traffic based on IP's (a specific address or a subnet), packet types(TCP, UDP or ICMP), and ports (or a range of ports). You can also grant access to anentire security group so that your trusted computers can get access to each otherwithout having to open ports to the public.
server managementServer management is used to manage the physical Oracle VM Servers in a serverpool, for example, to update the Oracle VM Agent on the different Oracle VM Servers.
server poolA server pool is a resource pool of virtualization hosts that share compatible chiparchitecture, which facilitates actions such as moving guests between virtualizationhost instances. Members of the server pool have access to the same network and
root file system
Glossary-18
storage library resources. Guests can access the images contained in the server pool'slibrary. Several server pools can share the same network and library storage resources.
server templatesServer templates provide pre-built images for creating vServers. They can be uploadedindividually or as part of an Assembly. Server templates can be created from anexisting vServer.
service tagService tags are XML files that identify assets uniquely. Assets with service tags can bediscovered using the Find Assets wizard.
Service DomainA service domain provides virtual device services to other domains, such as a virtualswitch, a virtual console concentrator, and a virtual disk server. You can have morethan one service domain, and any domain can be configured as a service domain.
Shared IP ModeThe global zone shares its network interface with one or more zone. You must definethe network interface when you assign the network to the global zone.
shared storageA shared storage library in Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center is one that isaccessible by the server and operating system. It is not related to Zones on SharedStorage in Oracle Solaris 11.1.
snapshotSnapshot, a point in time image of a volume is a non-bootable copy of a bootenvironment that uses much less disk space than a boot environment. You can create aboot environment from a snapshot.
software librariesA software library can be a local file system on the Enterprise Controller or a mountpoint on an NFS server. The software library is used to store the operating systemimages for provisioning, branded images, flars, firmwares, profiles, operating systemupdates, custom programs and scripts.
sparse copyA clone of the type "sparse copy" is a disk image file of a physical disk, taking up onlythe amount of space actually in use; not the full specified disk size.
static routeSpecifies the route taken by the network for external access. You define a defaultgateway for the network; however, this default gateway may not be reachable to agiven subnet. In this case, you must add a static route for this specific subnet.
static route
Glossary-19
status paneThe Status pane in the Jobs section describes about the state of the incidents like jobs inprogress, jobs failed, jobs partially successful, jobs stopped, jobs schedules, jobssuccessful and so on.
Support Repository Update (SRU)Support Repository Update (SRU) is a package of Oracle Solaris 11 operating systemupdates that releases on a regular basis.
SCCMMicrosoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM), is used to update Windowsoperating systems.
syncingSyncing is the process of reconfiguring or updating the Oracle Solaris 11 SoftwareUpdate Library with the Oracle Solaris 11 Image Packaging System (IPS).
system groupsDefault asset groups that automatically organize your assets by type in the userinterface.
System-defined RulesAttribute specific monitoring rules that are hard-coded into drivers. You can disable asystem-defined rule, but cannot edit, move, or reconfigure these types of rules.
Thin CloneA thin clone is a clone of a physical disk that takes up only the amount of disk spaceactually in use; not the full specified disk size.
threshold parametersA monitoring rule that uses a numeric value above or below a defined level.
time serverThe network device that provides accurate time for synchronizing network activity.
unmanaged storageUnmanaged storage is the storage resource that is unknown to Oracle EnterpriseManager Ops Center. When you add storage to zones using the native CLI or manageexisting zone environments, the zone's storage is not identified and termed asunmanaged.
status pane
Glossary-20
User-defined Network DomainA network domain provides custom network resources from an Ethernet or InfiniBandfabric to virtualization hosts, server pools, or virtual datacenters so that new networkscan be created as needed. A user-defined network domain supplements the DefaultNetwork Domain that is always available and cannot be deleted.
User-defined RulesMonitoring rules that are associated with, and determined by, the type of managedresource. You can apply a user-defined rule to many different attributes.
/usr File SystemA file system on a standalone system or server that contains many of the standardUNIX programs.
Sharing the large /usr file system with a server rather than maintaining a local copyminimizes the overall disk space that is required to install and run the Solaris softwareon a system.
/var File SystemA file system or directory (on standalone systems) that contains system files that arelikely to change or grow over the life of the system. These files include system logs, vifiles, mail files, and UUCP files.
vDCvDC is a collection of physical servers and storage that are placed on a commonnetwork. These physical resources are organized into a pool that are accessed by self-service users. This offers an access point through which you can allocate and controlthe resources inside. This is created during the set up phase.
vNetsvNets are managed networks and their associated logical (L2) fabrics that can beassociated with a vDC and its Accounts.
vServervServer is an entity that provides the outward interface of a standalone operatingsystem. This may be a Virtual Machine (VM) or a Solaris Container or a similarconstruct. This consumes CPU and memory resources. This can be a member of one ormultiple vNets.
vServer TypevServer type is a profile for vServer creation that defines size of memory, size of diskand number of vCPUs to be used when creating a new vServer instance, that is used incombination with a Server Template.
vServer Type
Glossary-21
VIDVLAN Identifier. Part of the VLAN tag inserted into Ethernet frame that specifies itsVLAN.
virtual disk imageA virtual disk image is a representation of a virtual storage device that is associatedwith a virtual machine. Such storage can represent a virtual hard disk or a virtual CD/DVD.
virtualization hostOracle VM Server that are managed by Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center isreferred to as virtualization host. The virtualization host contains a hypervisor and itslocal resources and network connections.
virtual machineA virtual machine is a software implementation of a computing environment in whichan operating system or program is installed and run.
A virtual machine typically emulates a physical computing environment, requests forCPU, memory, hard disk, network, and other hardware resources that are managed bya virtualization layer which translates these requests to the underlying physicalhardware.
virtual machine templateA Virtual Machine Template provides a standardized group of hardware, andsoftware settings that is used repeatedly to create virtual machines configured withthose settings.
virtual server imageA virtual server image is the persisted specification and state of a virtual machine. Avirtual server is created when you create a guest. The virtual server image contains thegeneral specification of the guest such as CPU, network, memory, and the type ofphysical storage that is backing the guest. A virtual server image is also referred to asa guest image.
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN)VLAN is a group of network resources connected to different network segments thatbehave as if they were connected to a single network segment. All transmissions fromthe VLAN are identified by a unique VLAN tag.
volumeA volume is an identifiable unit of data storage that is sometimes physicallyremovable from the computer or storage system. In tape storage systems, a volumemay be a tape cartridge. In mainframe storage systems, a volume may be a removablehard disk. Each volume has a system-unique name or number that enables it to bespecified by a user.
VID
Glossary-22
World Wide Name (WWN)WWN is a unique identifier in a Fibre Channel or Serial Attached SCSI storagenetwork. Each WWN is an 8-byte number derived from an IEEE OUI and vendorinformation.
zoneAlso called non-global zones, are a virtualized operating system environment createdwithin a single instance of the Oracle Solaris operating system. One or moreapplications can run in a non-global zone without interacting with the rest of thesystem.
zone
Glossary-23
Index
AAccess points
counting assets, 2-45Accounts
serial console, 2-26Add Assets, 2-9, 2-16–2-18Add Assets to Group, 2-54Add Content, 5-9Add LUNs, 6-14, 6-15Add monitoring rules, 4-8Add Multiple SAN LUNs, 6-16Add Storage, 6-16, 6-30Address Allocation Method, 7-19Agent Controller
Oracle Solaris 11, 2-30, 2Agent Controllers
access point, 2-46installing, 2-30, 2-31, 2-35monitoring, 4-1uninstalling, 2-46
agentadmrequirements, 2-31
Agentless, 2-4Alert Monitoring Rules, 4-5Alerts
disabling and enabling, 4-3ALOM, 2-44Alternate IPS Repository
Local IPS Repository, 5-8Answering prompts
jobs, 3-9API
JMX, C-5Asset attributes
adding, 2-49deleting, 2-49method, B-2monitoring, A-1, B-1query, B-2, B-3, B-6viewing, 2-49
Asset groups, 2-47Asset management
Asset management (continued)access points, 2-46actions, 2-2adding assets to a group, 2-54additional information, 2-55Agent Controller, 2-4asset attributes, 2-45changing groups, 2-54counting, 2-45credentials
copying, 2-25deleting, 2-25editing, 2-25updatng, 2-20upgrading, 2-20
deleting groups, 2-55grouping, 2-48–2-50, 2-52, 2-53jobs, 3-7moving groups, 2-54Oracle Solaris 11, 2-38Oracle Solaris Clusters, 2-38Oracle ZFS Storage Appliances, 2-38, 2-42removing assets, 2-46removing assets from a group, 2-54roles, 2-2, 2Sun SPARC Enterprise M-Series Servers, 2-38,
2-40system-defined groups, 2-48user-defined groups, 2-48viewing, 2-3Windows, 2-38–2-40
Assetscounting, 2-45
Assigning networksnetwork domains, 7-11
Audit log, 3-12Automatic method, 7-19Available LUNs, 6-14
B
Backup, 5-32
Index-1
Badgesdefault library, 5-3
Bandwidth flow, 7-11Bandwidth management, 7-12Block storage
deleting LUNs, 6-22dynamic, 6-12LUNs
cloning, 6-21creating, 6-20names, 6-13selecting, 6-14specifying, 6-14, 6-15
static, 6-12Boolean Control, 4-5
C
Chassis, 4-12CIDR
Classless Inter-Domain Routing, 7-8, 7-9Cisco switches, 4-12Classless Inter-Domain Routing
CIDR, 7-8, 7-9CLI
deleting plans or profiles, 8-17–8-19plan, 8-17–8-19
Complex deployment plans, 8-14Configuration
jobs, 3-11Configuration file, 5-28Configure Parent Repositories, 5-8Connectivity
networks, 7-20Connectivity check interval, 1-8Console timeout, 1-8Control domain
storage libraries, 6-7Copy Policy, 4-14Copying a deployment plan, 8-15Copying a discovery profile, 2-13Copying a operational plan, 8-7Copying a operational profile, 8-6Copying a rofile, 8-11Counting assets, 2-45Create Credential, 5-9Create Policy, 4-14Create Update Library, 5-13Credentials
access points, 2-46asset management
copying, 2-25deleting, 2-25editing, 2-25upgrading, 2-20
authentication, 2-21–2-23
Credentials (continued)creating, 2-21–2-23roles, 2-21, 2-22serial console, 2-27SNMP, 2-8SNMPV3, 2-23ssh, 2-26SSH, 2-22sudo, 2-21
Critical, 4-4Custom content, 5-24custom manifest, 5-10Customize user interface, 1-4
D
Data center, 1-1Data link
bandwidth, 7-12Declaring servers
operating systems, 2-16–2-18service processors, 2-18
Declaring Servers, 2-16Default network domain, 7-5Default Policy icon, 4-15Delete Access Point, 2-46Delete Asset, 2-46Delete Group, 2-55Delete Local Component File, 5-31Delete Version, 8-17Deleting a LUN, 6-22Deleting plans or profiles, 8-17–8-19Deleting versions, 8-7Deployable systems, 5-15Deployment plan
copying, 8-15Deployment plans
applying, 8-19complex, 8-14deleting, 8-17editing, 8-16local content, 5-30multi-step, 8-14simple, 8-13templates, 8-13–8-15
Deployment Plans, 8-1Development plans
shared profiles, 8-9Disable Multiple Sessions, 1-7Discovery
assets, 2-14, 2-15declaring servers, 2-16M-Series, 2-41Oracle Solaris Cluster, 2-43Oracle Solaris Clusters, 2-43Oracle ZFS Storage Appliances, 2-42
Index-2
Discovery (continued)properties, 2-14servers, 2-9, 2-16–2-18service tags, 2-14Sun SPARC Enterprise M-Series Servers, 2-41
Discovery file, 2-16, 2-17Discovery profile
copying, 2-13creating a profile, 2-11deleting a profile, 2-14
Discovery profiles, 2-8Disk image, 5-14Disovery
ALOM, 2-44Documentation, xiii, 1-9documentation library, 1-2Dynamic block storage, 6-12Dynamic Block Storage Library, 6-13Dynamic private networks, 7-3Dynamic System Domains, 2-40, 4-12
EEC Library
changing, 5-3Initial EC Library, 5-3updating, 5-3
Edit Group, 2-53Edit Local Component File, 5-31Edit Storage, 6-31Edit Tags, 2-49Editing attributes, 7-6Editing monitoring rules, 4-6, 4-7Enumerated Control, 4-5Ethernet network, 7-1Exadata Storage Servers
SPARC SuperCluster, 6-28Execute Operation, 5-24Exporting log files, 3-5Expression, 4-5eXtended System Control Facility
See XSCF, 2-40Extract a Monitor Policy, 4-15
FFabrics
fully-managed, 7-3host-managed, 7-3physical, 7-3unmanaged, 7-3
Failure policy, 3-3Fibre Channel SAN, 6-26File servers, 4-12, 6-25File system libraries, 5-4File System Used Space Percentage, 4-17, 4-18
Find Assets, 2-14, 2-15Firmware
creating a profile, 5-23images, 5-19, 5-20, 5-23metadata, 5-20, 5-23PDU, 5-23power distribution units, 5-23
Fully-managed fabrics, 7-3
GGlobal zones
monitoring policies, 4-12Groups
adding assets, 2-54attributes, A-1changing groups, 2-54changing position, 2-54creating groups, 2-50, 2-52deleting, 2-55editing, 2-53monitoring, 4-17removing assets, 2-54system groups, 2-48system-defined, 2-48tags, 2-49user-defined, 2-48viewing data, 2-50
Gueststorage, 6-29
GUIDLUN, 6-15WWN, 6-15
H
Help, 1-2High Availability
storage, 6-31Historical data, 4-4, 4-8Host-managed fabrics, 7-3
IIcons
Add Content, 5-9Default Policy, 4-15
Image Packaging System, 5-5Images
backup, 5-32disk image, 5-14import, 5-21ISO, 5-14location in UI, 5-15OS, 5-14
Import Image, 5-21
Index-3
Import images, 5-21InfiniBand network, 7-1Info, 4-4Initial EC Library, 5-3Initialize Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library,
5-6Internet Connection Firewall., 2-39IPMP groups
creating, 7-12, 7-13IPS, 5-5, 5-8IPS Repository, 5-9IPv4, 7-18IPv6, 7-18iSCSI storage arrays, 4-12ISO image, 5-14
J
Java object, B-4JMX, C-1, C-5, C-6Job Details, 3-12Job status popup duration, 1-8Jobs
actions, 3-2, 3-9Actual Run, 3-3additional information, 3-13by asset, 3-7configuration, 3-11configuring, 3-11copying, 3-10debugging, 3-11deleting, 3-10details, 3-5event logs, 3-5failure policy, 3-3location in UI, 3-2modifying, 3-12order of tasks, 3-3properties, 3-11repeating, 3-10rerunning, 3-10roles, 3-1, 3Run ID, 3-3searching, 3-8Simulated, 3-3status, 3-3stopping, 3-9synchronize, 5-8targets, 3-5tasks, 3-5viewing, 3-5
Jobs pane, 3-2JumpStart Enterprise Toolkit, B-6
K
Knowledge Base, 5-3
L
LACP, 7-15Launch Web Console, 2-44Libraries
images, 5-1local content, 5-1software, 5-1storage libraries, 6-1
Link aggregationcreating, 7-15, 7-17
Linux and Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software UpdateLibrary, 5-13
Linux and Oracle Solaris 8–10 Software UpdateLibrary
Local content, 5-29Linux, Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library, 5-13Local actions, 5-25Local Categories, 5-25Local Category, 5-25Local Component File, 5-31Local Configuration File, 5-27Local content
actions, 5-25categories, 5-25changing, 5-31configuration files, 5-27editing, 5-31packages, 5-27
Local ContentOracle Solaris 11, 5-24
Local librariesmonitoring policies, 4-12
Local Packages, 5-27Local storage
File system storage, 6-10–6-12Log files, 3-12Logging events, 3-5Logical domains
adding LUNs, 6-16monitoring policies, 4-12storage, 6-30, 6-31
Logical UnitsSee LUNs, 6-26
LUNGUID, 6-13
LUNsAdd LUNs, 6-15changing storage library, 6-19cloning, 6-21creating, 6-20deleting, 6-22selecting, 6-14
Index-4
LUNs (continued)specifying, 6-14, 6-15volume groups, 6-26
MM-Series
discovering, 2-41M-Series servers
monitoring policies, 4-12Macros, 5-25Maintenance, 2-52Managed assets, 2-3manifest
custom, 5-10Manually Adding LUNs, 6-15Maximum Transmission Unit, 7-19Membership graph
preferences, 1-7Metadata
firmware, 5-20guest, 5-14
Monitored attributescollection, 4-8simple, 4-8struct-like, 4-8structure, 4-8
Monitoringactions, 4-2additional information, 4-19disabling and enabling, 4-3location in UI, 4-3roles, 4-2, 4thresholds, 4-4
Monitoring policieschassis, 4-12Cisco switches, 4-12copying, 4-14creating, 4-10, 4-14, 4-15default, 4-10, 4-15deleting, 4-18details, 4-12Dynamic System Domains, 4-12extracting, 4-10, 4-15file servers, 4-12global zones, 4-12groups, 4-17groups of assets, 4-17iSCSI storage arrays, 4-12local libraries, 4-12logical domains, 4-12M-Series servers, 4-12modifying, 4-16NAS libraries, 4-12non-global zones, 4-12operating systems, 4-12
Monitoring policies (continued)Oracle VM Server for SPARC, 4-12Oracle VM Server for x86, 4-12power distribution units, 4-12Remote Oracle Engineered System, 4-12SAN libraries, 4-12SAN storage arrays, 4-12server pools, 4-12Servers, 4-12Solaris Cluster, 4-12Solaris Cluster Node, 4-12Solaris Cluster Zone Cluster Group, 4-12Solaris Cluster Zone Cluster Node, 4-12Storage, 4-12switches, 4-12system-defined, 4-10, 4-12user-defined, 4-10viewing assets, 4-15Virtual machines, 4-12
Monitoring Policy Threshold, 4-17, 4-18Monitoring rules
active, 4-5adding, 4-8Critical, 4-4disabled, 4-5editing, 4-6, 4-7enabled, 4-5inactive, 4-5state, 4-5system-defined, 4-4thresholds, 4-8user-defined, 4-4, 4-5Using Expression monitoring rules, 4-8Warning, 4-4
Monitoring tab, 4-3, 4-4Move Asset to Group, 2-54Move Group, 2-54Move LUN, 6-19MPxIO, 6-26Multipathing, 6-26Multpath
storage, 6-30My Preferences, 1-4
NNAS storage
monitoring policies, 4-12NFS, 6-5
NAS Storage AppliancesNFS share, 6-24
NAS storage libraries, 6-5Network
properties, 7-18Network devices
PCIe, 7-22
Index-5
Network domainsdefault, 7-5editing attributes, 7-6user-defined, 7-5
Network File ServiceSee NFS, 6-5
Network Interface Card, 7-23Network-attached storage
See NAS, 6-5Networks
actions, 7-2additional information, 7-25assigning, 7-11Connectivity, 7-20IPMP groups, 7-12link aggregations, 7-15location in UI, 7-2MTU, 7-19private, 7-10profiles, 7-25public, 7-10requirements, 7-7, 1roles, 7-2, 5routing mode, 7-18static route, 7-19switches, 7-21, 7-23utilization, 7-20
NFS Client, 6-25NFS Server, 6-24, 6-25NIC, 7-23Non-global zones
monitoring policies, 4-12
OOCDoctor
debugging a job, 3-11online Help, 1-2Opaque storage, 6-28Operating systems
monitoring policies, 4-12Operational plans
copying, 8-7creating, 8-5deleting, 8-7
Operational Plans, 8-1Operational profiles
copying, 8-6creating, 8-5scripts, 8-5variables, 8-5
Oracle Engineered Systemsmonitoring policies, 4-12
Oracle Knowledge Base, 5-3Oracle Linux, 5-13Oracle Solaris 10
Oracle Solaris 10 (continued)updates, 5-13
Oracle Solaris 11Agent Controller, 2-30, 2local content, 5-24repository, 5-9
Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repository, 5-3, 5-4Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library
adding content, 5-9alternate repository, 5-8deleting, 5-12initializing, 5-6parent repositories, 5-7status, 5-7synchronizing, 5-8viewing, 5-7
Oracle Solaris 8-10 Software Update Library, 5-4Oracle Solaris Cluster
discovering, 2-43Oracle Solaris Clusters
discovery, 2-43monitoring policy, 4-12
Oracle Solaris Zonesstorage libraries, 6-7
Oracle VM Manager, 6-23Oracle VM Server, 6-8Oracle VM Server for SPARC
monitoring policies, 4-12Oracle VM Server for x86
monitoring policies, 4-12Oracle VM Storage Repositories, 6-7Oracle VM Storage Repository, 6-7Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance
user interface, 6-27Oracle ZFS Storage Appliances
ASR, 6-27capacity, 6-27discovery, 2-42
OS image, 5-14OS Images
requirements, 5-15, 2
PParent repositories
Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update Library, 5-7synchronizing, 5-8
parent repository, 5-9Partition keys, 7-3PCIe Endpoints, 7-22PDU
firmware, 5-23profile, 5-23
Physical fabric, 7-3Physical network interface card, 7-6Plan
applying, 8-19
Index-6
Plan ManagementMonitoring policies, 4-10
Planscopying, 8-7, 8-15creating, 8-5deleting, 8-17–8-19deployment, 8-15editing, 8-16operational, 8-4roles, 8-2, 5versions, 8-3
Plans and profilesactions, 8-2additional information, 8-19
Plans and Profileslocation in UI, 8-3
PNIC, 7-6, 7-23Policies
monitoring, 4-3, 4-4, 4-10, 4-16, 4-17update, 8-11
Power distribution unitsmonitoring policies, 4-12
Presentation tier, C-6Private networks
dynamic, 7-3static, 7-3
Profilescopying, 2-13, 8-6, 8-11creating, 8-5creating a profile, 8-10deleting, 8-7, 8-17–8-19details, 8-9discovery, 2-8, 2-9, 2-11, 2-13, 2-14editing, 2-13, 8-6, 8-11firmware, 5-23network, 7-25operational, 8-4, 8-5Referrers, 8-9roles, 8-2, 5storage, 6-30versions, 8-10
Proxy Controllers, 2-5Public networks, 7-4, 7-10Publisher, 5-4
Q
Query Language, B-1
R
RAID Controller, 6-24Remove Asset from Group, 2-54Repositories
Oracle Solaris 11 Package Repository, 5-3Oracle VM Server, 6-7
Repositories (continued)parent, 5-4publisher, 5-4
RepositoryOracel VM Manager, 6-7
Resizing console window, 1-8Roles
asset management, 2-2, 2credentials, 2-21, 2-22jobs, 3-1, 3monitoring, 4-2, 4networks, 7-2, 5plans and profiles, 8-2, 5software libraries, 5-2, 5storage libraries, 6-2, 6user interface, 1-7
Routing mode, 7-18Rules for monitoring, 4-4Run ID, 3-3
SSAN storage
monitoring policies, 4-12SAN storage arrays
monitoring policies, 4-12Scripts, 5-25SDK, A-1, B-1Serial console
credentials, 2-27Serial Console, 2-26Server pools
monitoring policies, 4-12storage libraries, 6-5
Serversmonitoring policies, 4-12
Service tags, 2-14, 2-15Service tier, C-6Session timeout, 1-8Sessions, 1-7Shareable storage, 6-28Shared storage, 6-28Shell scripts, 8-5Show Graph, 1-7SNMP, 2-8SNMPV3, 2-23Software Developer’s Kit (SDK)
SUNWxvmoc-sdk.pkg, 4-8Software Development Kit, C-1Software libraries
actions, 5-2category, 5-25creating, 5-12, 5-13EC Library, 5-3file system, 5-4Firmware images, 5-1
Index-7
Software libraries (continued)images, 5-21local, 5-4NAS, 5-4, 5-13Oracle Linux, 5-13Oracle Solaris, 5-13OS images, 5-1roles, 5-2, 5specifying EC Library, 5-3uploading, 5-28, 5-29viewing, 5-5, 5-30
Software Librariesadditional information, 5-32location in UI, 5-4status, 5-6
SR-IOV, 7-22ssh
console access, 2-26custom key, 2-28
SSHsudo, 2-5
Start page preferences, 1-7Static block storage, 6-12Static Block Storage Library, 6-13Static IP, 7-19Static private networks, 7-3Static route, 7-19Status
jobs, 3-3Storage
actions, 6-2additional information, 6-32iSCSI SAN, 6-26location in UI, 6-2monitoring policies, 4-12moving LUNs, 6-19shared, 6-29storage libraries, 6-1
Storage Connect Plug-insOracle VM Manager, 6-22
Storage Connect Plugin, 6-23Storage libraries
block storagedynamic, 6-12static, 6-12
control domain, 6-7file system, 6-3, 6-10–6-12high availability, 6-31local
creating, 6-11deleting, 6-12editing, 6-11viewing, 6-10
metadata, 6-3NAS, 6-5Oracle Solaris Zones, 6-7
Storage libraries (continued)repositories, 6-7roles, 6-2, 6SAN, 6-3server pools, 6-5virtual datacenter, 6-6
Storage serversExadata, 6-28
Subnets, 7-6sudo, 2-5, 2-21, 2-22Switches
monitoring policies, 4-12Sync, 5-8Synchronizing Oracle Solaris 11 Software Update
Library, 5-8System properties, 2-26System-defined monitoring policies, 4-10, 4-12System-defined rules, 4-4
T
Table refresh frequency, 1-8Tags
asset attributes, 2-45, 2-49service, 2-14, 2-15
Task Execution Order, 3-3Templates
complex deployment plan, 8-15multi-step deployment plan, 8-14simple deployment plan, 8-13
Terminalresize, 1-8
Threshold, 4-17, 4-18Thresholds, 4-4, 4-5, 4-8Time interval, 1-8
UUAR
import, 5-21Unconfigured assets, 2-18Unified Archive, 5-15Unmanaged fabrics, 7-3Update policies, 8-11Upload
results, 5-30Upload Local Action, 5-26Upload Local Configuration File, 5-28Upload Local Software Packages, 5-27Uploading
local content, 5-29User interface
Images, 5-15Jobs, 3-2Monitoring, 4-3networks, 7-2Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance, 6-27
Index-8
User interface (continued)Plans and Profiles, 8-3Software Libraries, 5-4Storage, 6-2
User interface preferencesconnectivity check interval, 1-8console timeout, 1-8job status popup duration, 1-8membership graph, 1-7session timeout, 1-8start page, 1-7table refresh frequency, 1-8time interval, 1-8
User preferencesby role, 1-7membership graph preferences, 1-7options, 1-5summary, 1-5
User-defined monitoring policies, 4-10, 4-18User-defined rules
Boolean Control, 4-5Enumerated Control, 4-5Expression, 4-5parameters, 4-5rule types, 4-5thresholds, 4-5
useradd, 2-27
VVersion history
profiles, 8-10Versions, 8-3, 8-6
View Associated Assets, 4-15View Plugin Details, 6-23Virtual Datacenter
storage libraries, 6-6Virtual disk, 6-3Virtual functions, 7-22Virtual image
metadata, 5-14Virtual machines
monitoring policies, 4-12Virtual network, 7-24Virtual switch, 7-24Virtualization stack, C-6VNIC, 7-24
W
Warning, 4-4Windows
discovering, 2-39Windows Firewall, 2-40WMI, 2-39
Windows Firewall, 2-39, 2-40Windows Management Instrumentation
See WMI, 2-39WMI, 2-39
ZZFS Storage Appliances
firmware, 6-28ZPool Usage Percentage, 4-17, 4-18
Index-9
Index-10
